The-Lost-Science-of-Money. Parte 2b

507
CHAPTER 19
TRIUMPH OF THE BANKERS:

ESTABLISHMENT OF THE
FEDERAL RESERVE
SYSTEM
“The bankers will favor a course of special legislation to increase

their power...They will never cease to ask for more,
...so long as there is more that can be wrung from the
toiling masses of the American People.”
Peter Cooper to Ulysses Grant
June, 1877
The Greenback battles of the 1860s and 1870s were the “real thing.”
For the first and only time in our history, the primary secular problem of
American society was being accurately attacked: the private control of
the money system and the special privileges that elements of society -
the bankers - had usurped for their personal benefit at society's expense.
The earlier attacks by Jefferson were accurate, but hadn't reached
that level of popular participation. The programs of Jackson and Van
Biren had much more popular support but lacked an accurate solution,
ind erroneously instituted a system more dependent on metal.
In contrast, the Greenbacks were (and still are) a viable solution to a
large part of America's monetary problems. They are a method of creat-
rig money without interest costs or debt, and without alienating the con-
trol of the money system from the government of the people. However,
508 The Lost Science Of Money
by the 1880s and 1890s the battle lines had already been skilfully shift-
ed into “side show” arguments over silver and bimetallism. Then, with
the establishment of the Federal Reserve System in 1913, serious dis-
cussion of who should control the nation's money system became almost
impossible to carry on in the American mainstream.
POPULISM - BAGGED BY THE BANKERS
One reason for populism's failure was its diversity, with various
interests from different parts of the country. Populists didn't always
share common goals and could be divided and discouraged. They didn't
fully recognize the deviousness of their opponents. Furthermore, as
average people they were always in need of money and their political
activities reduced their meager resources.
The bankers on the other hand were more closely knit with a nar-
rowly defined objective. Elements among them could draw on centuries
of recorded experience in European court intrigue. Most importantly, the
bankers' treachery was self financing.
In one sense the populist movement was a rising of the victims of a
financial oligarchy, against their oppressors; the victims of usury rising
against the usurers - defining usury in its macro sense as “a misuse of
society's monetary mechanism for illicit gain.”
BELMONT “FACTOR” SPLITS THE DEMOCRATS
The very existence of a populist movement demonstrated a fatal
political weakness. The presence of August Belmont, Baron
Rothschild's American agent, in the top echelons of the Democratic
party would be enough to keep the Democrats from becoming the logi-
cal focal point for the popular forces on the crucial Greenback issue - the
control of the nation's money system.
This neutralizing of the Democrats was of pivotal importance. For
had they solidly embraced the Greenbacks, as they logically should
have, these splinter parties would never have formed and the nation-
wide-majority which in fact existed for the Greenbacks could have
found a more powerful and possibly successful expression through the
Democratic Party.
HIGHLIGHTS OF THE GREENBACK MOVEMENT
This chronological summary briefly highlights some monetary
events of the diverse movement:
*1872 - The National Labour Reform Party demanded an irredeemable
paper currency issued by the Government, “directly to the people.”
19 TRIUMPH OF THE BANKERS - THE FEDERAL RESERVE SYSTEM 509
*1876 - The National Independent Party was organized for the presi-
dential election and nominated Peter Cooper at their Indianapolis con-
vention. Cooper, a civil engineer, was one of the first major industrial-
ists with an outstanding reputation of supporting labor as well. He was
eighty five years old and was to resign in favor of his Vice President.
After losing the election, Cooper sent an open letter to President Grant
on the Money Power:
“This bondage has its manifold center and secret force in more than
2,000 banks that are scattered throughout the country...Such a power of
wealth, under the selfish instincts of mankind, will always be able to
control the action of our government unless that government is directed
by the strict principles ofjustice and of the public welfare. The bankers
will favor a course of special legislation to increase their power... They
will never cease to ask for more,...so long as there is more that can be
wrung from the toiling masses of the American People.... The struggle
with this money power has been going on from the beginning of the his-
tory of this country. l
*In Chicago, an “Independent Greenback Party” organized Cook
County ward by ward. The agitation for a permanent Greenback curren-
cy reached a climax in the congressional elections of 1878. After 1880,
interest began to wane in the face of political defeats dealt to it by the
scandal ridden Grant Administration, from the sheer exhaustion of bat-
tle, and by being diverted on the false silver issue.
*1884 - General Benjamin F. Butler ran for president on a paper money
platform (see Chapter 15).
*1892 - The “Peoples Party” nominated James B. Weaver as their pres-
idential candidate. He received over 1 million votes, and called for the
government to issue a national currency at $50 per capita of population;
this money was to be paid out for public improvements and loaned to cit-
izens at 2% interest.
*March 1893 - General Jacob Coxey of Massillon, Ohio marched on
Washington with thousands of the unemployed. “Coxey's Army,” as it
was called, demanded that the government issue $500,000,000 in non
interest bearing legal tender notes (Greenbacks), to employ 4 million
men in the construction of roads. Coxey's monetary theory appears
sound and his implied threat of force was justified, but he didn't carry
through his thinking to its logical conclusions in terms of his personal
security. The Washington police force was able to arrest him for walking
on the grass at the Capitol building!

THE 1896 WILLIAM JENNINGS BRYAN CAMPAIGN
The Democrats had been kept confused on the money issue. For
example in the 1876 Presidential election, they nominated a “hard
money” advocate (Tilden) for President and a “paper money” supporter
(Hendricks) for Vice President.
When the Democratic Party finally made the money issue their main
thrust, it was done on the false silver question and in a manner the
bankers could live with. John D. Hicks, in The Populist Revolt, noted
that the populist groups learned in the Presidential elections of 1892 that
their silver plank was the most popular position. It was concrete and easy
to understand, and the “Crime of 1873” aroused strong emotions.
Thus William Jennings Bryan's 1896 and 1900 Democratic campaigns
concentrated on the issue of silver coinage, even though Bryan's speeches
indicate that he personally knew more about the nature of money:
“Man is the creature of God and money is the creature of man.
Money is made to be the servant of man and I protest against all theories
that enthrone money and debase man. 2
“The right to coin money and issue money is a function of the
Government. It is a part of sovereignty and can no more be delegated
with safety to individuals, than we could afford to delegate to private
individuals the power to make penal statutes or to levy taxes. 3
Free coinage of silver arguments dominated the 1896 Presidential
election:
“City dailies...were forced by an irresistible public demand to give
liberal space to discussions of the money question,” wrote Hicks.4 By
this time the various populist parties had managed to elect only 6
Senators and 25 Congressmen. The populists backed Bryan.
BRYAN'S “CROSS OF GOLD” SPEECH
William Jennings Bryan had gone into the Democratic Party's con-
vention relatively unknown and emerged as a national figure thanks to
his famous “Cross of Gold” speech, which ended like this:
“If they dare to come out in the open field and defend the gold
standard as a good thing, we will fight them to the uttermost, having
behind us the producing masses of this nation and the world.
Supported by the commercial interests, the laboring interests, and the
toilers everywhere. We will answer their demand for a gold standard
by saying to them: You will not press down upon the brow of
labor this crown of thorns. You shall not crucify mankind upon a cross
of gold.”
Bryan stood before the hall with his arms outstretched as a cross, his
head tilted to the side toward his shoulder. For a long moment there was
a stunned silence, and then an uproar, and he was nominated. It was one
of the great moments in American political history.
In two weeks Bryan, the great orator, visited two-thirds of all the
states giving 400 speeches. Nothing like it had been seen before. The
campaign became known as the “Honest Money Campaign.”
But in reality the campaign offered the American people a choice
19a. William Jennings Bryan supported coining more silver money in his
1896 run for the Presidency. Later his support was crucial in passing the
Federal Reserve Act, and later still, he deeply regretted that fact.
between two systems, either of which could be controlled by the

bankers. As Henry George had pointed out:
“...Gold and silver are merely the banners under which the rival
contestants in this election have ranged themselves. The banks are not
really concerned about their legitimate business under any currency.
They are struggling for the power of profiting by the issuance of •Rer
money, a function properly Offd constitutionally belonging to the nation.
885
The main difference was that Bryan's proposals would mean more
silver money in circulation. That at least was a good thing as money was
too scarce. However, remember that the nation had before it the suc-
cessful example of a superior money system: the Greenbacks. Thus
Bryan's Democratic campaign was a major retrogression from the posi-
tions of the Greenback parties.
DECENTRALIZATION REDUCES SOME PROBLEMS
Populist fervor was not only diffused by their defeats and the silver
diversions but was also reduced because some of the problems they were
protesting were actually improving.
The historian Gabriel Kolko, in The Triumph of Conservatism makes
the case that the economy was becoming less centralized; crops were
good and their prices were improving; and the continued availability of
new land and influx of immigrants spurred growth.
Industrial production itself was becoming more decentralized. For
example, in 1890, ten industrial stock issues were quoted in financial
journals. In 1893 there were thirty, and in 1897 there were more than two
hundred.6
Furthermore, much of the manufacturing was potentially independ-
ent of the banks. According to Kolko, between 1900 and 1910 about
70% of new manufacturing funds were generated internally from prof-
its, not from borrowing.
While there would be some overlap between the financial operators
and the manufacturers, there is an essential distinction between the two.
It takes a different kind of mind for an entrepreneur like Peter Cooper to
build real industries and produce real products, than for a financial oper-
ator such as Morgan to manipulate paper claims and for the most part
create nothing, functioning as a parasite.
At the turn of the century, the Morgan interests were promoting cen-
tralization through mergers. While economists once justified these com-
binations as rationalizations of industry, almost no one, Kolko asserts,
“could consider them that, now” (times and attitudes since Kolko wrote
have retrogressed dramatically back to the earlier view!).
The mergers were mainly a way to sell watered down [diluted] stock.
Morgan's method was to overcapitalize the companies and take large
underwriting fees in the process of selling the stock to the public. The
Morgan interests would then gain control of the boards of directors of
the new entity through the merger process. For example, in 1908, out of
183 industrial mergers, stocks and bonds of $3.085 billion were
issued based on capital worth only $1.459 billion.7
As in the present day, the short term outlook dominated stock mar-
ket activity:
“Insofar as Morgan's profits were not immediate or short range, but
tied to the managerial and profit performance of the new company,
Morgan tended to do relatively poorly,” wrote Kolko, “The new merg-
ers, with their size, efficiency and capitalization were unable to stem the
19b. J.P. Morgan,

American pluto-
crat, began his
career by selling
defective rifles
back to the gov-
ernment in the
Civil War, after
purchasing them
as discounted
damaged goods
from the govern-
ment.
tide of competitive growth. Quite the contrary! They were more likely
than not unable to compete successfully or hold on to their share of the
market, and this fact became one of utmost political importance.”
THE GROWING COMPETITION
Bankers tell us that competition is a hallmark and requirement of the
capitalist system. That's what they say and what they pay professors to
profess, but not what they do. They demand that others compete to better
serve them but abhor competition for themselves. Then they concentrate
on corrupting governments into legislating special privileges for them.
Yet competition and decentralization was even increasing in the field of
banking at the turn of the century. By 1892 state chartered banks sur-
passed nationally chartered banks in importance. The national banks'
share of business continued to decline from that point:
Year State banks accounted for:
1896 61% of total # of banks and 54% of total bank resources.
1913 71% of total # of banks and 57% of total bank resources.9
In 1908 national bank notes represented only 20% of the total circu-
lating currency.1* The number of banks grew from 10,000 in 1900 to
25,000 in 1912.
Still, the New York banks controlled about one-half the total
deposits. Furthermore, because the national bank law wisely limited
their loans to any one borrower to 10% of the banks capital, in 1912
there were only 12 banks capable of making loans over $1 million to any
one fi 11
GOLD AND TECHNOLOGY DISCOVERIES BRING RELIEF
Toward the end of the 19th century the worldwide need for more
money in the existing mixed system of metals, bank created paper and
credits, and government created money was alleviated by some fortu-
nate developments: major gold discoveries in South Africa, Alaska and
Australia; and the invention of the Cyanide leaching process which
extracted a lot more gold from the crushed rock. Annual gold produc-
tion more than doubled in only eight years:12
1890 - 5.7 million ounces of gold produced
1896 - 9.8 “ “ “
1898 - 13.9 “ “ “
It is difficult to accurately estimate the amount of coinage in exis-
tence, because often the same precious metal gets coined and re-coined
by more than one country's mint. Del Mar estimated the gold and silver
coinage available country by country, and concluded that the world's
total grew from $3.7 billion in 1879, up to $6.34 billion in 1899.’ 3
CURRENCY ACT OF 1900
This law established the single gold standard in the U.S. at $1 = 25.8
grains of gold. The deflationary effects normally to be expected from
19c. DEL MAR'S TABLE OF GOLD AND SILVER COINAGE
(source: Del Mar; History Of The Precious Metals)
Countries Gold end

Silver Silver Total
France 37
34 IOO $C j
Empire ... jq
litissia in Europe 74
Russia in Asia . ..
4q
zo
3ò
i7
&O I OO
3+
óo 3o 8o
Belyium
Switzerland t8
Ilenmark ...
Colonies . . io
Egypt . . . . 30 I$ IO 5
Roumsnia, Servia and Bul- ’5
in Af rlca . .
454
........................................................
Other Oriental ...

Total Oriental .
such a move did not materialize because the production of gold had
more than doubled from 1890 to 1898.
When gold enthusiasts refer to the sound workings of a gold stan-
dard in this period, they ignore that it was a highly unusual time for gold
production, where the supply of gold available for money grew much
faster than the population, rather than at its usual inadequate historic rate
of under 1.2% per year.’4 They also ignore that the supply of gold was
augmented by paper notes and deposits issued by banks and government.
TREASURY SECRETARY SHAW'S INNOVATIVE SOLUTIONS
Though the U.S. had been independent for 125 years, there was
still no uniform currency system, and there was no structural flexibility
whereby the banking system could easily adjust to changing economic
conditions.
From 1902 to 1906, Treasury Secretary Leslie M. Shaw faced a
banking system that was limited and inflexible. Nationally chartered
banks were allowed to create only about $800 million in currency, based
on their holdings of government bonds as reserves or collateral. The sys-
tem could not respond well to real business needs or even to the neces-
sary seasonal requirements for money. There was no lender of last resort
when the banks got into trouble and the system was susceptible to booms
and panics over minor events.
Shaw wanted to change the banknotes to read that they were guar-
anteed by the government, slnce in effect they were. He also proposed
implementing what became known as the real bills doctrine, then used
in Europe, where banks could finance industry based on commercial
paper guarantees.
Shaw initiated a program to avert banking panics by depositing gov-
ernment funds or bonds into banks when money was tight. Then, to calm
down boom periods, he would withdraw them.15
“In his final report to Congress, written at the end of 1906...he wrote:
‘If the Secretary of the Treasury were given $100 million to be
deposited with the banks or withdrawn as he might deem expedient, and
if in addition he were clothed with authority over the reserves of the sever-
al banks, with power to contract the national bank circulation at pleasure,
in my judgment no panic, as distinguished from industrial stagnation could
threaten the U.S. or Europe that he could not avert...’
“If [the Treasury's power•1 had been expanded as Shaw requested,
the Treasury would have been clothed with effective power different, but
not clearly inferior to that later assigned to the Federal Reserve System,”
wrote Frledman and Schwartz.16
THE POSTAL SAVINGS SYSTEM
Another solid banking initiative was inaugurated by the Post Office
in January 1911. The Postal Savings System offered savings accounts to
depositors, operating as a deposit bank and making no loans, like the
theoretical operation of the Bank of Amsterdam.
The Postal Savings system became popular. It held 4% of the nation's
savings in 1919. This declined to 2% in 1929, but rose to 13 o3 in 1933
and to 20% in 1947. By the end of 1960 it was back down to 2%. The
percentage declined just before the 1929 crash, perhaps because of the
aggressive atmosphere of the times. The rise into 1933 might indicate
a flight of depositors to safety, and the continued growing share to 1947
could indicate that distrust of the banking system extended long beyond
the Depression.
BANKERS THWART SOCIETAL SOLUTIONS: PANIC OF 1907
Our thesis would predict that Shaw's balanced approach in the hands
of Government would be unwelcome to those seeking to make a business
of manipulating the money system. In 1906 Jakob Shiff was a partner of
Kuhn Loeb, agent for the Rothschild's American interests. Shiff and oth-
ers (including Shaw) publicly warned that the U.S. would face its worst
financial crisis. These warnings foreshadowed the Panic of 1907.
The hidden source of the panic of 1907 was the Bank of England's
instruction in September 1906 to British banks not to negotiate
Amerlcan finance bills but to have them all paid in gold as they matured.
There was also a crisis situation in banking in Amsterdam and Hamburg.
The result was that about 1% of the U.S. gold supply was shipped
abroad, causing a decline in the total U.S. money supply of about 2 ’/› %.
This was enough to generate the banking panic of October 1907.'7
But it was an unusual panic: “The Panic of 1907 was exclusively
banking,” wrote Studenski and Kroos.1
The banks refused to honor their deposits - to pay out cash to their
depositors; however, all of their other financial operations continued
normally. It was a manufactured, unnecessary panic. The major New
York City Banks were later criticized for restricting their payments while
their reserves were still adequate, and for delaying the issue of clearing
house loan certificates to the banking community:
“The six large banks (in NY) acting in concert could have sustained
the local situation...and could have supplied the demands of outside

banks,” wrote Sprague."
The stock market took a major tumble, dropping 46%.
Thus by forcing the export of only 1% of the U.S. gold, foreign
bankers purposely or inadvertently created a nationwide banking crisis!
If the system had been 100% gold money, without any fractional reserve
banking, then the Friedman study would indicate that 2 1/2 % of the
money supply would have had to be exported to create the same crisis
(assuming the bankers' reactions were the same).
The panic of 1907 is also a modern demonstration of the danger to
public safety posed by a gold money standard, which foreign interests
can manipulate at will and easily enough withdraw from circulation.
GOVERNMENT COMES TO THE RESCUE - AGAIN
As usual the bankers were extracted from yet another crisis by help
from the U.S. Government. In November 1907 the Treasury issued $150
million of bonds and certificates and allowed the banks to use them as
additional reserves, and the crisis was overcome. Had it been necessary
for the government to find gold to back the new money it might have
been unable to rescue the banks from their dilemma. The gold standard
ideologues ignore this necessary governmental intervention to save the
system, when they praise the workings of their mythical gold standard
during this period.
THE ALDRICH-VREELAND SYSTEM
The shock over the Panic of 1907 was used by the bankers in their
campaign to gain greater control over the U.S. money system:
“The weakness had long been recognized in the banking litera-
ture. ..It took the dramatic experience of 1907 to make some measure of
reform politically imperative,” wrote Friedman and Schwartz.20
The first step was the formation of the Aldrich-Vreeland system,
which was government controlled through the Comptroller of the
Currency and had the power to authorize some banks to issue new money.
It is perhaps the only example in U.S. history where the bankers
wanted to increase the monetary powers of government officials. What
was going on? It appears to have been a part of the longer term plan to
establish a privately owned central bank. For the Aldrich-Vreeland act
was only for a limited period - it was scheduled to go out of existence in
just six years, in 1914. A section of the act called for a national Monetary
Commission of nine Congressmen and nine Senators to do a study and
make recommendations on the nation's money and banking system.

Senator Aldrich, a bankers man, was Chairman of the commission.
He was in the Rockefeller camp, and was the maternal grandfather of
former New York Governor Nelson Aldrich Rockefeller and his brother
David Rockefeller of Chase Manhattan Bank.
Aldrich-Vreeland worked well, but the plan was to substitute the
Federal Reserve System in its place. Aldrich's monetary commission
issued 24 large volumes, but according to Del Mar nowhere in these
publications was the nature of money defined. The final volume called
for the creation of a privately owned central bank, the “National Reserve
Association” in which “Control was to be exercised completely by pri-
vate bankers,” wrote Studenski and Kroos.21 In the passage of legisla-
tion this would evolve into the Federal Reserve Act.
During its six years, Aldrich-Vreeland functioned well, giving yet
another historical example of monetary powers being effectively and
properly administered by the U.S. Government.
The Aldrich-Vreeland system ultimately issued around $400 million
in currency, representing about 1/4 of the total currency in the publics
hands. It successfully met the one crisis it faced on the outbreak of World
War I in Europe, when there were large withdrawals from American
banks.
The successful handling of that crlsis led Friedman and Schwartz to
remark: “The episode strengthens our view that it would have been
equally effective on the occasion of the next threat of an inconvertibili-
ty crisis which arose in late 1930. 22
FED ESTABLISHED BY STEALTH - BUT IS IT A CONSPIRACY?
Webster's New Twentieth Century Dictionary Unabridged defines
conspiracy as: “A planning and acting together secretly, especially for an
unlawful or harmful purpose, such as murder or treason.” By that defi-
nition, I think the evidence indicates that there was a conspiracy to estab-
lish the Federal Reserve System, by a small group, who knew it would be
harmful to the nation. But readers should consider the information in this
and the next chapter and evaluate the conspiracy question for themselves.
Gabriel Kolko, not a child in such matters, wrote:
“There was no conspiracy during the Progressive era...(while) peo-
ple and agencies acted out of public sight and official statements fre-
quently had little to do with operational realities...There was a basic con-
sensus among political and business leaders as to what was the public
good, and no one had to be cajoled in a sinister manner. 23
But one must consider the work of Georgetown Professor Carroll

Quigley. Historian Quigley also belittled the idea of a childish conspira-
cy, with secret handshakes, and other signs, where orders are given and
obeyed in a top to bottom hierarchy. But he affirmed - even exposed -
the existence of a serious and secret power network that he labeled the
Anglo American Establishment; and which he demonstrated held inordi-
nate power in determining historical outcomes. However, this group
came into existence just at the end of the 19th century, and did not appear
to be involved in creating the Federal Reserve System.
One of the most significant sections of Quigley's book Tragedy and
Hope is on Financial Capitalism and contains this intriguing paragraph:
“The influence of financial capitalism and of the international
bankers who created it was exercised both on business and on govern-
ments, but could have done neither if it had not been able to persuade
both these to accept two “axioms” of its own ideology. Both of these
were based on the assumption that politicians were too weak and too
subject to temporary popular pressures to be trusted with control of the
money system; accordingly, the sanctity of all values and the soundness
of money must be protected in two ways: by basing the value of money
on gold and by allowing bankers to control the supply of money. In do
this it was necessary to conceal, or even to mislead, both governments
arid people about the nature of money and its methods of operation.”
Readers will recognize that conclusion as one of the primary theses
of this book. Quigley gave one example of the deception:
“...bankers, as creditors in money terms, have been obsessed with
maintaining the value of money, although the reason they have tradi-
tionally given for this obsession - that ‘sound money’ maintains ‘busi-
ness confidence’ - has been propagandist rather than accurate.”
Quigley noted that: “Inflation, especially a slow steady rise in
prices, encourages producers, because it means they can commit them-
selves to costs of production on one price level and then, later, offer the
finished product for sale at a somewhat higher price level. 24
Such a situation is usually best for working people, while “price sta-
bility” the Federal Reserve's 1990s mantra, has been really good for
paper manipulations, but bad for the average working man. We'll discuss
this point again.
The caution for Europeans now in the process of forming a new
money system is to be certain of a diversity of outlook, background, reli-
gion and interest on the part of those who are to structure and operate
that money system.

The people of the bank knew what they wanted and actually gave the
nation a small sample of it with Aldrich/Vreeland except that
Aldrich/Vreeland was government controlled. But no matter - they
would make it appear that the new private central bank was to be gov-
ernment controlled also.
Woodrow Wilson, a professor of political economy, whom the king-
makers whisked from his ivory tower at Princeton into the Presidency in
1912, was a Calvinist, trained at John Hopkins University in “Classical
Laissez-Faire, and the political Whiggery of Burke,” wrote Ko1ko.25
Professor H. Parker Willis described his meeting with Wilson:
“My first talk with President-elect Wilson was in 1912. Our conver-
sation related entirely to banking reform. I asked whether he felt confi-
dent we could secure the administration of a suitable law, and how we
should get it applied and enforced. He answered:
‘We must rely on American business idealism. ’26
However much we may blame Willis for his naiveté in helping to
establish the Federal Reserve System, at least he was asking the right
question. How can you trust bankers to run the money system? Here we
have two professors of political economy with little knowledge of busi-
ness history or practical business. Wilson's answer, “We must rely on
American business idealism,” was received seriously, and not greeted
with uproarious laughter, as it deserved to be.
“To precisely what was Wilson committed?...’I am for big business,
and I am against the trusts, but he could not define the major difference
between the two and he never gave the matter serious thought,” wrote
Kolko.27
Professors like Wilson, Willis, and J. Laurence Laughlin, (Willis’
teacher), without real knowledge of the business or trading world but
with over-inflated egos and a religious attachment to the inaccurate
theories of Adam Smith, were easy prey for Europe's and America's
banking operators. With the sharper mindsets of Oriental traders (to use
Butler's phrase), or stock market manipulators, they ran circles around
these sluggard professors and foisted the Federal Reserve System onto
the American people.
THE WORK OF EZRA POUND AND EUSTACE MULLINS
Until the late 1950s, very few Americans had an idea how the
Federal Reserve System functioned. It was only on the initiative of the
American poet Ezra Pound, and his student Eustace Mullins, that it
would be clearly documented in a readable form.
Mullins had studied under Ezra Pound in the late 1940s, as had the
poet T. S. Elliot. Pound understood the abstract nature of money, and the
importance of that concept to society. One of the requirements he set for
his students was that they read all of the available writings of Alexander
Del Mar. T.S. Elliot went on to become one of America's greatest poets;
Mullins' work would be just as important, exposing the fraudulent
money and banking system. For a deeper insight into Ezra Pound and
Mullins, I recommend a biography Mullins wrote on a part of Pound's
life, called This Difficult Individual.
Eustace Mullins was working as a librarian at the Library of
Congress, and had the world's greatest research library on this subject
at his fingertips, plus the knowledge of how to use it. He also had the
willing assistance of other research librarians. To put together the
information that they assembled would otherwise have required a
small fortune, and could not have been done.
Mullins book, The Federal Reserve Conspiracy, was published in
1952, and continues to be the definitive work on the Fed (Federal
Reserve System), from that viewpoint. Through Mullins' work, many
behind the scenes activities of highly placed financiers came to light.
The book is generally banned from discussion in Economics depart-
ments of American universities, as it doesn't hesitate to mention the
names of the people responsible for foisting the Fed onto us. Many of
19d.
American poet Ezra
Pound (1885-1972)
had a deep awareness
of monetary princi-
ples, and some of his
poetry deals with the
destructive moral and
social effects of usury.
Pound required his
students (including
T.S. Elliot) to read all
the writings of mone-
tary historian Alex-
ander Del Mar.
these names are among the “cream” of America's financial establish-

ment, whose donations and foundations finance the colleges and univer-
sities. Some of the names are Jewish, and it is almost impossible to
discuss that in America. Mullins book is especially valuable to read in
conjunction with Milton Friedman and Anna Schwartz's classic, A
Monetary History of the United States, 1867-1960.
ORGANIZING THE FED
In 1901 J.P. Morgan interests and the Kuhn Loeb group formed an
alliance known as Northern Securities. Paul M. Warburg, a recent immi-
grant from Germany and a partner of Kuhn Loeb, was rumored to be
paid $500,000 per year to travel the East Coast and write and lecture on
monetary reform.
“The first detailed plan of central banking came in 1910 when Paul
M. Warburg.. .made public hls plan for a ‘United Reserve Bank,”’ wrote
Studenski and Kroos.28
Senator Aldrich was said to have expressed despair to J.P. Morgan,
over not being able to devise a suitable central bank plan, after receiving
so much conflicting expert testimony at his monetary commission.
Morgan then introduced Aldrich to Warburg, as the one man who
could professlonally come up with a viable plan, according to Ely
Garrison in his memoirs of the events surrounding the creation of the
Fed. Colonel Ely Garrison was one of Teddy Roosevelt's “Rough
Riders,” and a friend and financial advisor to Presidents Theodore
Roosevelt and Woodrow Wilson. He had a lifelong interest and devotion
to monetary reform, and believed that was his special destiny.
On November 22, 1910, an evening train left New Jersey with
Warburg, Senator Aldrich, Frank VanderLip of National City Bank and
other top members of the New York banking establishment, for a nine-
day stay at their hunting lodge on Jeckyll Island, Georgia.
This Jeckyll island meeting devised the “Aldrich” banking plan, pri-
marily authored by Warburg, who objected that it couldn't pass Congress
with Aldrich's name on it, since he was so closely identified with banker
interests. Warburg turned out to be correct; the bill failed to pass with
Teddy Roosevelt, a Republican, in the White House.
AUTHOR? AUTHOR?
In 1912 Wilson won the Presidency and the bankers had the bill re-
written by Prof. H. Parker Willis and Senator Carter Glass, as the Owen-
Glass Bill. Ely Garrison maintained that Willis and Glass really re-wrote
524 The Lost Science O/ Money
a bill that he and Professor William A. Scott of the University of

Wisconsin had re-written and given to Wilson.
Professor Laurence Laughlin, Willis’ old teacher, also thought he
was the author. But Colonel Garrison relates how the bankers’ controlled
him: “Laughlin is in the pay of Kuhn Loeb & Company through a big cloth-
ing manufacturing company which offers so-called economic essay prizes
every year in a competition run by Laughlin,” and, getting a bit nasty:
“... Professor Laughlin of Chicago who, Warburg said, was decid-
edly muddle-headed and therefore easy to lead by the nose. 29
Garrison placed great emphasis on his favorite proviso of the pro-
posed legislation; that loans must be based on the short term commercial
paper connected with new production, not on government bonds or brokefs’
loans. This was the “real bills doctrine.” It was argued that as new money
creation brought new goods into existence, it would not be inflationary. This
was an important feature.
Later observers concluded that the two banking plans were virtually
the same:
“No economic journal dared to compare the [Federal Reserve] Act
with the Aldrich Plan, but such a comparison would show that...there
was no appreciable difference between the two plans,” wrote Mullins. 30
“[The Federal Reserve Act] Establish(ed) a system very similar in
general structure to, and identical in many details with the specific plan
of reform recommended by the (Aldrich) Commission,” wrote Friedman
and Schwartz.3’
But some newspapers did point out how similar the Federal Reserve
Act was to the Aldrich plan, and opposition was building from two mem-
bers of the Glass banking committee, Robert L. Henry, and Joe H. Eagle:
“These men attacked the Glass bill as being virtually identical to the
Aldrich Bill in its basic principles,” wrote Kolko.32
If the bill became accurately identified as the Aldrich bill in
Democratic disguise, it probably could not have been passed into law.
Into the breach stepped William Jennings Bryan:
“It required all the political strength of William Jennings Bryan, the
dominant power in the democratic Party, to get Congress to pass the act”
...(Wilson) could do little towards actually getting Congress to pass the
Federal Reserve Act. That job was done by...William Jennings Bryan. He
acted as Democratic whip to get the act passed, and he was rewarded by
being made Secretary of State,” wrote Mullins.33
THE BANKERS PRETEND TO OPPOSE THEIR OWN BILL

Eustace Mullins was the first to uncover this tricky tactic, which
Colonel Garrison had obscured:
“To still further confuse the American people and to blind them to
the real purpose of the Federal Reserve Act, the chief proponents of the
Aldrich plan, Senator Nelson Aldrich and Frank VanderLip, set up an
enthusiastic hue and cry against the bill. 34
The American Bankers Association echoed them with:
“For those who do not believe in socialism it is very hard to accept
and ratify this proposed action on the part of the government,” stated
their official publication.
This was a bit strange since the executive committee of the American
Bankers Association had actually revised the virtually identical Aldrich
plan, with the comment that they “heartily approve the plan,” wrote
Studenski and Kroos.35
The result of all these machinations was that the bill passed the
Senate on December 19, 1913 by a vote of 54 to 34 and the House on
December 22, by 298 to 60. Wilson signed it into law on December 23, 1913.
The stated purpose of the Federal Reserve Act was:
“An act to provide the establishment of Federal Reserve banks to
furnish an elastic currency, to afford a means of rediscounting commer-
cial paper, to establish a more effective supervision of banking in the
U.S., and for other purposes.”
Cynical observers would later assert that the real reason for the act
was indeed “for other purposes.” Only much later would it become more
clear what had transpired, partly as a result of biographies and obituar-
ies being published, congressional hearings, and then Mullins book,
which drew heavily on such sources.
PARALLELS TO ESTABLISHING THE BANK OF ENGLAND
The historical parallels between the establishment of the Federal
Reserve System in 1913, and the Bank of England in 1694 are striking:
First, the secret efforts surrounding the formation and passage of the
legislation for both institutions. In Chapter 11, we read Paterson's
description of how the Bank of England's legislation was promoted: “All
the while the very name of a bank or corporation was avoided, though the
notion of both was intended...” The Bank of England legislation was not
even framed in its own act, but quietly passed as a rider to a shipping
bill. With the Federal Reserve, we see the maneuvers of creating the
temporary Aldrich-Vreeland system; the secret Jeckyll Island meeting;

the disguising of the Republican bankers' bill as a Democrats' bill; and
the bankers pretending to oppose their own bill!
Second, both laws depended heavily on wealthy and more sophisti-
cated foreign supporters and organizers. The Bank of England was
organized largely by Dutch and Jewish financiers, who provided the
formula and the impetus for it. The formula for the Federal Reserve
System came largely from the Kuhn Loeb bankers connected with the
European Rothschild interests; for Paul Warburg’s overriding impor-
tance in the formation of the Federal Reserve System cannot be denied.
However, the impetus also came from Morgan and it could not have
been done without the complicity, support and organization of America's
financial establishment.
Third, both institutions were very complex and not understood. This
resulted partly from the need to cloak their effect - to obscure that the
nation's sovereignty over its money was being transferred to private per-
sons. Paterson wrote that few persons could understand the Bank pro-
posal. And few could understand the Federal Reserve. Even among the
American press:
“The Nation magazine was the only public organ, so far as I can find
out which pointed out that the issue of the money of the U.S. was being
turned over to a body of men who were neither elected nor answerable
to elections,” wrote Mullins.36
This lack of understanding was further compounded by the vague-
ness of the act itself. Friedman and Schwartz pointed out that:
“The Federal Reserve System therefore began operations with no
effective legislative criterion for determining the total stock of money...
the discretionary judgment of a group of men was inevitably substituted
for the quasi-automatic discipline of the gold standard. Those men were
not even guided by a legislative mandate of intent (except the title of the
act).8837
Even within the Federal Reserve itself, almost no one besides Paul
Warburg and Benjamin Strong had a clue as to what would happen:
“In 1914 when these 12 banks were organized, a large staff of offi-
cers were gathered from all parts of the country and to them was deliv-
ered...just exactly what is contained in the Federal Reserve Act - and no
more. With the exception of Paul Warburg and the writer, there was not
one man in the entire organization who ever had the slightest experience
in foreign banking, nor the opportunity to study the methods and poli-
cies of the banks of issue of Europe,” wrote Benjamin Strong, the first
President of the New York Federal Reserve Bank.3'
This lack of understanding continued for decades as evidenced in
Thomas E. Dewey's questions to Marriner Eccles (then Chairman of the
Federal Reserve System) in a June 17, 1942 appearance before a con-
gressional committee:
Eccles: “I mean the Federal reserve, when it carries out an open
market operation, that is, if it purchases government securities in the
open market, it puts new money into the hands of the banks which cre-
ates idle deposits.”
Dewey: “There are no excess reserves to use for this purpose?”
Eccles: “Whenever the Federal Reserve System buys government
securities in the open market, or buys them direct from the treasury,
either one, that is what it does.”
Dewey: “What are you going to buy them with? You are going to
create credit?”
Eccles: “That is all we have ever done. That is the way the Federal
Reserve System creates money. It is a bank of issue. ’9
Dewey was no slouch; he was to become Governor of New York,
and nearly defeat Truman for the presidency in 1948; yet he had trouble
grasping how the Federal Reserve created money out of thin air. He
probably had believed the normal misinformation that banks mainly re-
lend the money that their depositors place with them.
Fourth, both institutions were privately owned but made to appear as
government bodies.
The introduction to Garrison and Scott's re-written plan submitted to
Wilson made nine points of supposed “dlfference” with the Aldrich plan.
Point number three was:
“The machinery and organization provided under this plan will work
in the open, and are absolutely under government control. 40
Point number four was:
“The ownership of this institution is not confined to banks and can
never be controlled by any special interest or in any section of the country.”
A fifth parallel was that some important early supporters would later
condemn both institutions. In the case of the Bank of England, William
Paterson became so disaffected that he published a book condemning the
Bank's buildup of the national debt.
And with the Fed, several important early supporters regretted it

later. William Jennings Bryan would write:
“In my long career, the one thing I genuinely regret is my part in get-
ting the banking and currency legislation enacted into law. 4’
Professor H. Parker Willis, who thought he wrote the Federal
Reserve act, began to attack it when he saw the extensive foreign influ-
ence on it. Striking out against the Directors of the Fed, Willis wrote:
“What could be expected from a group of men such as composed the
board, a set of men who were solely interested in standing from under
when there was any danger of friction, displaying a bovine and canine
appetite for credit and praise, while eager only to ‘stand in’ with the ‘big
men’ whom they know as the masters of American finance and banking.”
Woodrow Wilson also regretted his role in establishing the Fed, and
later wrote a scathing statement against the Money Power.
Sixth, both institutions gave the impression that their notes were
backed by gold. In fact the Federal Reserve's notes (not its created
deposits) started out as gold backed, but that would soon be changed.
Seventh, both England and America were quickly pushed into major
wars. England warred needlessly for over a century, as Cantillon told us
in Chapter 11. America was immediately drawn into World War One.
THE AGE OLD TECHNIQUES OF MONETARY DOMINATION
The Federal Reserve System employed the standard false monetary
concepts used for centuries to make domination possible. As early as
1735 (see Chapter 12) the philosopher Bishop Berkeley had warned
about them, in the English language. Those false concepts were:
* Money's nature is a commodity.
* Money must be gold.
* Bankers were the source of money in a society, rather than the society
itself.
* Bankers could somehow be trusted to control the money system.
Some of these misconceptions contradict each other, but different
impressions were given to different groups at different times. The result-
ing misunderstanding and confusion is the private central bank's best
protection, as it was with the Bank of England.
“SAFEGUARDS” IN THE FEDERAL RESERVE ACT
It had been easier for the Dutch and Jewish financiers, and their new
Orange Monarchy, to establish the Bank of England as the monetary
sovereign in that nation. In America, a paper money nation from the
start, there was more awareness of the far reaching privilege and power
that such an establishment signified. The sensitivity to the injustice of

such schemes ultimately kept the First and Second U.S. Banks of the
U.S. from evolving into a permanent central bank - even kept them from
surviving - and though this viewpoint could seldom dominate politics, it
posed a substantial block to the ultimate alienation of society's monetary
power to a privately owned central bank.
Thus there were substantial restrictions in the Federal Reserve Act,
which appeared to block arbitrary abuses by bankers, including:
* All printed Federal Reserve notes were to be 100% backed by gold.
* The “real bills doctrine:” all commercial loans created as a deposlt in
a bank were to be backed 100% by commercial obligations based on
new production, plus an additional 14% by gold.
* The Governors of the Federal Reserve Board in Washington were
appointed by the President.
* Both the Secretary of the Treasury and the Comptroller of the
Currency were members of the board.
The bankers accepted limitations to get the plan enacted. Changes
would be made later. Benjamin Strong, the first Chairman of the New
York Fed, wrote to Paul Warburg on November 1, 1913:
“I can reluctantly force myself to admit the necessity of compromise
in matters of management, in the number of institutions to be organized,
in the method of treatment of the national bank notes in fact, as to any
other of the disputed questions raised by the Owen-Glass Bill, but as to
the obligation of the U.S. Government being gratuitously added to these
circulating notes. ..(no)”And:
“Paramount in importance...is the provision that the note issues...are
to bear the obligation of the United States Government. This is a provi-
sional return to the heresies of Greenbackism and fiat money. 42
Strong was concerned that if the notes had the U.S. Government's
obligation printed on them, they'd eventually become a government
issued currency. Then there is no need for the agency of the Fed in the
process, and no need for the government to pay interest on such a cre-
ation of money into perpetuity. What Strong insisted on as crucial was
that Federal Reserve obligations, not U.S. money, be made the money
of the land. Over time, as conditions changed, the bankers could use that
power to remove some restrictions to which they had initially agreed.
As early as June 21, 1917 the 100% gold backing rule on printed
notes was reduced to 40% gold and 60% acceptable commercial paper.
What determined whether commercial paper was acceptable - i.e. as

good as gold? To a large extent Paul Warburg did. He founded and was
Chairman of the International Acceptance Bank until his death in 1932.
Any commercial paper that he and other bankers deemed acceptable
could be used as reserves in the Federal Reserve System.
A. MITCHELL INNES “LEADS” THE WAY
Thus the Federal Reserve System appeared to be based on gold as
money, but the Fed had the potential to substitute bank credit for money.
Just around the time of its inception, two articles appeared in the
Bankers Law Journal (in May 1913, and in February 1914), written by
A. Mitchell Innes, then Consul of the British Embassy in Washington,
DC. They had the effect of preparing the mindset of those bankers who
actually believed in a gold based money system, for the new “reality.”
The articles “evoked much comment” according to the Journal,
whose advance announcement of them lionized their author. Innes
attempted to substitute the idea of credit for the idea of money. To do this
he first had to disavow Adam Smith's erroneous metallist position of
money being gold and silver by weight. That was well and good. The
best and easiest way to attack Smith was to promote an historical analy-
sis of money - so far so good.
But then in order to promote the notion that all money is credit,
Innes had to ignore the historical examples of government money, espe-
cially the American examples such as the Greenbacks and the colonial
currencies. He presented a fictional history substituting credit for money,
erroneously claiming that even coins were credit. In effect Innes
attempted to define money out of existence. He was yet another English
expert befuddling American minds.
This is the general direction 20th century establishment economists
followed: they made inappropriate and false distinctions between “high
powered money” (actually money) and lower powered money (actually
credit). Instead of doing their jobs as economists, and clarifying the cru-
cial distinctions between money and credit, they confused and obfuscat-
ed the concepts.
THE FED IS A FRACTIONAL RESERVE BANKING SYSTEM
In 19th century America, when bankers issued ten times the amount
of banknotes than the actual coinage they held, and still pretended that the
banknotes were convertible to coinage, that was a primitive form of frac-
tional reserve banking. When too many holders of the notes tried to redeem
them for coinage, the bank would suspend redeemability or go under.

Most people have been led to believe that the modern banking busi-
ness consists of taking in deposits and then loaning them out at a higher
rate of interest. But fractional reserve systems like the Federal Reserve
generally allowed the system to loan out about ten times the amount of
reserves that exist in the banking system.
The individual banks no longer issue the banknotes; they now make
loans by creating a credit for the borrower on the bank's books, against
which the borrower can write checks. These checks get deposited in
other banks, and cash is seldom withdrawn. However, bankers pretend
to be able to pay out cash for the created credits that the public holds in
their bank. This is similar to the earlier bankers pretending to be able to
pay coinage for banknotes they had issued.
The problem arises when the public gets worried over the solvency
of their bank, and prefers to hold cash, rather than bank account credits.
Fractional reserve systems are unstable because when depositors get
scared and withdraw cash from the bank, it doesn't take much to start a
run and close the bank.
Europeans may be surprised to learn that for the past three decades
the American people have not had confidence in their banks and most of
the large banks would have been destroyed by runs for one reason or
another. There may be one or possibly two exceptions.
Only one thing has kept this from happening. The Federal Deposit
Insurance Corporation (FDIC, enacted in 1935) guarantees the bank
accounts. People know that the FDIC could not really handle a system-
wide collapse, but they trust and assume that the U.S. Government will.
Thus it is government credit that keeps the banks open in America.
It must be pointed out that the Federal Reserve System turns over
90% of its net income to the U.S. government, from the interest it earns
on money creation. However most of the money in the system is created
by the Fed's member banks, and they keep the net interest income they
get from that process. This is referred to as seigniorage, and it rightfully
belongs to society. Depending on reserve requirements, individual banks
can loan about 1.5 times the amount deposited with them. But then those
loans go out and become further deposits in the banking system, so that
new loans are made on them, etc. Eventually, system wide, a rule of
thumb is that the deposits are multiplied about 10 times.
It must also be pointed out that despite demands from time to time,
the Federal Reserve System has never been independently audited.
THE INCOME TAX ALSO CREATED IN 1913

The small income tax started during the Civil War had been ruled
unconstitutional by the Supreme Court. To establish a new income tax, it
was necessary to pass the 16th amendment to the Constitution. It was
proposed in 1909 and proclaimed ratified in 1913.
The income tax started out at 1% tax on personal incomes over
$3,000 if single, $4,000 if married. This was upper middle class in 1913.
There were also surtaxes on higher incomes, starting at 1% on $26,000
income, going up to 6% on incomes over $500,000. These tax rates were
doubled in September 1916.
As the U.S. entered WWI the basic rates were doubled again on
April 6, 1917, from 2% to 4%. The maximum surtax rate was raised
from 13% to 63%, giving a top rate of 67% for those earning over
$500,000 annually.
A POSITIVE NOTE
Democratic Chairmen of the House Banking Committee have regu-
larly developed a genuine distaste for the Federal Reserve System, and
put forward legislation to nationalize or abolish it. For example,
Congressman McFadden moved in the House to impeach the Federal
Reserve Board in 1933, as we describe in Chapter 20. Chairman Wright
Patman introduced a bill in Congress in 1938 to nationalize the Fed, but
it failed to pass. Chairman Gonzales in the 1980s and 90s introduced leg-
islation to rescind the Federal Reserve Act, but it could never reach the
floor for a vote.
Shortly after the Federal Reserve Act had passed, Congress passed
the Overmann Act, which gave the U.S. Government the power to take
over all the assets of the Federal Reserve and take back control of the
money system. The act expired after two years without being exercised.
However, this is easily corrected. Our government doesn't need an
“Overmann” Act to regain its legitimate monetary powers. The
United States can and should nationalize the Federal Reserve sys-
tem, and the sooner the better.
In Summary, the populist parties arose after the Democrats were
neutralized by European bankers, splintering the national majority that
favored the greenbacks. They were then diverted away from reclaiming
the monetary power, onto the silver issue, leading finally to Bryan's
Honest Money Campaigns. Their concerns abated as new gold discov-
eries and extraction processes softened the money drought.
Treasury Secretary Shaw was methodically stabilizing the banks
when an artificially induced panic in 1906 provided the catalyst for

establishing the Federal Reserve System. Senator Aldrich’s monetary
commission laid the theoretical framework but failed to define money,
and the banking community pretended to oppose their own bill in order
to get it passed. It took 40 years for the story to come out, thanks large-
ly to the public spirited concern of American poet Ezra Pound.
Parallels to the formation of the Bank of England were evident: the
secretive efforts surrounding the legislation; the role of foreign bankers;
the indecipherable complexity of the systems; that the central banks
were presented as government entities but were privately owned and
controlled. But the Fed's legislation had enough advertised benefits for
the farming community to convince some leading populists to mistaken-
ly lend critically needed support to pass the bill.
Notes to Chapter 19
Peter Cooper, open letter to President Grant, June 1, 1877.
2 W.J. Bryan, The Second Battle, (Chicago: W.B. Conkey, 1900), p. 207
W.J. Bryan and the Campaign of 1896, edit., G. Whicher, (Boston: Heath,
1953), section by James A. Barnes quoting the Nation magazine, p. 25.
John D. Hicks, The Populist Revolt, (Univ. of Nebraska Press, 1961), p. 340.
Henry George 1896 N.Y. Journal interview, quoted by Henry George, Jr., Life
of Henry George, (New York: R. Schalkenbach Foundation, 1960), p. 558.
Gabriel Kolko, The Triumph of Conservatism, (Chicago: Quadrangle, 1967).
7 Kolko, cited above, pp. 18-22.
Kolko, cited above, pp. 24, 7.

Kolko, cited above, pp. 120-40.
10
P. Studenski & H. Kroos, Financial History of the U.S., (New York: McGraw Hill,
1952), pp. 210-15.
1 Kolko, cited above, pp. 145-50.
12
Studenski & Kroos, cited above, pp. 233-46.
I
Alexander Del Mar, History of the Precious Metals, (1902, repr., New York:
A.M. Kelley, 1969), p. 456.
14 William F. Hixson, The Triumph of the Bankers, (Westport: Praeger, 1993), p. 13.
'5 Leslie M. Shaw, Current Issues, (New York: Appleton, 1908), pp. 304-11.
'6 Milton Friedman & Anna Schwartz, A Monetary History of the United States,
1867-1960, (Princeton Univ. Press, Natl. Bureau of Econ. Res., 197 l), p. 150.
’7 Friedman & Schwartz, cited above, p. 161.
Studenski & Kroos, cited above, p. 252.
9
see Oliver M. Sprague, History of Crises Under the National Banking System,
(repr., New York: A.M. Kelley, 1968).
20 Friedman & Schwartz, cited above, p. 168.
21 Studenski & Kroos, cited above, p. 255.
22 Friedman & Schwartz, cited above, pp. l 80-185.
2' Kolko, cited above, p. 282.
24 Carroll Quigley, Tragedy and Hope, (New York: Macmillan, 1966), pp. 46-7, 53.
25Kolko, cited above, p. 190-215.
26 Eustace Mullins, The Federal Reserve Conspirac y, (New Jersey: Common
Sense Press, 1954), as quoted on p. 94.

27 Kolko, cited above. p. 255.
2 Elisha Ely Garrison, Roosevelt, Wilson, and the Federal Reserve Law,
(Boston: Christopher Publishing House, 193 l), pp. 260, 283.

30 Mullins, cited above, p. 30.
31 Friedman & Schwartz, cited above, Chapter 4.
'2 Kolko, cited above, p. 234.

°3 Mullins, cited above, pp. 27-9.
34
Mullins, cited above, p. 30.
35
American Bankers Assoc. magazine, April 23, 1911, The Aldrich Plan, Suggested Plan
%r Monetary Legislation, as quoted in Studenski & Kroos, cited above, pp. 258-60.
°7 Friedman & Schwartz, cited above, p. 193.

3' Jan. 3, 1924 Letter from B. Strong to J. Hollander, quoted by Lester V. Chandler,
Benjamin Strong, Central Banker, (Washington: Brookings, 1958), p. 17.

3’ as quoted by Mullins, cited above, p. 130.
40 Garrison, cited above, p. 247.

4
as quoted by Mullins, cited above, p. 29
42
Strong's Oct. 17, 1913 letter to Col. Millard Hunsiker, as quoted by Chandler,
cited above.
535
CHAPTER 20
THE FEDERAL RESERVE

WRECKS AMERICA
“What is banking?...The most dangerous as it is the

most ridiculous form of universal tyranny
the World was ever called upon to destroy.”
Frederick Soddy, Nobel Laureate, 1933'
“...the result is to make into the master

what ought to be the servant.”
The Archbishop of Canterbury, 1942
“...no one can breathe against their will.”

Pius XI, Quadragesimo Anno, 1931
The Federal Reserve System was poorly defined from the start. It
arose out of Aldrich's National Monetary Commission, which didn't
bother to define money. The System's objectives were not spelled out
carefully and its image differed considerably from its underlying poten-
tial. Publicly it continued the retrogression toward gold, away from the
advanced Greenback concept. More privately, it confused money with
credit, in the real bills doctrine. Prominent Democratic leaders such as
William Jennings Bryan and Robert LaFollette, the populist Senator
from Wisconsin, did not see where it would lead and were convinced to
support its passage because they thought parts of it would help farmers.
As the Fed's monetary engines were fired up to finance WWI, we
see as much confusion as conspiracy, right up to the Depression, as an
unstable fractional reserve monetary system based on a false concept of

money, controlled by bankers for private profit, went into high gear.
It was a central bank but its central Board in Washington, D.C., ini-
tially had little or no control over the 12 regional Federal Reserve Banks
around the country (Boston, New York, Philadelphia, Cleveland,
Richmond, Atlanta, Chicago, St. Louis, Minneapolis, Denver, Dallas,
and San Francisco). These 12 banks are separate corporations, owned by
their member banks, which receive a 6% annual dividend on their
shares. Each of these “FRBs” (Federal Reserve Banks) has nine direc-
tors: six are elected by their member banks, and three (non bankers) are
appointed by the Board in Washington.
Initially the 12 FRBs set most of their own policy, following the lead
of the New York FRB, where the system's real power was concentrated.
Its president, Benjamin Strong, was reputedly one of the two men who
actually understood the Federal Reserve System. The other was its pri-
mary author, Paul Warburg, who was on the Washington board.
BANKERS PREFER AMBIGUITY
The Federal Reserve Act gave no specific guidelines for maintaining
a proper money supply, but gave the bankers discretion. One lesson
from the Federal Reserve System is that bankers must not be given
such discretion. The Systems requirements need to be spelled out in
great detail with regard to the desired outcomes to be reached on an
ongoing and sustainable basis.
Ambiguity allows the Fed's image makers to stress the non-banker
directors; but they don't elect an activist or real labor union leader, or
anyone devoted to social justice. Thus the system is firmly in the hands of
bankers and their sycophants.
The bankers have usually pretended that the Fed is a government
body. Even today conservatives and many Libertarians falsely assert that
the “government” and not private bankers control it. The Fed's booklets
assert that the system operates as a “public service.” But rather than take
their word, we'll examine their real life performance.
FED IN THE “NICK OF TIME” FOR WORLD WAR ONE
The Fed started operations on November 16, 1914 with total assets
listed at $143 million. National banks were free to remain outside the
system, and they were slow to join. Still the Fed got rolling just in the
nick of time” for World War One, wrote Secretary of State Cordell Hull.
Other observers marveled at the happy coincidence. Prof. Edwin M.
20 THE FEDERAL RESERVE WRECKED AMERICA 537
Kemerer of Princeton commented:

“One shudders when he thinks what might have happened if the war had
found us with our former de-centralized and antiquated banking system.”
The Journal of Political Economy reacted similarly:
“The effect of the war upon the business of the Federal Reserve
Banks has required an immense development of the staffs of these banks
...Without of course being able to anticipate so early and extensive a
demand for their services in this connection, the framers of the Federal
Reserve Act had provided that the Federal Reserve Banks should act as
fiscal agents of the Government. 2
Mullins commented on this naiveté:
“Mr. Kemmerer's shudders are wasted. If we had kept our ‘anti-
quated banking system, we would never have been able to finance the
allies or enter the war ourselves...the primary function of the central
bank mechanism is war finance. 3
U.S. SELLS ARMS TO BOTH SIDES
From December 1914, both sides turned to the U.S. for war supplies
at any cost. Gold poured in as America's factories were channeled into
war production and exports grew 600%. When the war began the U.S.
was a net debtor in foreign exchange of $3-4 billion; by the end, a net
creditor of $5 billion.4
America's largest bankers also financed England and her allies. By
1917 the Morgans and Kuhn Loeb Co. had floated a billion and a half
dollars of loans to the allies in bonds sold through New York's big
finance houses.5
Wilson refused to heed Secretary of State William Jennings Bryan's
warning that “Money is the worst of all contraband,” and Bryan finally
resigned over the financiers drawing the U.S. into the war. But our
Ambassador to England pushed Wilson toward war:
“The greatest help we could give the allies would be credit. Our gov-
ernment could make a large investment in a Franco-British loan or might
guarantee such a loan. Unless we go to war with Germany, our
Government, of course cannot make such a direct grant of credit,” wrote
Walther Hines Page.6
Less than a month later, Wilson asked Congress for a declaration of
war over the sinking of the Lusitania. Earlier he had tried to declare war
over false reports of the sinking of the Suffolk, which had been attacked
but not sunk. On April 6, 1917 the U.S. declared war on Germany.
WORLD WAR ONE LEAVES THE U.S. IN SERIOUS DEBT

Hostilities ended on November 11, 1918 after just 19 months; but
one of the primary objectives of the Money Power was achieved - the
U.S. was saddled with an unprecedented debt. The war cost the U.S.
about $33 billion, or 20-25% of the GNP, leaving the Federal
Government $24.3 billion in debt in 1920. This was about ten times
greater than the previous high of the debt, back in 1866.7
THE FED DESTABILIZES AMERICA'S MONEY SYSTEM
The effects of the Fed were opposite what the country had been led
to expect:
“The (Federal Reserve System), intended to promote monetary sta-
bility, was followed by about 30 years of relatively greater instability in
the money stock than any experienced in the pre-Federal Reserve period
our data cover...,” wrote Friedman and Schwartz.'
1914-1919 - A CLASSIC GOLD INFLATION
As gold poured into America for war materials, there was a large
increase in the money supply. With plant and equipment and labor
already running at high capacity, this caused a corresponding decrease in
the value of money. From June 1914 to April 1917 the money stock was
up 46% and wholesale prices increased 65%. From April 1917 to May
1920, the money stock rose another 49% and wholesale prices rose
another 55%. Gold coins thus lost over 75 % of their value against com-
modity wholesale prices during the first six years of the Feds rule.9 The
self-described “hard money” advocates who preach that gold money
always keeps its value should study these facts.
Responding to criticism over this gold inflation, the Federal Reserve
Board insisted that the inflation was caused by “increased business
activity. ’0
Thus the Fed's gold standard was not an effective limit on infla-
tion. Only a monetary system that sets objective limits on the money
supply can protect from a rampant inflation. A commodity money
system can't do that; nor can basing money on land, buildings, or new
production. The method of limitation must be defined in the law.
EMERGENCY ATMOSPHERE UNDERMINES
THE CONSTITUTION
Many obstacles to the monetary conquerors were swept aside under
the guise of “war emergency measures.” The closure of the New York
Stock Exchange from July 31, 1914 until April 15, 1915 created an air
of emergency even before the U.S. entered the war. During WWI the
nation's railway system was nationalized, adding to the crisis atmos-
phere in which American values were cast aside - sometimes secretly -
and unconstitutional powers were handed over to Wall Street operators:
“...Woodrow Wilson did turn over this country to the worst elements
in it during the First World War. The American people were put in the
hands of three dictators, all three being Wall Street gamblers who had
never held any elective office in the United States,” wrote Mullins.
“Bernard Baruch, Eugene Meyer Jr., and Paul Warburg.. .exercised
more direct power over the American people than any president, because
back of these men was the strength of the financial oligarchy which had
maintained undisputed sway in this country since 1863...,” wrote
Mullins. He then cited an example of this power, in Baruch's own words:
“Baruch as chairman of the War Industries Board exercised dictato-
rial powers over American manufacturers. At the Nye committee hear-
ings in 1935, Baruch testified:
‘President Wilson gave me a letter authorizing me to take over any
industry or plant. There was Judge Gary, President of United States
Steel, whom we were having trouble with, and when I showed him that
letter, he said “I guess we will have to fix this up,” and he did fix it up.”’11
Eugene Meyer Jr., the son of the dominant partner of Lazard Freres,
was appointed at Baruch's insistence to the Chairmanship of the War
Finance Corporation and was later appointed Governor of the Federal
Reserve Board in 1931. Meyer handled the war finance of those agen-
cies and banks not under the control of the Federal Reserve System.
Meyer eventually bought the Washington Post newspaper, run by his
daughter Katherine Graham until her death in mid 2001.
Paul Warburg was the subject of a U.S. Naval Secret Service Report
of Dec. 12, 1918:
“Warburg, Paul, New York City. German. Naturalized American
Citizen 1911, was decorated by the Kaiser in 1912, was Vice Chairman
of the Federal Reserve Board, handled large sums furnished by Germany
for Lenin and Trotsky. Has a brother who is leader of the espionage system
of Germany,” related Mullins.12
BANK OF ENGLAND DICTATES AMERICAN
MONETARY POLICY IN THE 1920s
“...after W.W.I a close cooperation was established between the
Bank of England and. ..the Federal Reserve Bank of New York...largely
due to the cordial relations existing between Mr. Montagu Norman of the
Bank of England and Mr. Benjamin Strong.. .On several occasions, the
discount rate policy of the Federal Reserve Bank of New York was guid-
ed by a desire to help the Bank of England,” wrote monetary historian
Paul Einzig.13
Fed Governor Leffingwell complained to the Washington Board:
“It is very painful for me to say but when Governor Strong got back
from London he told me that he had agreed on a program with the
Governor of the Bank of England. ..I regard it as exceedingly unfortunate,
in view of all that history, that this agitation of rates comes about when we
must raise $500 million every two weeks to keep from defaulting. 14
In January 1920, the Fed raised its discount rate by 1.25% to 6%. On
June 1, 1920 it was raised again to 7o/«. Wholesale prices, which peaked
in May 1920, fell 56% by June 1921. This was the sharpest decline in
U.S. history, and led to an unnecessarily severe depression in 1920-21.
That depression pushed American farmers into a financial crisis from
which they did not recover, even as the stock market later soared.
20a. On September 16, 1920 at 11:59 AM, a wagon carrying a bomb of dyna-
mite and scrap iron was detonated at Broad and Wall Street, killing 38 and
wounding hundreds. The driver had walked away and was never caught.
BENJAMIN STRONG AND MONTAGU NORMAN:

LOVE AT FIRST SIGHT?
It's pretty clear from their correspondence that Benjamin Strong and
Montagu Norman were involved in more than a business relationship for
years. Norman wrote to Strong on September 6, 1928, on learning that
Strong was to retire due to illness:
“Dear old friend,
I accept the decision that you resign...then the curtain will be rung
down on our stage and then I would like to be on the spot so as to hold
your hard hand at the moment of announcement...But what a stage ours
has been over these 10 or 12 years!...Your dreams have come true and
over these years I have watched the process (as no one else has done)
with affection and pride. For the rest of my life that belongs to me as a
memory which none can take away.
“Whatever is to happen to us - wherever you and I are to live - we
cannot now separate and ignore these years. Somehow we must meet
and sometimes we must live together...I have a feeling that in one way
or another you will still be useful to those whom you have given service
and made sacrifices and they are international and almost world wide. So
I believe the best is yet to be.”1
Exactly who were these people that Benjamin Strong had been “use-
ful” to, “given service” and “made sacrifices” to? These “international,
almost world wide” people? Montagu Norman does not say. He is certain-
ly not referring to the American public.
Since it appears that Strong carried out Norman's wishes and sacri-
ficed his Americans, one might guess he was the submissive partner. But
then when Norman refers to Strong’s “hard hand” all sorts of possibili-
ties arise in the meting out of “manly discipline” to naughty upper class
Englishmen.
WHAT MADE THE “ROARING TWENTIES” ROAR?
Long after WWI ended, the Bank of England still called the tune at the
Fed, fueling the “Roaring Twenties,” and culminating in a great speculative
binge. The two Banking systems, not the government, were responsible:
In 1920, U.S. Government expenditures were 8% of the national
income. In 1929 these expenditures were only 4% of national income. In
1920 the Federal government's debt was $24.3 billion. In 1929 the
Federal Government's debt dropped to $16.9 billion. Clearly it was not
U.S. government programs that fueled the roaring twenties. If anything,
the government did the opposite.’6

Studenski and Kroos point out that in the 1920s the banks aban-
doned the “real bills” doctrine of financing industrial production, and
instead “financed” the financial bubble: “For while member bank com-
mercial loans remained about the same from 1921 to 1929, their securi-
ty loans increased 121%; real estate loans 178% and investments
[increased] 67%. 17
We can see the effects on a chart of the Dow Jones Industrial
Average, as stock prices were shifted into high gear starting around
1926.
ENGLAND'S GOLD STANDARD IDEOLOGY CAUSES
THE 1920s FRENZY
The British pound had been heavily inflated during WW1, with over
5 billion pounds in new debt created. The cost of living index rose from
Dow Jones Industrial Average. 1900-1947

400 381.7
(Sept.)
200
100 «
log. scale
41 2
(July)
20b. The Dow Jones Industrial Average really took off after the Bank of
England's influence was brought to bear on the Fed in 1926 to support
England's foolish gold standard poficy, a major cause of the Great Depression.
100 in 1914 to over 276 in 1920." Yet in 1925 the Bank of England
made the pound convertible into gold at pre-war parity levels and paid
out gold for paper at the old rate, which was not realistic; in fact it was
perverse.
The effects were not felt in England and Europe for a time because
the Federal Reserve System supported the Bank of England by keeping
interest rates low in America, encouraging the export of gold to
Europe. However, the U.S. money supply became progressively more
leveraged, being based on smaller reserves, and the low interest rates
helped to fuel the stock market bubble, driving prices up to unrealistic
levels, from which a collapse was likely.
H. Parker Willis confirmed the foreign source of the policy:
“In the autumn of 1926 a group of bankers. ..[met] in a Washington
hotel. One asked if the low discount rates of the system were not likely
to encourage speculation. ‘Yes’ replied the famous banker, ‘they will, but
that cannot be helped. It is the price we must pay for helping Europe. ’19
The Congressional “Stabilization” hearings of 1928 confirmed that
Europeans [i.e. the English] had determined the Fed's policy, especially
the testimony of Federal Reserve Board Governor Adolph Miller:20
Governor Miller: “I think we are very close to the point where further
solicitude on our part for the monetary concerns of Europe can be
altered. The Federal Reserve board last summer, 1927 [began].. .to ease
the credit situation and to cheapen the cost of money. The official
reasons for that departure in credit policy were that it would help stabi-
lize international exchange and stimulate the exportation of gold.”
Committee Chairman McFadden: “...Where did the suggestions
come from that caused this decision...?”
Governor Miller: “The three largest central Banks in Europe had sent
representatives to this country. There were the Governor of the Bank of
England, Mr. Montagu Norman, the President of the Reichsbank, Mr.
Hjalmar Schacht, and Professor Rist, Deputy Governor of the Bank of
France. These gentlemen were in conference with officials of the Federal
Reserve Bank of New York. After a week or two, they appeared in
Washington for the better part of a day...They came down the evening of
one day, and were the guests of the Governors of the Federal Reserve
Board the following day, and left that afternoon for New York.”
Chairman McFadden: “Was it a social affair, or were matters of
importance discussed?”
Governor Miller: “I would say it was mainly a social affair.

Mr. Kinat “What did they want?”
Governor Miller: These gentlemen were all pretty concerned with the
way the gold standard was working. They were therefore desirous of
seeing an easy money market in New York, and lower rates, which
would deter gold from moving from Europe into this country.
Mr. Beedy: “Was there some understanding arrived at between the rep-
resentatives of these foreign banks and the Federal Reserve Board or the
New York Federal Reserve Bank?”
Governor Miller: “Yes.”
Mr. Beedy: “It was not reported formally?”
Governor Miller: “No.
Chairman McFadden: “You have outlined here negotiations of very
great importance.”
Governor Miller: “I should rather say conversations.”
Chairman McFadden: “Something of avery definite character took place?”
Governor Miller: “Yes.”
Chairman McFadden: “A change of policy on the part of our whole
financial system which has resulted in one of the most unusual situations
that has ever confronted this country financially.”
Mr. Steagall: “The visit of these foreign bankers resulted in money
being cheaper in New York?”
Governor Miller: “Yes, Exactly.”
Governor Miller: “A situation had been created that was distinctly
embarrassing to London by reason of the impending withdTawal of a cer-
tain amount of gold...deposited in the Bank of England by the French
Government...France was beginning to put her house in order for a
return to the gold standard.”
Mr. Steagall: “Is it true that that action stabilized the European curren-
cies and upset ours?”
Governor Miller: “Yes, that is what it was intended to do.”
So the American currency was destabilized to help the Bank of
England fulfill its gold obligations to France. The so-called automatic
functioning of the Bank of England's gold standard required the
Americans to ignore national interests and sacrifice to that British Temple.
The testimony reveals that the “automatic gold standard” was a
myth, and that back then the Federal Reserve System's power really
resided in the New York Fed. The European Bankers spent two
weeks there, and not even one full day in Washington, DC.
THE FED CONCENTRATES MONEY IN TOO FEW HANDS

The credit creation up to 1919 was directed into war production for
an unnecessary war. After the war ended, much of the new money put
into circulation concentrated into the hands of the wealthy. While the
money supply in the 1920s rose only $2.5 billion, wealth became dra-
matically more concentrated in fewer hands. In 1929, one percent of the
population in America owned 36.3% of all the wealth in the country, one
of the high peaks up to then. The rich already owned houses, cars, fur-
niture, etc. Thus it did not greatly encourage production of much more
of such items. Even commodity prices were hardly affected after 1921.
A significant portion of the money went into financial instruments, the
stock market, and office building speculation:
Elgin Groseclose, the late, much under appreciated head of the
Monetary Research Institute in Washington D.C. wrote:
“From 1922 to 1929 the ratio of loans on securities to total loans and
investments of reporting member banks advanced from 25% to more
than 43%...On September 30, 1929 New York banks and trust companies
alone had over seven billion dollars loaned to New York Stock Exchange
brokers to finance security speculation. ..
“A huge building boom followed, the Federal Reserve Board index of
building contracts awarded, rising from 63 in 1913 to 122 in 1925 and 135
in 1928...This boom occurred chiefly in skyscraper offices and
expensive apartment house developments, whose notes were more read-
ily marketable, rather than in the modest single family accommodations.
The result was that when the era had passed the slums still existed, like
rats nests around the whitened skeletons of downtown mastodons...By
1929, member bank loans against real estate, other than farm land,
amounted to $2.76 billion, against $875 million in 1921. 2
THE 1929 STOCK MARKET PEAK
As the market soared in 1927, ’28, and ’29, no doubt most citizens,
other than farmers, thought the Federal Reserve was doing a great job.
The only inflation was in the stock market. But remember this principle:
when the dynamics of a financial situation depends for its rewards and
expectations to be fulfilled, that the stock market be valued over 20
times earnings, the system is headed for big trouble.
By early 1929 the more informed bankers were getting out of the
m ket ntil then, they had reassured Congress and the country that all
tS e1.:
“In March 1928, Roy A. Young, Governor of the Board, was called
before a Senate Committee. ‘Do you think the brokers’ loans are too
high?’ he was asked.
“I am not prepared to say whether brokers’ loans are too high or too
low,” he replied, “but I am sure they are safely and conservatively
made.”
“Secretary of the Treasury Mellon in a formal statement assured the
country that they were not too high, and President Coolidge, using mate-
rial supplied him by the Federal Reserve Board, made a plain statement
to the country that they were riot too high. The Federal Reserve Board,
charged with the duty of protecting the interests of the average man, thus
did its utmost to assure the average man that he should feel no alarm
about his savings. Yet the Federal Reserve Board issued on February 2,
1929, a letter addressed to the Reserve Bank directors cautioning them
against the grave danger of further speculation,” wrote H. Parker Willis,
who became much disillusioned with “his” Federal Reserve System.22
THE BANKERS WERE WARNED AGAINST “SPECULATION”
Then On February 6, 1929 four days after its warning to the 12
Federal Reserve Banks, the Board warned the system's member banks
that their purpose was not to finance speculation in the stock market
through loans on securities. But the New York FRB ignored the warning
and advertised the availability of another $25 million for brokers’ loans.
The System's monetary base had already been moving toward con-
traction. At the end of 1928 the System's holdings of U.S. bonds dropped
from over $600 million to only $230 million, having sold about $400
million of them in the open market during the year. They fell further to
$145 million in the first half of 1929. Since these holdings could be used
as reserves in the fractional reserve system, selling them could remove
multiples of that amount of money from circulation; or it would require a
more leveraged position, or substitution of other, inferior collateral.23
BENJAMIN STRONG WAS READY
Strong's correspondence of August 1928 showed an awareness of
the problem, and how to handle it:
“...the very existence of the Federal Reserve System is a safeguard
against anything like a calamity growing out of money rates. ..we (have)
the power to deal with such an emergency instantly by flooding the
street with money. ..the country is well aware of this.” Strong knew
how much power he personally held to avert a crisis:

“If the system is unwilling to do it, then I presume the NY Bank
must do it alone... 24
Such action could buy the time needed for a more gradual adjust-
ment, without panic. Those who regard “market forces” as deities won't
understand Strong's confidence that, as president in control of just one
of the Federal Reserve Banks, he could avert a crisis and turn back the
seas. They don't appreciate how artificial their market gods really are.
Benjamin Strong knew what he was talking about, and the New York
FRB was the strongest of them.
Unfortunately, Strong became ill on a trip to see Montagu Norman
and died at age 56, before the crash. Remember that it was Strong and
Warburg, among all the high officials in the system, who really under-
stood the nature of the power they wielded.
WARBURG WARNS OF “THE ULTIMATE COLLAPSE”
Paul Warburg, who had been out of the Federal Reserve system
since 1918, painted a very different picture from Strong. Writing in a
March 1929 annual report to the stockholders of his International Acceptance
Bank:
“If the orgies of unrestrained speculation are permitted to spread, the
ultimate collapse is certain not only to affect the speculators themselves
but to bring about a general depression involving the whole country.”
The British press picked up on what was afoot in New York. On May
25, 1929, the London Statist presciently wrote:
“The banking authorities in the United States apparently want a
business panic to curb speculation. 25
THE LAST STRAW

While insiders like Warburg were predicting the “ultimate collapse”
as early as February and March 1929, the stock market went its merry
way, reaching a peak in August. This demonstrates the difficulty of pick-
ing market turning points. The last straw was when the Federal Reserve
Bank of New York raised its discount rate to 6% on August 6, 1929.
Other historic market tops have occurred in August. For example,
the South Sea bubble in August 1720; the Panic of 1873; and the 1987
crash. The crash type of activity has been generally associated with mid-
to-late October, when the declines turned into panics. Seasonal money
supply increases are needed then, to move harvested crops in the north-
ern hemisphere.
THE CRASH
The great crash of 1929 was much more than an economic or mar-
ket phenomenon. It was life and death to hundreds of thousands of
human beings, about 36 million, if one includes the related World War II
casualties.26 The collapse spread from the U.S. to Europe and the rest of
the world, except China, which was on a silver standard, not a gold stan-
dard, and was hardly affected.
It was also an event of deep sociological importance because laissez-
faire ideas had ruled in the 1920s. But the crash made clear to virtually
everyone that “capitalism,” to the extent it was defined by the American
political, economic and market system, had fundamentally failed. That
is the history we have been in the process of unlearning; it is the his-
tory that we appear doomed to repeat once more.
MONEY SUPPLY PLUNGES IN
THE GREAT DEPRESSION
The really crucial data - the money supply figures - were not being
watched at the time. In fact, the figures were not being published in a
timely way and were not readily available. From August 1929 to March
1933 the U.S. money stock fell by one-third !
At the same time, the number of commercial banks fell by about
one-third. The first wave of bank failures came in October, 1930.
Another wave of failures hit in March, 193 t. Domestically, currency was
being withdrawn from the banks, depleting their reserves and creating a
multiple effect on the money supply. Externally, except for 1929 and
1930, gold was being withdrawn from the system by foreigners, having a
similar negative effect on the U.S. money supply.27
Today the money supply figures are watched but are not understood.
Thanks to confusion over the nature of money, the Fed's measurements
of the money supply are primarily measuring the credit supply. But cred-
it and money are two different things, and Fed Chairman Greenspan
admitted in recent testimony that he was having difficulty defining money.
BRITAIN FORCED TO ABANDON ITS
GOLD STANDARD FOLLY
Even after the crash, up to mid-1931, the Fed continued to support
the Bank of England's failing gold standard, extending loans to
European banks while denying them to domestic industry. In mid-1931,
the FRB of New York and other FRBs were buying commercial paper
from the Bank of England and the central banks of Austria, Hungary and
Germany, totaling $145 million.

“Charles E. Mitchell, a director of the New York FRB, was quoted
as saying in all of these cases he was concerned about the soundness of
the operation...and the thing which bothered him with regard to these
foreign credits was the risk involved when, at home, the Federal Reserve
Banks take no risks,” noted Friedman and Schwartz .28
On September 21, 1931 Britain finally abandoned the attempt to
maintain the gold standard at the pre-war price level. Within a year 25
other countries also quit this senseless position. Holding the pound ster-
ling convertible to gold at the pre-WWI price represented an overvalu-
ing of the British currency to the detriment of anyone who owed money
and to the advantage of the creditors.
BARUCH'S DISMAL ADVICE TO ROOSEVELT
Bernard Baruch advised President Roosevelt to:
“...balance the budget and let nature take its course. But the grind-
ing down of prices and wages that would result from such action might
very well have led to a revolution. It wasn't reasonable to expect 12 mil-
lion idle men in the presence of idle machinery to wait that long,”
observed Robert De Fremery, noting that:
“The orthodox banking theorists took the stand that a liquidation of
bank credit would be a “wholesome” thing. ..But obviously a contraction
of the supply of money is not a wholesome thing in terms of the effect it
has on human beings. 29
Roosevelt had experience in the bond trading business and was
“street-wise” enough to ignore much of Baruch's advice. Many present-
day Libertarians and conservative economists still ignorantly repeat
Baruch's advice and criticize Roosevelt for resisting it. But the President
was not in charge of the monetary system, the Fed was, and under cover
of the “orthodox” monetary theories, such as Baruch's, the Fed's Board
did little or nothing to improve the situation.
SOME CONGRESSMEN UNDERSTOOD
In January 1931, Congressman A.J. Sabath of Illinois took to the
House floor after Eugene Meyer had turned down his suggestion that the
proper response to the increase in bank failures was relaxation of eligi-
bility requirements in order to encourage re-discounting, meaning more
Fed lending to banks. Since a main reason given for establishing the Fed
was to be a lender of last resort during emergencies, Sabath wrote:
“Does the board maintain that there is no emergency existing at this
time? To My mind if ever there was an emergency, it is now, and this I

feel, no one can successfully deny. For while 439 banks closed their
doors in 1929, during the year 1930, 934 banks were forced to suspend
business.”
But Meyer refused to act. On the Floor of the House of
Representatives Sabath said:
“I insist it is within the power of the Federal Reserve Board to
relieve the financial and commercial distress. 30
THE SILENT ECONOMISTS
Many economists simply ignored the Great Depression. Friedman
and Schwartz would later write:
“Some academic people, such as Harold Reed, Irving Fisher, J.W.
Angell, and Karl Bopp expressed similar views (to Congressman
Sabath)...Most surprising, some of those whose work had done most to
lay the groundwork for the Federal Reserve Act, or who had been most
intimately associated with its formulation - for example, O.M. Sprague,
E.W. Kemmerer, and H. Parker Willis - were least perceptive...One can
read through the academic economic journals and find only an occa-
sional sign the academic world even knew about the unprecedented
banking collapse in progress, let alone that it understood the cause and
the remedy. 3’
THE “PUSHING ON A STRING” ARGUMENT
There was a widespread belief that just making reserves available in
banks wouldn't solve the problem because businessmen couldn't be
forced to borrow in such bad times. Apologists for the bankers claimed
there were not good loans to be made - that there was no loan demand.
They say the Fed would have been “pushing on a string” in trying to
make loans. We can rephrase their argument: the destruction created by
the bankers made businessmen overly cautious.
However, the 1935 study of C.C. Hardy and Jacob Viner showed
there was loan demand, and gave the real underlying explanation for the
lack of loans:
“There exists a genuine unsatisfied demand for credit on the part of
solvent borrowers, many of whom could make economically sound use of
working capital...that one of the most serious aspects of this unsatis-
fied demand is the pressure for liquidation of old working-capital loans,
even sound ones. That this pressure is partly due to a determination on
the part of bankers to avoid a recurrence of the errors to which they
attribute much of the responsibility for the recent wave of bank fail-
ures.. 32
So the bankers were not trying to make loans and were calling in
existing good loans. Under the disastrous conditions created by the
banking system itself in confusing credit with money, and then using
their creation of that credit to fuel a speculative bubble, normal business
practices had utterly broken down when panic set in. The bankers were
scared to death and for good reason: they were operating a fractional
reserve system that had lost the confidence of its depositors.
Studenski and Kroos point out that those banks that survived were
the ones able to quickly convert their operations from fractional meth-
ods into deposit institutions. Thus the assets of surviving banks shifted
in two directions during the depression:
1) A sharp rise in the portion held in cash; and
2) A sharp rise in investments (mainly government bonds) relative to
loans. In 1929, 40% of bank investments were in government bonds. In
1933 it rose to over 50%.
But if banks are acting as deposit institutions, then some other entity
20c. The “Bonus Vets” of WWI gathered in Washington in 1932 at the depth
of the Depression, to petition Congress to pay the $1,000 bonus already
promised. It was a perfect way to make much needed increases in the money
supply but “conservatives” were again “worried about inflation” and
blocked it. On July 28, D.C. police clashed with the veterans.
General Douglas MacArthur then set their camps on fire.
must create the money. The Federal Reserve refused to do it, and the
conservatives blocked Roosevelt from doing much.
THE BANKERS DIDN'T HELP END THE DEPRESSION
It was within the Fed's power to alleviate the tragedy. In 1929 about
37% of all the banks, controlling about 76% of all the banking resources,
were members of the Federal Reserve System. In August 1929 the
money stock was 10.6 times the gold reserves. By August 1931 the
money stock was only 8.3 times the gold reserves, and gold reserves
were falling. But the Federal Reserve System wouldn't use its
reserves.33 Why didn't they act decisively?
The first reason why the System failed to help the nation is that it
was not really set up to serve the nation's monetary needs. That would
have required a different structure - a nationally owned system, with
explicit societal goals aimed at promoting the general welfare. The
privately owned Fed was designed and set up to promote the short term
profits of the largest bankers, while taking minimal risks. That is ulti-
mately exactly what it did, as the system collapsed.
They never undertook to carry out the responsibilities to society that
this power implies and requires. Contrary to the present day misty-eyed
corporate ads prevalent on TV, which falsely portray a concern for their
social responsibilities to humanity, the essential method of large
American corporations is generally to grab privilege while denying
responsibility. They privatize profits and socialize losses. In the Great
Depression the bankers demonstrated that they felt little or no responsi-
bility towards the American people whose financial lives they con-
trolled.
The second reason for the Fed's dismal performance is that, as
a fractional reserve system, it depended on the public's confidence
in it. The Federal Reserve System could not restore that confidence.
The important monetary moves to get out of the depression came
from Congress, not the Fed. In April 1932, under heavy Congressional
pressure, the System embarked on large scale open market purchases of
about $1 billion in government bonds, injecting the new money into the
economy.
FOLLOWING ADAM SMITH TO THE DOORS OF HELL
The whole spectrum of erroneous ideas that made up Adam Smith's
free market ideology dominated American economics and politics of the
1920s. Of course a real free market, like a free society, cannot be created
by “laissez-faire,” but requires rational legal limits. Especially damaging

was Adam Smith's false analogy of running the government like an indi-
vidual or shopkeeper's budget. That's why Herbert Hoover made these
mistakes, trying to save and economize, in the firm belief that he was
doing the right thing for the nation:
* Hoover ran federal budget surpluses through 1931;
* He put through a major tax increase in 1932;
* He sent federal workers home one day a week to save money.
The poor man followed his training in conservative economic theol-
ogy to the letter, and just made things worse. For those concepts were
not concocted with national interests in mind. The one good move
Hoover made (besides starting the Reconstruction Finance Corporation)
was to double expenditures on public works as depression gripped the
nation. Today conservative ideologues even condemn him for that!
So it should be understood that the nation's depression nemesis was
not just the Federal Reserve mismanaging the money system. The grip
20d. Mariner Eccles, with roots in the American West (Utah), became
Chairman of the Fed during the Depression, and brought a somewhat
less doctrinaire though apparently dour viewpoint to the job.
that the false economic concepts held on the nation was equally dangerous.
Everyone was so sure that Adam Smith's erroneous ideas were correct.
A ROUGH CHANGE OF THE GUARD FROM
HOOVER TO ROOSEVELT
There was a four-month wait in the changeover to the new adminis-
tration. The laissez-faire viewpoint dominated America to such an extent
that Roosevelt, too, had advocated cutting spending and balancing the
budget. However, his monetary intentions were unclear. He realized that
a wider distribution of buying power was necessary for a recovery and
he had promised a “new deal” with vast social reforms.
In Hoover's final days, panicky gold withdrawals pressured the
banking system. The Federal Reserve asked Hoover to close the banks,
but he refused. The Republicans then tried to bluff Roosevelt into pub-
licly promising to continue the gold standard, as the only way to stop the
panic and avoid a banking collapse. But Roosevelt had other ideas.
Roosevelt chose a policy of economic and monetary nationalism,
putting the U.S. national interests above the cosmopolitan (internation-
al) objectives of “classical economics.” John Maynard Keynes had
developed an economic theory to support government deficit spending, to
boost economic growth during down periods. Fortunately the new
Chairman of the Fed, Marriner Eccles, agreed with Keynes and told a
Senate committee that the concept of a balanced budget was archaic. But
Keynes merely promoted a fiscal solution, not really a monetary solution.
KEYNES TO THE RESCUE?
In December 1933 at the request of the New York Times (with some
involvement of Supreme Court Justice Felix Frankfurter), English econ-
omist John Maynard Keynes wrote an open letter to President Roosevelt.
Keynes wisely advised Roosevelt that “Only the expenditures of public
authority” could turn the tide of depression. Well, that was obvious
enough!
However, Keynes inappropriately warned Roosevelt not to cre-
ate the money for this, but only to borrow it, and wrongly advised
him that there was already enough money in circulation, and that:
“increasing the quantity of money.. .is like trying to get fat by buy-
ing a larger belt.”
Several times, his letter attempted to influence Roosevelt to drop his
program of necessary reforms, and to concentrate on short range actions:
“...even wise and necessary reform may, in some respects impede
20e. A typical Depression era scene of unemployed men waiting in line for
free soup. It has become increasingly difficult to find such photos as the
modern whitewash of financial capitalism has gained strength.
recovery. ..N.I.R.A. [National Industrial Recovery Act of June 1933]

which is essentially reform and impedes recovery.. .”
Keynes was therefore not “revolutionary” except in relation to the
utter backwardness of the financial establishment and their economists.
He did not come close to a real solution. That would have been another
issue of Greenbacks, through which the U.S. government would have
taken back the monetary power from those who had abused it.
Ultimately Keynes protected his class from their own stupidity; he was
yet another kind of “English expert.”
Thus the continuing argument over “Keynesianism” is, in large part,
another false monetary debate, such as that between the Currency
School and the Banking School after England's “Bullion Report” (see
Chapter 12); or between “inflation versus hard money” after the 1819
debacle of the 2nd Bank Of The U.S. (see Chapter 16). The real question
has always been whether the nation's money should be created under
law, by government, or under the private caprice of bankers.
556 The Los I Science Of Money
ROOSEVELT “CLOSES” THE BANKS

One fiction put forward is that Roosevelt's executive order closed
many “unwilling” banks. But most of them had already been closed
when he took office. Bank holidays began with Nevada in October 1932.
By March 3, 1933, state governors had declared banking holidays in
about half the states, including New York, Illinois, Massachusetts,
Pennsylvania, and New Jersey. The Federal Reserve Banks and the
Stock Exchanges closed on March 4, 1933. On March 6th, Roosevelt
declared a bank holiday to last until March 15, 1933.
FINANCIAL LOSSES OF THE DEPRESSION
The losses of depositors of the 9,000 American banks that suspended
operations during the four years from 1930 through 1933 were $2.5 bil-
lion. The bank failures were the mechanism through which most of the
decline in the money stock was produced, and this brought on the Great
Depression. The decline in the value of all common stock was about $85
billion.
Though losses on stocks were 34 times the losses on bank deposits, it
was the banking and money system that had caused the debacle. But
the financial losses can't measure the full cost of the lives damaged or
destroyed in the depression.
THE WRECKAGE
In less than two decades under the Federal Reserve System, 5,096
banks went bankrupt; 88% of them had less than $100,000 capital; 94%
of them were in the South, the Midwest, and the West. They took the
nation down with them:34
Item 1929 1932 Chanpe
National Income $87.8 billion $42.5 billion - 52%
Industrial Production $110 billion $58 billion - 47%
D.J. Industrial average 381.17(Sept. high) 41.22 (July low) - 890d
Wholesale price index 95.3 64.8 -32%
Unemployed 3.5 million 15 million + 329%
The value of international trade fell 63% during this period. By the
end of 1934 there were an estimated 5 million households on Federal
relief, about 18 million citizens. Roosevelt began direct relief programs
(FERA) and started work programs that hired people to build roads,
dams, national parks and other projects.
While such expenditures would build the national debt and benefit
the bankers, some of the money spent would also build real infrastruc-
ture. Under a government money system, the U.S. could have as easily
created the money itself, and not have been saddled with the debt. Yet
even with this disadvantage, the nation's monetary system was so
starved for money, that this small government deficit spending helped
the situation.
20f. Franklin Roosevelt understood the possibility of revolution and

attempted to re-build the money supply wiped out in the stock market
crash, with infrastructure projects such as the Hoover Dam and other
work programs. But he was blocked at every turn by conservatives wor-
ried about inflation in the middle of the Great Depression! The financial
establishment finally allowed the creation of bank credit for warfare, when
it was certain the new products of industry would be blown up or sunk,
rather than become useful infrastructure, increasing the nation's wealth
and independence, as Hoover Dam still does. The water and sewer systems
in our upstate New York area were also constructed under Roosevelt.
SUMMARY OF DEPRESSION WORK AND RELIEF

PROGRAMS — 1933 to 1940:'6
RFC (Reconstruction Finance Corp.) set up by Hoover loaned $3 billion
to distressed financial institutions.
Total cost: $283 million
FERA (Federal Emergency Relief Administration) made grants to the
states for direct relief of $34 per family per month from 1933-37.
Total cost: $3.08 billion
CWA (Civil Works Administration) For work programs of the Federal
Government, but not in competition with private industry.
Total cost: $818 million.
WPA (Works Progress Administration) paid $80 a month per person
employed. About 2 million were employed annually.
Total cost: $8.12 billion.
These and several other programs expended a total of $15.51 billion
between 1933 and 1940, only about a sixth of the financial losses of the
depression.
FARMERS CAUGHT IN DEBT TRAP
The temporary rise in commodity prices from 1914 to 1920 had
enticed farmers into too much debt, as the average value per acre rose to
a high of $69.31. From there it plunged along with average farm income
and farm value:35
Year Value per acre Avg. Farm Value Net Income
1920 $69. $10,295 $1,199
1923 56. 8,107 781
1925 54. 7,764 1,041
1930 48. 7,524 651
1933 30. 4,569 304
But while farm income and value dropped dramatically, examine
how debt, interest payments, and taxes remained high, per average farm:
Year Total Debt Mortgage Interest Taxes per Farm
1920 $ 8,448 $574 $483
1923 10,785 679 516
1925 9,912 612 517
1930 9,630 570 567
1933 8,466 472 398
This spelled disaster for the farmers. It would take until 1951 for the
price per acre to again reach the 1920 level.
As important as the work relief efforts, but less well known, were
Roosevelt's programs to assist farmers. The first was by executive order
in the 1935 Resettlement Administration, which became the Bankhead-
Jones Farm Tenant Act of 1937. “Supervised credit,” estimated at about
$2 billion, was successfully offered to bankrupt farmers from 1935 to
1940:
“Under provisions of the ‘supervised credit system’ we monetized.. .
the integrity and work skills of the family.. .a viable improved farm and
family business plan...improved technology into the farming operation
(and) utilized sound guides for re-appraising farm land,” wrote Lee
Fryer, who had been an agricultural finance officer. 37
During this period the gross Federal debt was:
1933 - $22.5 billion
1935 - $28.7 billion
1937 - $36.4 billion
1939 - $40.4 billion
1940 - $43.0 billion.
AT LEAST THE GOVERNMENT ACTED
Some still criticize the government's actions as being ineffective in
ending the Depression. In some ways they were. Remember, the reins of
monetary control were not in government hands, but in those of the
Federal Reserve. And since the depression had a monetary/banking
cause, it required a monetary solution. These critics ignore that and pre-
tend the Federal Reserve was/is a part of the government.
The government generally had to act indirectly, “borrowing money”
created by the Federal Reserve System to pay for its programs instead of
creating the money itself. In effect the Fed held a veto power over the
governments financial actions. This is just one reason why the monetary
power should never be alienated from our government.
ANOTHER GREENBACK IS NEEDED
It is clear from our presentation, especially Chapter 17, that the eco-
nomic destruCtlon cried out for another large issue of new Greenbacks
by the Federal Government. It is clear that this would have created rapid
progress toward recovery.
English economists, such as Keynes, had a small excuse for their
ignorance of the possibility of using Greenbacks - their nation had vir-
tually no tradition of governmentally created money since the late
1600s. Thus in Keynes’ 1930 Treatise on Money, there is no significant
mention of the events of American monetary history, certainly the most

fertile ground for monetary thought and experience. This failure led
Keynes into several historical and theoretical errors.
The American economists should have known better, but thanks to
the purposeful neglect of the historical study of economics and econom-
ic thought, most of them were (and still are) as ignorant of the history
of the Greenbacks as the English economists are.
But not all American economists were ignorant. Some, including
Paul Douglas (later a Supreme Court Justice) joined to promote the
100% reserve solution, discussed in Chapter 24. This would have sub-
stituted government paper money notes in place of the existing, but sus-
pect, bank-created credit money. Intelligent economists must also have
helped frame the Thomas Amendment described below, authorizing the
creation of $3 billion in Greenbacks, if the banks failed to act.
McFADDEN CHARGES THE FEDERAL RESERVE
WITH TREASON
On May 23, 1933 Congressman Louis T. McFadden, Chairman of the
House Banking and Currency Committee, presented Articles of
Impeachment in the House of Representatives against the Federal
Reserve Board of Governors, the Officers and Directors of the Federal
Reserve Banks, the Secretary of the Treasury, and two Assistant
Secretaries of the Treasury, for collusion in causing the Great Depression.
But McFadden stood almost alone, and the impeachment articles
were defeated:
“His fellow congressmen started a whispering campaign that
McFadden was losing his mind...in the next congressional elections
McFadden was defeated by thousands of dollars poured into his home
district of Canton, Pennsylvania [from outside sources],” wrote Mullins.
1933-35 CHANGES IN THE BANKING LAWS
In just 20 years, the Federal Reserve System had wrecked the
American Economy. Clearly, changes were needed in the banking laws.
The old Federal Reserve Board in Washington DC was dissolved and
replaced by a seven-member Board of Governors, appointed by the
President for 14-year terms. The Treasury Secretary and the Comptroller
of the Currency were no longer on the Board, and the Board's real pow-
ers were greatly increased:
* The Fed Governors were given the power to regulate margin require-
ments on stocks.
* Their power over reserve requirements, rediscount rates, and market

operations was increased.
* They had the power to appoint the presidents of the 12 FRB banks.
* Their regulations were given teeth. FRBs that didn't comply could
have their credit foreclosed.
* The Open Market Committee was created, with one representative
from each FRB. This committee could inject new money into the econ-
omy by creating money to purchase government bonds. It could
remove money by selling its holdings of bonds.
* It is forgotten now, but of great importance back then was that in
May 1933 the Thomas amendment authorized the 12 FRB’s to buy $3
billion in government bonds; and if they didn't, it gave the U.S.
President the power to issue $3 billion in Greenbacks. The legal foun-
dation was thus put into place to issue Greenbacks, no matter what
the banks wanted to do.
In 1934 the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation was established,
starting out insuring a maximum deposit of $2,500. This act truly revo-
lutionized the banking system, because of the guarantee that depositors
now had, from non-banking sources. The maximum insured deposit was
increased over the years to its present $100,000 per account. It is main-
ly this guarantee that has kept the nation's banking system from collaps-
ing on several occasions since the Great Depression. And while the
Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation has never had the assets to stop
a general collapse of the system, the public has accurately concluded that
the U.S. government would step in for a rescue.
CHANGE IN THE GOLD STANDARD LAW
The 1934 Gold Reserve Act raised the price of gold from $20.67 per
ounce to $35 per ounce. The U.S. went off the gold standard domesti-
cally, but stayed on for international payments. Citizens were allowed to
keep $100 per person in gold coin or gold certificates. The rest was to be
exchanged for Federal Reserve notes. Of $571 million in coin outstand-
ing, $284 million was turned in.
The 69% rise in the legal price of gold was in terms of dollars which
had themselves become much more valuable. Naturally gold mining
shares benefited; but this had little to do with gold's intrinsic properties,
and everything to do with the law!
SECURITIES LAW CHANGES

Long overdue legislation was passed which mainly increased mar-
gin requirements and limited short selling. The “up-tic” rule required
that a stock's price had to be higher than its previous sale price before a
short sale could be made. This meant that actual holders of a stock were
first in line if they wanted to sell it. Also, those who wanted to make a
short sale had to borrow the same amount of existing shares from a cur-
rent shareholder of the stock (Brokers provided this service). And it
meant that short sellers could no longer sell more of a company's stock
than actually existed. Thus manipulators could not simply drive down a
stock at will.
Margin requirements were raised from the 10% level generally
applied in the 1920s. The Glass-Steagall act separated banking from the
brokerage and insurance businesses, with good effect.
“MODERN” TRADING TOOLS CIRCUMVENT
THOSE LAWS
By the mid 1980s and 90s, virtually all of these good regulations had
been circumvented by the nation's exchanges. Trading in index futures
got around the short sale regulations, because they can be sold in quan-
tity, without up-tics, and without borrowing stock. Adding trading in
options on these futures has further served to emphasize the gambling
hall aspect of the nation's exchanges, while further minimizing the role
they might incidentally play in financing industry. Furthermore, when
such financing of real industry appeared to occur, as in Initial Public
Offerings, the exchange mentality quickly turned most of them into
fiascos for “investors.” That these speculators may be getting what they
deserve is still no excuse for running the exchanges in such a rapacious
manner. This is the “economic man” (as both prey and predator) which
our Chapter 12 described as more monster than human.
As for Glass-Steagall, the politically powerful financial sector has
had legislation passed that has completely neutralized it. The elements
are thus in place for a re-enactment of the Great Crash, in a more mod-
ern format.
THE SOCIAL SECURITY ACT
On August 14, 1935, the single most important poverty fighting leg-
islation in America was passed - the Social Security Act. The idea for a
social security plan was first proposed by Thomas Paine, father of the
American Revolution.38 In addition to old age pensions, Tom Paine's
plan had called for giving young families money to set up their house-
holds. Some conservatives condemn Roosevelt as socialistic, for enact-
ing Social Security. But they have allowed a kind of ideological bitter-
ness to distort their consciousness and are not seeing this clearly. They
must also look at the real world effects of policies, not simply use ideol-
ogy to condemn. Would they attack Thomas Paine, father of the
American Revolution, as a socialist, for first proposing such a program?
Since the early 1970s the financial elite has incessantly worked to
destroy Social Security: first by convincing Americans that it won't be
there when they retire; second by pretending that Social Security has to
be funded by tax payments, when in reality it would be best to have the
money created directly by government, and paid to recipients.
HISTORIC COLLAPSE OF THE GOLD/SILVER RATIO
The Great Depression served up another classic monetary lesson in
the collapse in the price of commodity silver. The monetary theories of
Adam Smith, David Ricardo, Karl Marx, and of Von Mises and the
Austrians, all of which assert a commodity or quasi commodity nature
of money, are refuted by the reality of the silver collapse. This was the
second great collapse of the ratio; the first occurred from the 1870s when
silver was demonetized as described in Chapter 18.
Silver had dropped from $1.38 per ounce in 1919, to 44 cents an
ounce in 1932, down 75%. Since at that time gold was still $20.67 per
ounce, this meant that the ratio was at 47 to 1 instead of the old 16 to 1.
The reason for the ratio collapse was that gold's value was still pro-
tected by law. It demonstrated that legal forces, not market or economic
forces, determine the value of the precious metals. This is a crucial con-
cept to grasp.
The “sanction” of the law (and earlier the “sanctification” of the
Temple) was still valid for commodity gold, but had been withdrawn
from commodity silver. The law is what determined the ratio. The
sanction of the law is what determined the value of the precious met-
als as money.
THE SILVER PURCHASE PROGRAM
In December 1933 Roosevelt directed the U.S. mints to receive all
newly mined domestic silver and pay 65 cents an ounce. This increased
the money supply slightly by subsidizing silver mining. But the Silver
Purchase Act of June 1934 directed the Treasury to purchase all silver,
both at home and abroad, until the price reached $1.29 or the silver
stockpile reached one-third the value of the U.S. gold stockpile.

Like the Sherman silver purchase program of 1890, described in
Chapter 18, it allowed wealthy foreign holders to sell their silver to the
U.S. government at a higher than market price. From 1933 to 1961,
about $2 billion in silver was purchased. Monetary reformers should run
whenever they see the silver (or gold) mining interests coming.
In the mid-1930s, an irreparable break occurred between Roosevelt
and the business community when he imposed several meaningful taxes
upon them. These taxes have now been reduced to inneffectual rates,
which do not adequately compensate society for the educational,
social, legal, and physical infrastructure, on which commerce and
industry depend.
Serious consideration can be given to lowering payroll taxes and re-
imposing the higher levels on the super-rich, for many reasons.
Especially on unearned income and “paper shuffling” activities which
produce nothing, are often of questionable legality and harm the average
citizen. The overwhelming majority of Americans seemed better off
under the old, higher, progressive tax rate system.
THE MONEY SUPPLY FINALLY STARTS INCREASING
From 1933 to 1937 the money stock rose by 46% and wholesale
prices rose by 45%. Stock exchange prices measured by the Dow Jones
Industrial Average rose to 194.4 in March 1937, up 370% from the exag-
gerated 1932 crash low of 41.
ONE MORE INSULT FROM THE FED
Then as recovery was getting underway, the newly constituted Fed
Board of Governors made a last ignorant gesture of obstructionism and
doubled the reserve requirements in the 1936 to 1937 period, cutting
short the recovery, and hamstringing the money supply. This demon-
strated the continuing banker domination of the system.
It would not be until World War II that full monetary expansion was
allowed and full employment was sought, when it was assured the
employment and money would be channeled into destruction rather than
production of infrastructure, houses, and other useful items. In that way
the nation would remain dependent, and unable to resist the future mon-
etary predations of the People of the Bank. The vehemence of Professor
Soddy's statement opening this chapter now becomes understandable.
IF IT HAPPENS AGAIN...
If something like the Great Depression is again inflicted upon us,
should Americans be blamed if they demanded more than money penalties

from the financiers? Such matters are best handled by law. But what if
the law proved too immature or too corrupt (watch the unfolding Enron
case) to punish the perpetrators? Americans have shown great restraint
toward those engaged in financial genocide, mainly because they
haven't understood how the financiers are inflicting more than just
financial harm on the citizenship, causing untold numbers of unneces-
sary and premature deaths. Americans haven't understood that it is
the financiers who are the ones initiating real violence, under cover of
economic theory.
FINANCING WW II - HOW EASY IT IS TO CREATE MONEY
The reader is reminded that we are examining the monetary history
of this period, not all the factors leading up to war. It is far beyond the
scope of this work to pass judgement on President Roosevelt's actions
and motivations in this regard, for example in the events leading up to
Pearl Harbor.
When WWII started in Europe in September 1939 the U.S. had eight
million unemployed workers, a vast unused plant capacity, and:
“a huge reservoir of idle capltal funds,” wrote Studenski and Kroos.39
Knowing that the monetary expansion would go mainly into
destruction, the financiers opened the monetary gates in America:
“From July 1, 1940 to December 1, 1941 expenditures totaled
$21.7 billion, far in excess of anything previously spent by the New
Deal. National defense accounted for 12.7 billion or about 59%.” See
how easy it is to create money? In mid 1941, prices were at 92% of the
1926 price level. From 1941 to 1946:
“...the only bank lending which showed an increase was that which
constitute the financing of the War,” wrote Studenski and Kroos.4’
From July 1, 1940 to June 30, 1946, the Government was allowed
(encouraged!) to spend $387 billion, of which 95% was for the military.
During that period a total of $44.2 billion in taxes were collected
(income tax rates had been raised to 19% for the low end, up to 880/ofor
the high end). The rest, about $343 billion, was paid for by going lnto debt.
The national debt in February 1946 was $279.8 billion. The 31% of
this debt ($87 billion) that was held by the commercial banks can be
considered as money that they created out of thin air.
At the war's end, prices were at 105.8, based on 1926 prices — 100.
When wartime price controls were lifted, prices rose to 169.5 in 1948,
then fell to 157.3 in June 1950. But before accepting the economist's
assertion that big price rises must follow such money creation consider:
1) Would cars have been more or less expensive if the created money
had gone to build millions of new cars instead of military jeeps, trucks
and tanks? Less.
2) If the money blown away on shells, airplanes and sunken ships
had been spent on housing and consumer appliances, wouldn't that have
lowered the cost of those items? Yes.
3) Had the billions wasted on innumerable campaigns of destruction
gone instead into modernizing American plant and equipment, wouldn't
that help keep the cost of goods low for many years to come? Yes, etc.
4) And aside from economic production, don't forget about the dead,
not just the loss of their future production, but the devastation of their
families.
In other words, channeling the new money into production
rather than destruction would have tended to create value, keep
prices down, and not required unnecessary loss of life.
THE “GI” BILL AND THE MARSHALL PLAN
Two important governmental programs for rebuilding after WWII
should be noted - the Marshall Plan to rebuild Europe, and the GI Bill
for the United States. The Marshall plan was funded at only $12 billion,
but had a positive effect, many multiples of that. The GI Bill provided
funds for education to the hundreds of thousands of returning soldiers,
who would become engineers, architects, scientists and teachers.
Though funded at $14 billion, the actual cost can be considered to be less
than zero, considering the productive abilities released and the many bil-
lions in taxes the government would collect on that. The GI Bill of
Rights was said to have finally achieved (within a more limited group)
many of the objectives Roosevelt had attempted earlier.
PROPAGANDA TO RESURRECT CAPITALISM'S
MORAL STANDING
Philosophically, the 1920s had been an orgy not only of speculation,
but of so-called “free market” policies. It had been a time of the belit-
tlement of government and a trusting belief in laissez-faire Capitalism
and markets to serve mankind. The crash and depression put an end to
that. Roosevelt's inaugural address in March 1933 had made it clear:
“...the rulers of the exchanges of mankind's goods have failed
through their own stubbornness and their own incompetence, have
admitted their failure and have abdicated. Practices of the unscrupulous

money-changers stand indicted in the court of public opinion, rejected
by the hearts and minds of men. ..The money-changers have fled from
their high seats in the temple of civilization. We may now restore that
temple to its ancient truths.. .”
Decades later, when many participants and memories were dead,
concerted attempts began by a cabal of economists and financiers to shift
blame for creating and prolonging the depression away from the finan-
ciers and the Federal Reserve System and onto the government. These
economists couldn't admit that the crash and depression was a real life
repudiation of their beloved theories and the financiers' activitles. They
created plausible sounding but false rationales to show that it couldn't
have happened that way; lt must have been the government's fault.
Eventually they indoctrinated ideologically driven youngsters (today's
Libertarians), who had no real experience or accurate knowledge of the
depression, and were easy prey.
For example, Alan Greenspan shifted blame from the financiers to
the government for prolonging the depression. Writing in support of the
position of the orthodox economists in books such as Ayn Rand's
Capitalism the Unknown Ideal, Greenspan repeated Menger's theory of
the origin of money which places the money power into the hands of the
merchants. Others repeated Baruch's vicious advice on allowing a total
deflationary wipeout to occur, and blamed government interference for
prolonging the depression!
Greenspan used the Conservative's basic ploy - blaming the evils
of the private Federal Reserve System on the government. He wrote:
“(T)he twelve regional Federal Reserve Banks (are) nominally
owned by private bankers, but in fact government sponsored, con-
trolled and supported. 41
This false view ignores the attempts of several past Democratic
Chairmen of the House Banking Committee to pass laws to nationalize
or do away with the Federal Reserve System. Henry Gonzales,
Chairman until 1994, introduced such a bill.42 Well, if the Fed is already
a government entity, these economists shouldn't mind too much when it
gets nationalized!
It was from this article and Greenspan's anointed position in the eyes
of Ayn Rand's devoted followers that presidential candidate Nixon made
Greenspan one of his campaign's economic advisors in 1967. Later as
President, Nixon appointed him to the Council of Economic Advisors.
56fI The Lost Science Of Money
Then in 1987 he was appointed Chairman of the Fed.

Americans have watched Alan Greenspan's mannerisms and heard
his nasal voice, and seen him in his $10 suits often enough on television
to understand he is not an evil figure. Where then did Greenspan get
such foolish notions? It was from the conservative Austrian school of
Economics, which his mentor, Ayn Rand, had anointed as the only econ-
omists. Her book service brochures from the 1960s offering books by
many authors on various topics allow only one author in the economics
section - Austrian economist Ludwig Von Mises. The message was clear!
Another “Austrian” economist, F. A. Hayek, could rarely write two
pages without condemning or attacking government in some way,
whether deserved or not. This is most evident in his childish polemic
Denationalisation of Monev:
“The long depression of the 1930s.. .was wholly due to the misman-
agement of money by government - before as well as after the crisis of
1929, 43 and, “It was not ‘capitalism’ but government intervention
which has been responsible for the recurrent crises of the past.. .a theme
repeatedly argued by the late Ludwig Von Mises.”
This chapter demonstrates that Hayek's statement is false. But
whether he is merely wrong, or lying, only Hayek himself could say. It
is difficult to imagine he was so ignorant of the facts presented here.
Greenspan and the Libertarians were duped, but Hayek was probably
prevaricating.
THE CATHOLIC REACTION TO THE DEBACLE
Quadragesimo Anno
In May 1931 Pius XI issued
his encyclical Quadragesimo
Anno (On Reconstruction of the
Social Order) - a remarkable doc-
ument. The title refers to the 40th
anniversary of Leo XIII’s Rerum
20g. Pope Pius XI's 1931 encycli-

cal Quadragessimo Anno is the
Catholic Church's most explicit
statement on the evils of finance
capitalism. It condemned the
money system as “a dictatorship”
where “No one can breathe
against their will.”
Novarum (On the Condition of Workers) which was the Church's initial
effort at spiritual guidance in the modern industrial economy.
While the 1891 Rerum Novarum did call for justice to workers, it
gave the impression of being more concerned with protecting the status
quo of property relations and the social order. It indirectly attacked
reformers such as Henry George. Remedies were to be left to charity!
But Quadragesfmo Anno of 1931 was a different matter entirely and
represented a major shift toward real justice. No longer would the
Church automatically provide easy moral support for powerful systems
and rich individuals doing evil under cover of “conservative” economic
theory:
“(71) In the first place the worker must be paid a wage sufficient to
support him and his family.”
“(88) The right of ordering economic life cannot be left to a free
competition of forces. ..(this poison spring destroys) through forgetful-
ness or ignorance the social and moral character of economic life, (and
holds) that economic life must be...altogether free from and independ-
ent of public authority, because (the) market. ..principle of self direc-
tion.. .governs it much more perfectly than would the intervention of any
created intellect. But free competition. ..cannot direct economic life - a
truth. ..more than sufficiently demonstrated.”
Pius XI then addressed some key monetary matters:
“(105).. .it is obvious that not only is wealth concentrated in our
times but an immense power and despotic economic dictatorship is con-
solidated in the hands of the few.. .”
“(106) This dictatorship ffi being most forcibly exercised by those
who since they hold the money and completely control it, control credit
also and rule the lending ofmoney. Hence they regulate the fiow...of the
life-blood whereby the entire economic system lives, and have so firmly
in their grasp the sotil...of economic life that no one can breathe
against their will. 44
The encyclical pointed out with foresight in 1931 that this financial
system was inexorably moving towards warfare:
“(107) This concentration of power and might. ..lets only the
strongest survive. ..those who fight the most violently, those who give
least heed to their conscience. ..,”generating three kinds of conflict:
“First there is the struggle for economic supremacy itself (then) the
bitter fight to gain supremacy over the state in order to use in economic
struggles its resources and authority; finally there is conflict between
states themselves.”
Very significantly, while noting the importance of charity,
Quadragesimo Anno suggested that juridical actions - legislative remedies -
20h. Archbishop of Canterbury William Temple's eloquent 1942 statement

that banking had become the master, when it should be the servant of soci-
ety, paved the way for the nationalization of the Bank of England in 1946.
were also called for. This represented an important shift towards real
reform. Although the church moves very, very slowly, when the theme
matures, events could move with proper speed as they did in England
after the War.
CHURCH OF ENGLAND DE-FANGS THE BANK OF ENGLAND
While the Catholics in America faced great difficulty translating
these ideas into practice, not so the Anglicans in England. Perhaps two
world wars and a worldwide depression all in less than 35 years, were
enough. The Church of England took the greatest monetary initiative of
the 20th century when it called for the nationalization of the Bank of
England. Using typical English understatement, but making one of the
most morally important public pronouncements on the Money Power of
this or any other century, the Archbishop of Canterbury wrote:
“In the case of money, we are dealing with something which is han-
dled in our generation by methods that are extremely different from
those in vogue a century or half century ago. When there was a multi-
tude of private banks, the system by which credit was issued may have
perhaps been appropriate, but with the amalgamation of the banks we
have now reached a stage where something universally needed - name-
ly money, or credit which does duty for money - has become in effect a
monopoly...
The private issue of new credit should be regarded in the modern
world in just the same way in which the private minting of money was
regarded in earlier times. The banks should be limited in their lending
power to the amount deposited by their clients, while the issue of newer
credit should be the function of public authority.
This is not in any way to censure the banks or bankers. They have
administered the system entrusted to them with singular uprightness and
ability and public spirit. But the system has become anomalous, and, as
so often happens when anomaly has persisted through a long period of
time, the result is to make into the master what ought to be the ser-
v«n/.” Reverend William Temple,
The Archbishop of Canterbury,
London, September 26, 194245
The Bank of England was nationalized in 1946. The Catholic
Church could learn a lot from this courageous act of its younger off-
spring. But unfortunately it was no longer in England, but in America
where the problem was now concentrated. The nexus of financial control,
which had earlier jumped from Holland to England, had once again
shifted westward, to the United States. But it cannot move westward
again.
To summarize, In less than 20 years the Federal Reserve brought our
money system, banks, exchanges and economy to utter ruin. The “fear
of inflation” argument, used as an excuse for the bankers to do nothing
positive, was carried to an absurd level in the middle of the century's
worst deflation.
Again, it was government, not the banks, that rescued the situation.
The crash also momentarily woke the Catholic hierarchy. The Pope con-
demned the money system as a financial dictatorship, and the Anglican
hierarchy paved the way for nationalizing the Bank of England.
Bankers allowed a large creation of new money only when it was
devoted to warfare, not the creation of values for life. Later their propa-
ganda whitewashed what financiers had done, shifting the blame onto
government, the organization that did most to mend the financial
destruction.
The “free market” culture prevalent in the 1920s was re-established
thanks in large part to the polemic writings of Ayn Rand, and the
Austrian economists. The nations exchanges circumvented the regula-
tions put into place by government, to stop another crash. They did this
by u ng derivatives” and by pressuring the Congress to remove the
Notes to Chapter 20
l Frederick Soddy, The Arch Enemy OfEconomic Freedom, (London: self pub-
lished, 1943), p. 6.
2 Eustace Mullins, The Federal Reserve Conspiracy, (New Jersey: Common Sense
Press, 1954), quoting Oct. 1917 Notes of Journal of Political Economy, p. 56

Mullins, cited above, pp. 55-6.
' P. Studenski & H. Kroos, Financial History of the U.S., (New York: McGraw Hill,
1952), p. 284.
6 Mullins, cited above, quoting Walther Hines Page, Ambassador to Britain,
March 5, 1917 letter to Woodrow Wilson, p. 55.

Milton Friedman & Anna Schwartz, A Monetary History of the United States,
1867-1960, (Princeton Univ. Press, Natl. Bureau of Econ. Res., 1971), p. 698.
Friedman & Schwartz, cited above, pp. 196-210.
I
' as quoted by Mullins, cited above, pp. 51-60.
2
' Mullins, cited above, pp. 50-60.
13 Paul Einzig, The Fight for Financial Supremacy, (London: Macmillan, 1931).
14 Lester V. Chandler, Benjamin Strong, Central Banker, (Washington: Brookings,
1958), quoting Leffingwell's comments to the Federal Reserve Board in

Washington, DC, on November 24, 1919.
S Chandler, cited above, pp. 440-60.
16 Studenski & Kroos, cited above, pp. 306-26.
7 Studenski & Kroos, cited above, p. 336-40.

I Albert Feaveryear, 77ie Pound Sterling, (Oxford Univ. Press, 1963), p. 353.
I as quoted by Mullins, cited above, p. 95.

20 Mullins, cited above, quoting the Miller testimony.
2 Elgin Groseclose, Money. The Human Conflict, (1934, Univ. of Oklahoma
Press, 1976), pp. 223-25.

22 Mullins, cited above, quoting H. Parker Willis, p. 96.
2* Mullins, cited above, quoting H.Parker Willis, from The North American
Review, May 1929, pp. 94-101.

24 Chandler, cited above, pp. 460-62.
25 as quoted by Mullins, cited above, p. 100.
26 Antony C. Sutton, Wars and Revolutions, (Hoover Inst. on War, Revolution
and Peace, 1974), on page 25 quotes Ernest & Trevor Dupuy's Encyclopaedia of
Military History, (Harper and Row, 1970, p. 1198).
2* Friedman & Schwartz, cited above, p. 299.
2 Friedman & Schwartz, cited above, p. 345, footnotes quoting Harrison,
Notes, vol.l, June 22, 1931.

2 Robert de Fremery, Money and Freedom, (Self published, 1957), p. 61.

30 as quoted in Friedman & Schwartz, cited above, p. 409.
31 Friedman & Schwartz, cited above, pp. 410-11.
'2 Friedman & Schwartz, cited above, p. 457, quoting the Report on the
Availability of Bank Credit in the Seventh Federal Reserve District, Submitted
to the Secretary of the Treasury, GPO, 1935, pp. vi, 3.
35 Historical Statistics of the United States, Colonial Times to !970, (Washington:
U.S. Dept. of Commerce, Census Bureau, 1975), Series K 361- 375, Series K
256-285, Series K l-16.
37 Lee Friar, Rejections, in The Economics of Convulsion by Harold E. Wills
and Charles Walters Jr., (Kansas City, Mo: Acres USA, 1992), pp. 107-13.
Thomas Paine, Agrarian Justice, Paris, 1797, The Writings Of Thomas Paine,
Vol 3, edited by M. D. Conway, (New York: AMS Press, 1967), pp. 332-38.
Studenski & Kroos, cited above, p. 436.
40 Studenski & KrOos, clted above, p. 455.
41 Alan Greenspan's Gold & Economic Freedom essay in Ayn Rand's
Capitalism The Unknown Ideal, (New York: NAL paperback, 1967).

42 HR4358 in the 97'h Congress, July 31, 1981.
43
F.A. Hayek, Denationalisation of Money, (London: Institute of Economic
AffiilfS, 1978, 2'1d edition), pp. 97, 127.
44 Quadragesimo Anno and Rerum Novarum can be viewed at
http://www.osjspm.org/est/qa.htm
45 As quoted by Bernard W. Dempsey, Interest and Usury, (London: Denis
Dobson, 1948), p. v.
575
CHAPTER 21
GERMANY'S 1923
HYPER-INFLATION UNDER
A PRIVATE CENTRAL BANK
“The terms of the peace appear immeasurably harsh and

humiliating, while many of them seem to me impossible of
performance...The League (of Nations) as now constituted will
be the prey of greed and intrigue...”
Robert Lansing
U.S. Secretary of State, 1919
We now examine some of the monetary events that occurred on the

enemy side, in World Wars I and II, especially the German hyper-infla-
tion of 1923. Discussions of the dangers of inflation inevitably end up at
this worst ever case in the West. Accompanied by economists' warnings
of the dire results of governments printing paper money, the German
hyper-inflation is used to promote the idea that only private bankers can
be trusted to control society's money system.
However, as in other cases, when the monetary facts are actually
examined it becomes clear that those private banking elements were
deeply involved in the speculation that helped to bring down the
Reichsmark. This was not stopped until the government repeatedly took
decisive action against them. First, the broad historical context of this
event:
EMERGING GERMANY
Peter Spufford described how capital towns arose from the medieval
period when the nobility set up hotels near their sovereign's main
residence and left the countryside to spend at least part of the year near
him. This formation of capital towns spurred the division of labor.
Because Germany had no central monarchy, no capital city formed there;
nor did as much division of labor develop in the later medieval period.
Thus Germany was late to centralize.
In 1815 Germany had what could be considered a centralized national
state with the formation of the German Federation. The major “German”
finance houses of the medieval period had been quick students of Italian
finance methods at Venice's German compound, the Foundacio De
Tedeschi. Some, like the Fuggers of southern Germany, had grown to
international prominence as factors in financing the election of emperors.
However, Portugal's opening of the Cape Route around Africa shat-
tered geopolitical relations and from the 16 th century Germany's relative
importance declined as a middle station in East-West trade. The Cape
Route to India circumvented them and shifted power away from Venice
and the Mediterranean up to the North Sea area, as described in Chapters 6
and 8.
BAGHDAD RAILWAY
Germany began altering that situation in 1900 when the Deutsche
Bank financed construction of the Turkish-Baghdad Railway. This
meant German industry, already linked to Istanbul (the “Orient Express”
line) could be directly linked to further eastern markets, circumventing
Britain's naval supremacy. The reformation historian Tawney confirms
the importance of this link and Hjalmar Schacht, one of 20 t' century
Germany's key financial figures, noted that this railway really “irked”
England.
There are other reports of British concern over German dynamism.
Francis Neilson, a former British Member of Parliament and author of
The Makers of War presented the viewpoint that England's old boy net-
work didn't consider itself up to competing with Germany industrially.
In 1907 the widely respected American diplomat Henry White was
instructed to ascertain British views. He met with his friend Arthur
Balfour. White's daughter “overheard” (probably White's way of not
directly violating secrecy pledges) one of White's conversations with
Balfour as follows:
“Balfour (somewhat lightly) ‘We are probably fools not to find a
reason for declaring war on Germany before she builds too many ships
and takes away our trade.”
21 GERMANY'S 1923 HYPERINFLATION UNDER A PRIVATE BANK 577
White: ‘...If you wish to compete with German trade, work harder.’
Balfour: ‘That would mean lowering our standard of living. Perhaps
it would be simpler for us to have a war.’
Balfour, reacting to White's shock ‘Is it a question of right or
wrong? Maybe it is just a question of keeping our supremacy.””
CORRUPT DIPLOMACY
European heads of state were still largely hereditarily selected.
Court intrigue and the system of secret treaties played a large role and
lent itself to warmongering. According to then member of Parliament,
Francis Neilson, the British Parllament had not been informed that
England was committed to a continental war to defend France, if necessary.2
Adding to the problem, the Schlieffen Plan for the emergency military
mobilization of Germany did not allow time for diplomatic negotiations.
Thus the assassination of Austrian Archduke Ferdinand in Sarajevo by
anarchists was given the power of a trigger in starting World War One.
THE ECONOMIC SIEGE
Alfred E. Zimmern's rare 13-page monograph The Economic
Leapor,' written during World War I, deserves attention because of its
content and its source. According to Professor Carroll Quigley, Zimmem
was part of ati elite group which he called the “Anglo American
Establishment. 4
Zimmern sums up the situation on page one:
“What is the economic situation? It can be stated in one sentence:
“The Central Powers are being besieged by practically the entire world
and they have no means at their disposal for bringing the siege to an end.”
Zimmem pointed out that this was the first time in history that such a
large siege had been attempted, and Germany didn't think it was possible. “In
December 1915 the Chancellor remarked ‘Does anyone seriously believe
that we can lose the war on account ofa shortage of rubber?’ Germany's war
preparations were made on an estimate “of a war of one year's duration
at the outside.”
Then Zimmern indicated what was planned for Germany:
“What will happen in the normal course when peace is signed?.
..will the cessation of the physical blockade of German harbors by itself
involve the raising of the siege?.. .But without raw materials there can be
no industrial employment; and demobilization without employment
ready to hand for the disbanded soldier spells social disorder. ..The
Allies.. .by their command of essential supplies control the demobiliza-

tion of the German army and therewith the whole process of German
recuperation.
“The whole civilized world will be faced. ..with the prospect of a
shortage, if not a famine over a period calculated.. .at no less than three
years.” And “Some will have to go short. Who more naturally than
Germany? It is not as if the boycott had to be organized. It will come
about almost of itself unless special provision is made in the peace.”
THE TREATY OF VERSAILLES, 1919
But Lord Lothian (who Quigley lists as a fellow member with
Zimmern of the Anglo American Establishment), was the co-author of
the treaty of Versailles5 and it would not provide for a just peace. The
Treaty of Versailles turned out to be an instrument of continuing warfare.
Even at the time, it drew strong condemnation. The American Secretary
of State Robert Lansing wrote:
“The impression made by it is one of disappointment, of regret, and
of depression. The terms of the peace appear immeasurably harsh and
humiliating, while many of them seem to me impossible of perform-
ance.. .The League (of Nations) as now constituted will be the prey of
greed and intrigue.. .”
Lansing noted that:
“On May 17, I received Mr. Bullit's letter of resignation and also let-
ters from five of our principal experts protesting against the terms of
peace and stating that they considered them as an abandonment of the
principles Americans had fought for. 6
Francisco Nitti, the Prime Minister of Italy, wrote:
“...It will remain forever a terrible precedent in modern history that,
against all pledges, all precedents and all traditions, the representatives
of Germany were never even heard; nothing was left to them but to sign a
treaty at a moment when famine and exhaustion and threat of revolu-
tion made it impossible not to sign.../n the old canon law of the Church
it was laid down that every one must have a hearing, even the devil...the
new society of nations, did not even obey the precepts which the dark
Middle Ages held sacred on behalf of the accused. 7
The cost of the war of all participants totaled three times the value
of all property in Germany. She was eventually ordered to pay a stag-
gering 1.7 billion marks a year (in foreign exchange) for 59 years, until
1988. Even worse, according to the normally circumspect banker,
Hjalmar Schacht:
“The Treaty of Versailles is a model of ingenious measures for the
economic destruction of Germany,” adding:
“Every natural economic advance, every step toward the restoration
of economic confidence was made impossible by the influence of the
foreign political factor. 8
Further complicating matters, immediately after the surrender, on
November 9, 1918, the threatened leftist/communist coup was carried
out, when the Revolutionary Council of Commissioners of the People
overthrew the German government and temporarily took power.
MONETARY DESTRUCTION OF GERMANY
England had financed 20% of WWI through taxation; France 0%;
and Germany 6%. Schacht wrote that Germany's money supply rose
from 7.2 Billion Marks in December 1914, up to 28.4 Billion Marks on
November 7, 1918, the end of the open warfare. This meant that the cir-
culation went from 110 to 430 marks per person.
An index of wholesale prices had risen from 100 in 1913 to 234 in
late 1918, performing close to British indexes. The effect on working
people was cushioned as the index of workmen's wages rose from 100
to 248 during the period.9 Thus the 1st World War seriously damaged but
didn't destroy Germany's money system. That came under the occu-
pying forces.
GERMANY’S 1923 HYPER-INFLATION BY A
PRIVATE CENTRAL BANK
The great German hyper-inflation of 1922-23 is one of the most
widely cited examples by those who insist that private bankers, not gov-
ernments, should control the money system. What is practically
unknown about that sordid affair is that it occurred under the aus-
pices of a privately owned and controlled central bank.
Up to then the Reichsbank had a form of private ownership but with
substantial public control; the President and Directors were officials of
the German government, appointed by the Emperor for life. There was a
sharing of the revenue of the central bank between the private share-
holders and the government. But shareholders had no power to deter-
mine policy.10
The Allies’ plan for the reconstruction of Germany after WWI came
to be known as the Dawes Plan, named after General Charles Gates
Dawes, a Chicago banker. The foreign experts delegated by the League
of Nations to guide the economic recovery of Germany wanted a more

free market orientation for the German central bank.l I
Schacht relates how the Allies had insisted that the Reichsbank be
made more independent from the government:
“On May 26, 1922, the law establishing the independence of the
Reichsbank and withdrawing from the Chancellor of the Reich any
influence on the conduct of the Bank's business was promulgated.”’ 2
This granting of total private control over the German currency
became a key factor in the worst inflation of modern times.
The stage had already been set by the immense reparations pay-
ments. That they were payable in foreign currency would place a great
continuing pressure on the Reichsmark far into the future.
HOW IS A CURRENCY DESTROYED?
In a sentence, a currency is destroyed by issuing or creating tremen-
dously excessive amounts of it. Not just too much of it but far too much.
This excessive issue can happen in several ways, for example by BrltiSh
counterfeiting as occurred with the U.S. Continental Currency, and with
the French Assignats. The central bank itself might print too much cur-
rency, or the central bank might allow speculators to destroy a currency
through excessive short selling of it, similar to short selling a company's
shares, in effect allowing speculators to “issue” the currency.
The destruction of an already pressured national currency through
speculation is what concerns us in this case. A related process was
recently allowed to destroy several Asian currencies, which dropped
over 500/oagainst the Dollar in a few months time, in 1997-98, threaten-
ing the livelihood of millions.
It works like this: First there is some obvious weakness involved in the
currency. In Germany's case it was World War One, and the need for for-
eign currency for reparations payments. In the case of the Asian countries,
they had a need for U.S. Dollars in order to repay foreign debts coming due.
Such problems can be solved over time and usually require some
national contribution toward their solution, in the form of taxes or tem-
porary lowering of living standards. However, because currency specu-
lation on a scale large enough to affect the currency's value is still erro-
neously viewed as a legitimate activity, private currency speculators can
make a weak situation immeasurably worse and take billions of dollars
in “profits” out of the situation by selling short the currency in question.
This doesn't just involve selling currency that they own but making
contracts to sell currency that they don't own - to sell it short.

If done in large enough amounts, in a weak situation, such short selling
soon has self-fulfilling results, driving down the value of the currency
faster and further than it otherwise would have fallen. Then at some
point, panic strikes, which causes widespread flight from the currency
by those who actually hold it. It drops precipitously. The short selling
speculators are then able to buy back the currency that they sold short,
and obtain tremendous profits, at the expense of the producers and work-
ing people whose lives and enterprises were dependent on that currency.
The free market gang claim that it's all the fault of the government
that the currency was weak in the first place. But by what logic does it
follow that speculators take this money from those already in trouble?
Currency speculation in such large amounts should be viewed as a form of
aggression, no less harmful than dropping bombs on the country in question.
Industrialists should realize that when they allow such activity to be
included under the umbrella of “business activity,” they are making a
serious error. They should help isolate such speculation and educate the
populace on how destructive it is, so that it can be stopped through law.
Limitations could easily be placed on speculative currency transac-
tions without limiting those that are a normal part of business and trad-
ing, while stopping the kind of transactions that are thinly disguised
attacks on the country involved. Placing a small tax on such transactions
would be a healthy first move.
TOO MANY GERMAN MARKS ISSUED
By July 1922 the German Mark fell to 300 marks for $1; in
November it was at 9,000 to $1; by January 1923 it was at 49,000 to $1;
by July 1923 it was at 1,100,000 to $l. It reached 2.5 trillion marks to
$1 in mid November, 1923, varying from city to city.13
In the monetary chaos Hamburg, Bremen and Kiel established pri-
vate banks to issue money backed by gold and foreign exchange. The
private Reichsbank printing presses had been unable to keep up and
other private parties were given the authority to issue money. Schacht
estimated that about half the money in circulation was private money
from other than Reichsbank sources.
CAUSE OF THE INFLATION:
SCHACHT'S FIRST “EXPLANATION”
There is often a false assumption made that the government allowed
the mark to fall, in order to more easily pay off the war indemnity. But
21a. This German hyper-inflation currency is the most widely known

example in the West. But never discussed is that it occurred under a privately
owned and controlled central bank, which actually helped speculators to
attack the mark. (top: 20 thousand marks, February 1923; middle: one million
marks, July 1923; bottom: 100 million marks, August, 1923)
since the Versailles Treaty required payment in U.S. Dollars and British
Pounds, the inflationary disorder actually made it much harder to raise
such foreign exchange.
Hjalmar Schacht's 1967 book, The Magic of Money, presents what
appears to be a contradictory explanation of the private Reichsbank's
role in the inflation disaster.
First, in the hackneyed tradition of economists, he is prepared to let
the private Reichsbank off the hook very easily and blame the govern-
ment's difficult reparations situation instead. He minimized the connec-
tion of the private control of the central bank with the inflation as mere
co-incidence:
“The Reichsbank upon which this responsibility (to control infla-
tion) fell could not make up its mind to take action. It held the view that
it was useless to attempt to stabilize the currency so long as the Ruhr was
occupied and the war debts remained unfixed.” Schacht lamented:
“[The] ever growing extent the Reich had to resort to the Reichsbank
if it was to prolong its existence, and because the point at issue was the
survival of the Reich, the Reichsbank did not regard itself justified in
refusing even after the passing in 1922 of the law which gave it formal
autonomy. The legislation of 1922, which was intended to free the
Reichsbank from the claims of the state, came to grief at the decisive
moment because the Reich could not find any way of holding its head
above the water other than by the inflationary expedient of printing
banknotes. 14
In other words they did it to save the government, assumedly making
the new issues of Reichsmarks available for government expenditures.
THEN SCHACHT GIVES THE REAL EXPLANATION
Schacht was a lifelong member of the banking fraternity, reaching
its highest levels. He may have felt compelled to give his banker peers
and their public relations corps something innocuous to quote. But
Schacht also had a streak of German nationalism, and more than that, an
almost sacred devotion to a stable mark. He had watched helplessly as
the hyper-inflation destroyed “his mark.”
For whatever reasons, after 44 years he proceeded to let the cat out
of the bag, with some truly remarkable admissions, which shatter the
“accepted wisdom” the Anglo-American financial community has prom-
ulgated on the German hyper-inflation. But first, some monetary back-
ground to the events of 1923 are needed. Schacht gives the details.
STABILIZING THE MONETARY SITUATION

As the hyperinflation wreaked destruction many plans were put for-
ward to stabilize the currency. In 1923 the Conservative monetary theo-
rist, Karl Helfferich, advanced a plan basing the currency on rye grains
and putting its administration into the hands of a private bank run by
agricultural interests. The support of the farming community was not
sufficient to have it adopted.
INTRODUCING THE RENTENMARK
Because the Mark had been so badly ruined for 18 months, it was
felt that psychologically an altogether different currency was necessary.
Plans centered on a new currency to be called the Rentenmark. The plan
was simple: introduce the new currency in a limited quantity and don't
over-issue it so that it keeps its value and re-establishes confidence.
In order to create a psychological separation from the Reichsbank,
the Rentenbank was set up to loan Rentenmarks to the Reichsbank; and
21b. Hjalmar Schacht

developed currency
controls and bilateral
trade methods for
Germany to continue
international trading,
even after she had
been stripped of her
gold reserves in the
early 1930s. De
Fremery theorized
that this independ-
ence from the gold
standard was an
important factor
among English and
American bankers in
the progression to
WWII.
21 GERMANY’S 1923 HYPERINFLATION UNDER A PRIVATE BANK 585
the Reichsbank issued Rentenmark credits. But the Rentenbank was not
truly independent of the Reichsbank, through various regulations.
SCHACHT PUT IN CHARGE OF STABILIZING THE MARK
Schacht, with 23 years of banking experience, agreed to be made the
government's Commissioner of Currency, a new position created to sta-
bilize the currency. At the time, monetary theorists such as Helfferich
were arguing that the German State wasn't powerful enough to “create
money that would command public confidence and that only the busi-
ness elements of the country acting of their own free will were compe-
tent to accomplish this task.”15 Schacht knew better.
THE GOVERNMENT STABILIZES THE CURRENCY
It took time to convince the population that the new currency would
not be over-issued:
“The invention of the Rentenmark did not stabilize the mark, the
battle for stabilization continued for a year, passing through many a dif-
ficult phase,” Schacht wrote, asserting that it was not the Rentenmark
but the subsequent credit restrictions on how many were created, that
stabilized the currency.16
The formal structure of the Reichsbank had apparently not been
altered in this stabilization period, but it was clearly the government and
society that now actively exercised the monetary control:
“The concurrent political and economic difficulties of the Reich
threatened rapidly to culminate in a catastrophe, when the government at
length braced itself to the resolve to take into its hands once more the
control of the destinies of the German people. In this policy the princi-
ple item was the endeavor to stabilize the mark. 17
The Rentenmarks were put into circulation in three days, from
November 15, 1923. They were not legal tender. There was no fixed
relation to the fallen Reichsmark, and the Rentenmarks could not be
used for international payments.
Schacht stopped all other money issuers and sent all Reichsbank
holdings of private money back to their source for immediate payment,
despite great howls of pain from all those private moneyers.
The Rentenmarks were expressly forbidden to be transferred to for-
eigners. This meant that speculators could not trade them for foreign
exchange to support their speculations when prices went against them.
Schacht's initial actions thus crushed the speculators, a necessary first
step in most monetary reform:

“The speculators had learnt that the Reichsbank was now able, if it
decided to do so, to put an end to all speculation on the foreign exchange
market. The success of the campaign meant an immeasurable increase in
the confidence of the public in the stabilization of the mark.””
How did Schacht determine the value of the Rentenmarks? By the
“seat of his pants.” On November 20, 1923, it was set at $1 = 4.2 trillion
Rentenmarks. Fixing it there was convenient because in peacetime it had
been $1 to 4.2 marks (Readers of Shacht's book published in England
should keep in mind that billion in England means trillion in America).
Schacht remarked that:
“There was no mathematical formula that could provide the solu-
tion. It was a question of instinct, and ultimately of experiment; but the
form of the experiment remained one and the same - namely, the con-
traction of the legal currency. '9
SCHACHT'S REVELATION
It was in describing his 1924 battles in stabilizing the Rentenmarks
that Schacht made his revelation, giving the private mechanism of the
hyper-inflation. Schacht was obviously very upset when the speculators
continued to attack the new Rentenmark currency. By the end of
November 1923:
“The dollar reached an exchange rate of 12 trillion Rentenmarks on
the free market of the Cologne Bourse. This speculation was not only
hostile to the country's economic interests, it was also stupid. In previ-
ous years such speculation had been carried on either with loans which
the Reichsbank granted lavishly, or with emergency money which one
printed oneself, and then exchanged for Reichsmarks.”
“Now, however, three things had happened. The emergency money
had lost its value. It was no longer possible to exchange it for
Reichsmarks. The loans formerly easily obtained from the Reichsbank
were no longer granted, and the Rentenmark could not be used abroad.
For these reasons the speculators were unable to pay for the dollars they
had bought when payment became due (and they) made considerable losses. 20
Schacht is telling us that the excessive speculation against the mark
- the short selling of the mark - was financed by lavish loans from the
private Reichsbank. The margin requirements that the anti-mark specu-
lators needed and without which they could not have attacked the mark
was provided by the private Reichsbank!
This contradicts Schacht's earlier explanation, for there is no way to

interpret or justify “lavishly” loaning to anti-mark speculators as “help-
ing to keep the government's head above the water.” Just the opposite.
Schacht was a bright fellow, and he wanted this point to be understood.
He waited until he wrote the Magic of Money in 1967. His earlier book,
The Stabilization of the Mark (1927), discussed inflation profiteering but
did not clearly identify the private Reichsbank itself as financing such
speculation, making it so convenient to go short the mark.
Thus it was a privately owned and privately controlled central
bank, that made loans to private speculators, enabling them to specu-
late against the nation's currency. Whatever other pressures the cur-
rency faced (and they were substantial), such speculation helped create
a one way market down for the Reichsmark. Soon a continuous panic set
in, and not just speculators, but everyone else had to do what they could
to get out of their marks, further fueling the disaster. This private factor
has been largely unknown in America.
HJALMAR SCHACHT'S BACKGROUND
Why did the banker Schacht give these details after 44 years, when
he could have easily “forgotten” about it? Probably because his sense of
justice was deeply offended over the destruction of the mark aided by
elements of Germany's business and financial community.
For hundreds of years Schacht's family lived in the Ditmarschen
area between the Elbe and Eider rivers, a land of free farmers. Schacht
studied German Philology, then did his doctorate on the English
Mercantilists, demonstrating how they were aware of the quantity aspect
of money from the 1500s and 1600s.2’
Finally, Hjalmar Horace Greeley Schacht was his full name. His
father was a naturalized American citizen who had returned to Germany
as a newspaper editor. Horace Greeley was an important populist lean-
ing U.S. newspaperman of the mid 1870s, and Hjalmar was probably
influenced by his namesake's high reputation.
SCHACHT APPOINTED REICHSBANK PRESIDENT
In December 1923, Schacht was made President of the Reichsbank,
but, before assuming office, he went to England for a meeting with
Montague Norman, Governor of the Bank of England. Schacht wrote, “I
have never engaged in academic controversy either with the nominalists
or with the advocates of an index currency. I have invariably said frankly
that I do not set great store by currency theories, but should be prepared at
any moment to accept any currency adopted by America and England. 2°

SPECULATORS TAKE ANOTHER SHOT
Legitimate credit demands led to a rapid growth of credit extended
by the Reichsbank and the Rentenbank from 609 million Rentenmarks
at the end of 1923, to 2 billion at the end of March 1924. Sensing weak-
ness, the speculators again moved in for a kill, ignoring the law regard-
ing foreign exchange purchases.
In March of 1924 Schacht's regulations (he calls them instruc-
tions') were being violated by the banks:
“(W)hereby foreign exchange purchase orders were to be executed
by the banks only if full cover in German currency was provided by the
purchaser, had not been heeded by various banking firms.” These banks,
including one of the largest (Schacht doesn't name it), impudently
ignored Reichsbank reminders, so their bills were denied re-discounting
by the Reichsbank, effectively blocking them and ending the violations.
From April 7, 1924 the Reichsbank refused to issue new credits for
two months. “The Reichsbank plumped for the stability of the mark,”
wrote Schacht. The speculators had to turn their foreign holdings over to
pay their debts as their trading positions against the Rentenmark lost
money. In this way the Reichsbank increased its foreign exchange
reserves from 600 million marks worth, at beginning of April 1924, to
more than double that by August 7, 1924.23 This indicates a still
immense amount of anti-Mark speculation:
“ ..and the country was still filled with numbers of such specu-
lators, who were not in the least concerned as to whether their good
name and reputation suffered so long as they could pocket the prof-
its,” wrote Schacht.24
HARSH DEFLATION IMPOSED
The contraction pursued by Schacht was brutal. One month money
rates went from 30% to 45%. Overdraft charges rose from 40% to 80%!
After July 1924 they began falling. Schacht's restriction of money was
so harsh that the German government-operated Post and Railways
formed their own banks and began building capital much faster than the
private sector.
By the end of 1924 merchants and others were treating the
Rentenmark and the old Reichmark as equal and Schacht converted the
Rentenmarks into Reichsmarks. He had always been against the
Rentenmarks, considering them a monetary error:
“I made every endeavor to take the Rentenmark out of circulation as

quickly as possible. ..to this end the Reichsbank gave the Rentenmark
parity with the new Reichsmark” and converted them into Reichsmarks.
THE DAWES PLAN
In 1923 the League of Nations had invited General Charles Gates
Dawes to chair a committee to deal with the controversial problem of
German reparations payments. The Dawes Report recommended reduc-
ing the reparations from 132 billion marks down to 37 billion marks. The
U.S. would loan Germany money for reparations payments to France
and England, which countries would then be able to pay some of their
war debts to the U.S. General Dawes was a banker who owned the
Central Republic Bank and Trust Company of Chicago.
The Allies implemented the plan; Dawes shared the Nobel Peace
Prize for 1925 with Austen Chamberlain, and then became Vice
President of the United States from 1925-29, under President Coolidge.
In 1932 Dawes became chairman of Hoover's depression era
Reconstruction Finance Corporation (the RFC), but then Dawes’ bank
failed and became the largest loss of the RFC, costing the U.S.
Government $90 million.
When the Dawes Plan experts structuring a new Reichsbank law
wanted to lengthen from 10 to 50 years the length of time between the
German Government's periodic renewal of the note issuing power of the
Reichsbank, Schacht managed to convince them of the need for some
Government approval of Reichsbank leadership. The Dawes committee
proposed a revenue sharing arrangement of roughly 40% to the private
Banks shareholders, and 55% to the government.25 But eventually it was
agreed the Shareholders got half the first 50 million marks profit, 25%
of the 2nd 50 million profit, and 10% of profits thereafter.
FOREIGN LOANS USED CAREFULLY
After the Dawes Plan loan to the Reichsbank came through in 1924,
foreign credits began to pour in. Foreign bankers had confidence in
Schacht. He was against the loans and insisted that any foreign borrow-
ings only be to finance production, not luxury or consumption. This pol-
icy, from 1924 to 1929, resulted in Germany establishing Europe's most
modern factory system of the period.
In July 1925 laws were passed to go back and examine and adjust
inflation transactions. Injured parties could receive up to 25 % of the real
value of property they had exchanged for the bad paper. Schacht would
SPO The Cost Science OfMoney
resign the Reichsbank Presidency in 1930, in protest over some eco-

nomic mlings of the Allies. In 1932 the WWI war reparations claims
were buried at the League of Nations in Geneva.
HITLER TAKEN BY FEDER'S MONETARY VIEWS
When World War I ended, a destitute Adolf Hitler was given an
assignment by German Army intelligence to watch a tiny political group
called the German Workers Party. He attended a small meeting where
Gottfried Feder's monetary views made a very deep impression on him.
The basis of Feder's ideas was that the state should create and con-
trol its money supply through a nationalized central bank rather than
have it created by privately owned banks, to whom interest would have
to be paid. From this view was derived the conclusion that finance had
enslaved the population by usurping the nation's control of money.
Feder's views could easily have originated from the work of German
monetary theorists such as George Knapp, whose book The State Theory
of Money (1905) is still one of the classics in the monetary area. Right
21c. Gottfried Feder's

monetary views
deep 7 impressed
Hitler when he joined
the tiny German
Worker's Party.
Feder's ideas were
only partially put into
e/Tect by the hiazis
during the Greqt
Depressloii; yet
Germany quickly
recovered whlle
Azaerica aad England
remained mlred in
depression. It was not
armaments spending,
but malnly middle
class housing and
tben roads that were
on page one, Knapp got it right:

“Money is a creature of the law. A theory of money must therefore
deal with legal history.”
Knapp describes the invention of flat money in these terms:
“The most important achievement of economic civilization, the
chartalism of the means of payment [using tokens for money].” For
Knapp, the determination of whether something was money or not was:
“Our test, that the money is accepted in payments made to the States
26
offices.
Near the end of that book, Knapp casually mentions how German
monetary theorists of his day and earlier would study and discuss
American monetary theories. Thus the ultimate source of Feder's view-
point may have been the ideas of the American Greenback movement of
the 1870s.
Unfortunately, Feder's monetary views were mixed up with an all-
consuming anti-Semitism. While the origins of those feelings in
Germany at that time are beyond the scope of this book, some attention
should be drawn to the strange personage of H. S. Chamberlain, an early
20th century figure who helped instigate racially based anti-Semitism in
Germany.
H. S. CHAMBERLAIN PROMOTES RACISM
An Englishman by birth, Houston Stuart Chamberlain had been
brought up in France with French as his mother tongue. But “at age 27
he accomplished the astounding feat of acquiring a new nationality. *7
He became thoroughly German, wrote two books on the great compos-
er Richard Wagner, eventually marrying one of his daughters.
Chamberlain's family ranked high in the British power structure; his
uncle Neville (“peace in our time”) Chamberlain was later Prime
Minister of England.
In 1910 Chamberlain published Foundations of the 19th Century - a
thousand pages in two volumes. The book made him a trusted confidant
at Kaiser Wilhelm's court. The book is like a sandwich - the first section
is readable; the next half is a jumble of mostly rambling emotional gen-
eralities; and the concluding section is again readable.
German and other biblical scholars had been examining Judaism,
Christianity and the Bible on a historical basis. They had worked out a
fairly good idea of the Old Testament's various authors in terms of their
periods and their political motives. The Bible was being critically
analyzed as an historical document rather than as the word of God. This

developing knowledge had important negative implications for Judaism
and for Christianity as well, especially those sects that had deified the
Bible as the absolute word of God.
Chamberlain's Foundations over simplified and distorted these con-
clusions and redirected them into a racial attack on the Jews. The key to
Chamberlain is that he based this attack on race, not on culture, not on
particular activities or deeds. Anticipating the objection that there are
good and bad among all groups, Chamberlain incredibly wrote:
“There are no good and bad men. ..on the other hand there are cer-
tainly good and bad races. 28
Who Chamberlain really served can be guessed from those his book
supported and those he attacked. Germany was about half Catholic and
half Lutheran. He attacked Luther; he attacked Catholicism; he praised
Calvin as a purely religious reformer.
Chamberlain supported William III'd of Orange and the Puritans,
“The glorious Puritans,” he calls them. “It was about the year 1700 when
William of Orange had banished the treacherous Stewarts and finally
laid the foundations of the constitutional state,” he wrote.29
This is the same William III'd whose regime quickly allowed the
nefarious Bank of England to be founded as discussed in Chapter 11.
Chamberlain attacked Aristotle for “fettering science,” when it was
Aristotle who helped invent science. His history ignored the great body of
work the Catholic Scholastics did for economic justice, as if to say
forget about isolating anti-social behavior, just look at race.
Thus among Chamberlain's “friends” are those whom this book has
identified as directly connected with monetary trouble making. Some of
those he attacked are among our monetary heroes. His emotional, racial
attack against Judaism was very harmful for Germany and that may not
have been an accident.
SCHACHT BATTLES FEDER
When the National Socialists came to power, Schacht was re-
appointed head of the Reichsbank, partly to reassure German big busi-
ness and foreign bankers. Schacht battled against Feder's un-orthodox
monetary views:
“Nationalization of banks, abolition of bondage to interest payments,
and introduction of state Giro Feder’ money, those were the high sound-
ing phrases of a pressure group which aimed at the overthrow of our
money and banking system. To keep this nonsense in check I called a

bankers' council which made suggestions for tighter supervision and
control over the banks. These suggestions were codified in the law of
1934...In the course of several discussions I succeeded in dissuading
Hitler from putting into practice the most foolish and dangerous of the
ideas on banking and currency harbored by hls party colleagues. 30
Conrad Heiden noted that:
“Industry did not want to put economic life at the mercy of such men
as Gregor Strasser or Gottfried Feder, who marching at the head of small
property owners incited to revolution, wanted to hurl a bomb at large
scale wealth. Feder announced that the coming Hitler government would
create a new form of treasury bills, to be given as credits to innumerable
small businessmen, enabling them to re-employ hundreds of thousands
and millions of workers. Would this be inflation? Yes ! said Walter Funk,
one of the many experts who for the past year or two had advised Hitler;
an experienced and well known finance writer, collaborator of Hjalmar
Schacht and, in Hitler's own eyes, a guaranty that big business would
treat him as an equal. ..Hitler decided to put an end to the public squab-
ble by appointing Goring to [oversee the questions].”
Feder's faction was then given the four year plan to keep them busy.31
FEDER LOST
Feder quickly lost the battle with Schacht and the German business
establishment. Little is written about this. Perhaps he was in over hls
head monetarily, or maybe he just lost his confidence in opposing cen-
turies of English political economists who were quite good at pretending
they knew what they were doing. Feder wrote of his monetary plan:
“Intensive study is required to master the details of this problem.. .
a pamphlet on the subject will shortly appear which will give our mem-
bers a full explanation of this most important task. ... 32 But this was
1934, which means he hadn't clearly reduced the problem to wrltten
form since 1919, over 15 years earlier.
“When the time comes we shall deal with these things in further
detail. ..,” Feder wrote, but indeed his party was in power, and the time had
come.
Feder was “put out to pasture” by the National Socialists, serving as
an under secretary in the Ministry of Economic Affairs. He was later
transferred to commissioner for land settlement, and then completely
sidetracked as a lecturer at the Technische Hochschule in Berlin.
BUT “FEDER MONEY” WORKED WELL

Hitler and the National Socialists came to power on January 30,
1933. Germany's foreign exchange and gold reserves had dropped from
2.6 billion marks in late 1929, down to 409 million in late 1933, and to
only 83 million marks in late 1934.'3 According to classical economic
theory Germany was broke and would have to borrow, but Germany was
to demonstrate that “classical” monetary theory is not very accurate.
This period of German monetary history has received far too little
attention in English. On May 1, 1933 Hitler outlined the 1st Reinhardt
Program - a four-year plan to end unemployment by attacking it on sev-
eral fronts:
* Spending 1 billion marks worth of “employment creation bills.”
* Tax benefits for industry, agriculture, and the employment of domes-
tic help.
* Marriage bonus loans up to 1,000 marks and
* Government control of the money and capital markets, under
Schacht.
Although elements of this program had already started under the
predecessor Von Papen and Schleicher Regimes, they had not been all
out efforts against unemployment.
On May 31st, the German government decided to issue 1 billion
marks of short term public works bills, designated to pay for specific
infrastructure projects:
“These were negotiable certificates paid out to employers who
undertook projects of replacement or maintenance projects. Anyone who
equipped a factory with new machines or who had his house repainted
could finance his operations with these work drafts. ..,” wrote Heiden.34
These bills paid about 4 'Z2% interest, and as they were taken into the
banking system, they were renewed indefinitely, and made eligible for
rediscounting by the Reichsbank. This means that they became part of
the underlying basis for the nation's money supply, along with gold and
foreign exchange and long term Government Bonds.35
The author has seen these bills referred to as “Feder money,” and as
“work drafts” (Arbeits-Schatzanwersungen). Schacht later referred to
MEFO bills, mentioning no connection with Feder.
Many of the bills never found their way to the Reichsbank, since the
interest they paid was an incentive for banks and others to hold onto
them. Roberts estimated that as much as 15 billion marks worth of such
bills were issued.36 Heiden made a lower estimate:

“All in all the public Treasury poured out approximately 3 billion
marks. ..for projects which according to the view hitherto prevailing
(e.g. Schacht's) in those times of crisis, were senseless or at least unnec-
essary. q**37
Guillebaud also estimated an upper limit of 15 billion marks of all
types of bills used to finance public works in this period, but noted that:
“No exact figures exist for the circulation of employment bills, but
they can be estimated with reasonable accuracy at 1.2 billion RM at the
end of December 1933, and at 2.6 billion RM a year later. 38
When the process started in 1933, Reichsbank holdings of all such
instruments, including normal treasury issues, totaled 3.03 billion marks.
At the end of 1934 total holdings were 3.86 billion and at the end of
1936 there were 4.91 billion marks.39
Thus Germany did not take the full step and create a German equiv-
alent to the American Greenback. The Greenbacks themselves were
money, had no interest payments due on them and did not add to any
national debt. These German infrastructure bills were a form of debt cer-
tificate, promising to pay money; they paid interest and did add to
Germany's national debt.
But this very close money substitute still had dramatic effects.
They were an excellent way to get purchasing power into the hands of
newly employed workers. Unemployment had been at six million in
1933, and was down to around one million at the end of 1936.
Furthermore, whereas the American Greenbacks had been spent mostly
on warfare and destruction, the “Feder money” had gone almost entire-
ly into public works projects, especially the construction of new mid-
dle class housing. In 1934 there were 283,995 dwellings built com-
pared to 141,265 in 1932. Then there were the thousands of kilometers
of Autobahn construction.4’
Thus it can be argued that the cause of Hitler's immense popularity
among Germans was that he temporarily rescued Germany from English
economic theory. For while these activities strongly benefited the
German middle and lower classes, they were of great concern to some
foreign bankers. Although Germany's move away from gold was more a
matter of necessity than choice, it still threatened “vested interests.”
Robert de Fremery quotes from the June 1940 National City Bank
Bulletin which admitted that:
“...not only the United States but other countries as well have large
vested interests in gold. The British Empire alone accounts for nearly
half of the gold output of the world, and in many other countries gold is
an important national asset. These countries would not look with favor
upon the displacement of gold as a monetary metal‘, and even in the
event of political changes resulting from the war these vested interests
will remain, though possibly shifted to other national jurisdictions. 41
The reader will notice that these “vested interest” countries were the
ones that warred with “goldless” Germany. De Fremery thought this
could have been one of the causes of the Second World War. However,
that decision may have been made earlier, and itself led to Germany
being without gold. Perhaps she was expected to borrow gold interna-
tionally, and that would have meant external control over her domestic
policies. Her decision to use alternatives to gold, would mean that the
international financiers would be unable to exercise this control through
the international gold standard, as described in Chapter 22, and this may
have led to controlling Germany through warfare instead.
SCHACHT ATE SOME CROW OVER FEDER MONEY
Schacht clearly had to “eat crow” and swallow his own words as
regards the new monetary issues that he earlier condemned. Thirty yeafs
later he justified his change of theory:
“ . .it was repeatedly asked whether the success of the MEFO bill
scheme did not mean that whenever there was a shortage of capital sav-
ings one could compensate by replacing such capital savings with cred-
its granted by the central bank, and thus by money specially granted for
the purpose. The English economist J.M. Keynes has delt with the prob-
lem theoretically, and MEFO transactions prove the practical applicabil-
ity of such an idea. 42
But Schacht insisted that certain conditions must exist. There had
been no stocks of raw materials; factories were empty; machines were
idle and 6 U2 million willing men were unemployed: “The capital which
could be expected to result from such developments (putting men to
work) was used in advance to grant credit through the MEFO transactions.’ 3
SCHACHT FIRED OVER THESE MATTERS

These bills were used from 1934 to 1938. Schacht relates how he got
himself fired by refusing to continue renewing the bills:
“In January 1939, the Reichsbank handed Hitler a memorandum in
which it indicated its refusal to grant the Reich any further credits. The
consequences were drastic. On January 19, I was dismissed from my

office as President.. .on the following day Hitler issued an edict which
ordered the Reichsbank to grant the Reich all credits for which the
Fuhrer asked. It is true the MEFO bills were now honored when they
came due, but only with the inflated money produced by the printing
presses. The second inflation had begun. 44
Schacht's firing was not made public for five months. His refusal to
continue financing the Reich was probably what saved him at Nuremberg.
THE AMERICAN PROFESSORS ATTACK
In 1948 a number of American professors were given the task of
devising a currency reform for defeated Germany. The Morgenthau-
Tannenbaum plan introduced the Deutsche mark. Initially everyone
received 40 DMarks. Employers received 60 DM per employee. Authorities
received a month's requirements, post and railways two weeks worth.
But all money claims, savings accounts, debts, etc. were reduced to
1/10 their nominal amount. On the other hand, shares, properties and
other material assets remained undiminished! This represented an unfair
redistribution of wealth to the rich. Schacht noted that the poor mans
assets were in his savings account, while the assets of the rich were in
their properties.
“This transmogrification was. ..a deliberate brutal interference with
the whole social structure of German society, more diabolic in its results
than the inflation of 1923...here malevolent intention was involved,”
wrote Schacht in 1967.
DEUTSCHE BUNDESBANK FORMED AS A
GOVERNMENT OWNED BANK
After World War II, American General Lucius Clay wanted the
German Government to have more say in running its central bank. In
1956 the present Deutsche Bundesbank was formed by the merger of the
Deutsche Laender Bank with the Berlin Central Bank and the Land
Central Banks from the various regions of Germany. The Bundesbank is
a federal corporation owned by the German government.
The Bundesbank issues the currency, sets interest and discount rates,
and sets reserve requirements for the banking system. Its main guide for
determining monetary policy is the level of its M3 money stock, which
counts currency and non bank deposits in credit institutions, including:
sight deposits, time deposits (under four years) and savings deposits (at
three months notice).
Officers and directors are nominated by the Federal Cabinet and

appointed by the state president. The Bank has been successfully insu-
lated from political domination. While the Bank is required to support
the general economic policy of the Federal Cabinet, it must do so in a
manner consistent with its primary responsibility: to regulate the amount
of money and credit in the economy with the aim of safeguarding the
currency. This is stated in oversimplified form, as maintaining “price
stability.”
This policy has derived partly from the horrible experience of the
1923 hyperinflation, and the ten for one devaluation after World War II,
as well as from the influence of people like Hjalmar Schacht.
THE BUNDESBANK'S IMPRESSIVE RECORD
The Bundesbank is widely recognized as one of the best central
banks in the world, along with the Swiss National Bank. This has result-
ed from a combination of factors: it has been run for the national inter-
est, not for private profit; its management has a strong public service tra-
dition; and the German people have worked very hard. Up to the mid-
1960s the German government ran budget surpluses, and it remained a
net creditor until 1974.45 This saved the nation large amounts that would
have gone for interest payments, had Germany financed government by
borrowing, the way the U.S. has.
Moreover, when an American learns of the highly diverse nature of
banking in Germany, with the many different types of institutions
designed to fulfill particular needs, the word that comes to mind is “serv-
ice. 46 Unfortunately in America the word that most often comes to
mind regarding our ever consolidating, monolithic, fee raising banking
establishment, is “rip off.”
MUCH GREATER CHALLENGES UNDER THE EMU
At first the Bundesbank management resisted joining the European
Monetary Union. It signed on only after Germany's political leadership
threatened changes in the law organizing the Bank. Some momentous
changes will be needed to operate the EMU successfully. It will not for
long have certain luxuries that the Bundesbank has been able to enjoy.
For example, the Bundesbank has relied on foreign trade surpluses
to obtain U.S. dollars, which constitute a large part of its reserves: about
$80 billion, or 33%, at present (early 1998). These dollars have served
as the basis for issuing currency and credit in Germany. Furthermore
these dollar are invested at interest.
21 GERMANY'S 1923 HYPERINFLATION UN DER A PRIVATE BANK 599
The fact is that the EMU, if it is to be independent, must have a

rational and practical substitute for using the Dollar as a reserve, and to
date the EMU has not properly faced this pivotal matter, which we dis-
cuss in detail in Chapter 23.
SCHACHT FINALLY SEES THE LIGHT
Schacht began his banking career as a believer in the gold standard,
the system then used in England and America. But by 1967, it appears
he had come to agree with some of Gottfried Feder's “unorthodox” mon-
etary views:
“Modern paper money, the banknote is backed by its creator, the
state. . .”
Thus Schacht made a monetary pilgrimage similar to that of Thomas
Jefferson, Alexander Del Mar, and many others, away from the primitive
commodity view of money as metal, to an awareness of the “nominal,”
flat nature of money as being based in law.
“The granting of credit is unthlnkable without a central bank. No
central bank can be allowed to act against the government of the coun-
try. The government is over the central Bank...A central bank cannot
allow any competition,” wrote Schacht.47
But then Schacht qualified this, stating that a higher law above both
the government and the central bank is the constancy of the value of
money. Stated in a more political manner, he is saying is that above both
the central bank and the government is the bondholder.
Schacht insisted that only by keeping the currency stable could the
small savers ever have a chance to accumulate substantial savings. He
rejected their use of investments as indoctrinating them into gambling.
However, the use of well managed instruments such as balanced
mutual funds can now overcome this objection. And after all, when
unemployment caused by an overly restrictive monetary policy strikes, it
is the small saver who generally suffers most.
In Summary
An examination of the German hyperinflation of 1923 shows that
the simplistic anti-governmental interpretation of the economists and
financiers is without basis. Nearly the opposite of what they contend,
was true: the hyperinflation followed the complete privatization of the
German central bank and elimination of governmental influence on it.
Again it was governmental action - this time the German govern-
ment - not private bankers - that rescued the monetary situation.
One could not ask for a more dramatic contradiction of the English
school's interpretation. This leaves that school without any valid histor-
ical justification for its anti-government prejudice concerning the control
of money systems. However, the author does not expect this to alter their
monetary stance against the public interest.
Notes to Chapter 21
l
Allan Nevins, Henry Mite. Thirty Years ofAmerican Diplomac y, (New York:
Harper Bros., 1930), pp. 257-58.
2 Francis Nielsen, The Makers of War, (Appleton, WI: Nelson Publishing Co.,
1950), pp. 32-47

3 A.E. Zimmern, The Economic Weapon, (New York: George Doran), 1913-17.
Prof. Carroll Quigley, The Anglo American Establishment, (New York: Books In
Focus, 1982).
5 Konrad Heiden, The Fuerher, (Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1944, written 1934), pp.
639-49.
6 Robert Lansing, The Peace Negotiations, (Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1921),
pp. 272-75.
7 Francisco Nitti, The Wreck ofEurope, us quoted by Nielsen, cited above, p. 151.
Hjalmar Schacht, Stabilization of the Mark, (London: George Allen & Unwin,
1927), pp. 46-51.
Schacht, cited above, pp. 10—25.
0 Schacht, cited above, pp. 116-7.
1' Schacht, cited above, pp. 116-7.
12
Schacht, cited above, p. 50.
13
Schacht, cited above, pp. 50-51.
4
' Hjalmar Schacht, The Magic of Money, (London: Oldbourne, Trans. P.
Erskine, 1967), pp. 65-6.
'5 Schacht, Stabilization of the Mark, cited above, p. 84.
16
Schacht, The Magic of Money, cited above, p. 68.
17
Schacht, Stabilization of the Mark, cited above, p. 89.
I
Schacht, Stabilization of the Mark, cited above, p. 112.
19 Schacht, Stabilization of the Mark, cited above, p. 102.
°0 Schacht, The Magic of Money, cited above, p. 70.

21 Norbert Muhlen, Schacht - Hitler ’s Magician, (New York: Alliance,
Longmans Green, trans. Dickes, 1939),

22 Schacht, Stabilization of the Mark, cited above, p. 208.
°3 Schacht, The Magic of Money, cited above, p. 72.

°4 Schacht, Stabilization of the Mark, cited above, p. 159
°5 Schacht, Stabilization of the Mark, cited above, p. 181.
26
George Knapp, State Theory of Money, (London: Macmillan, 1924), pp. 92-95. 27
Konrad Heiden, Der Fuerher, Hitler’s Rise to Power, (Boston: Houghton
Mlfflin, trans. Ralph Manheim,1944, written 1934), p. 223.
2 Houston Stuart Chamberlain, Foundations of the 19'h Century, (New York: ,
John Lane, trans John Lees, 1912), p. 490.

Chamberlain, cited above, v. 2, p. 387.
30 Schacht, Magic of Money, cited above, p. 49
°' Heiden, cited above, p.480.

32 Gottfried Feder, Hitler’s Official Program, (New York: George Allen &
Unwin, 1934, repr. New York, Howard Ferbig, 197 l), p. 59, 92.
33 Stephen M. Roberts, The House that Hitler Built, (New York: Harper Bro., 1938),
pp. 146-7.
°4 Heiden, cited above, p. 662.
35 Roberts, cited above, pp. 160-163.
36 Roberts, cited above, p. 165.

37 Heiden, cited above, p. 662.
3 C.W. Guillebaud, The Economic Recovery of Germany 1933-1938, (New
York: Macmillan, 1939), p. 53.

Roberts, cited above, pp. 164-69.
40 Heiden, cited above, p. 663.
41 Robert de Fremery, Money and Freedom, (San Francisco: self published,
1957), pp. 117-8, quoting the National City Bank Bulletin of June, 1940.
42
Schacht, The Magic of Money, cited above, p. 116. 43
Schacht, The Magic of Money, cited above, p. 116. 44
45
Ellen Kennedy, The Bundesbank, Council on Foreign Relations, 1991.
6
4 See Francke & Hudson, Banking and Financing in West Germany, (New York:
St. Martin's, 1984).
47
603
CHAPTER 22
INTERNATIONAL
MONETARY
ORGANIZATIONS
“There is no international law of money
and there can never be one...for the law of money
is an important part of domestic law.”
Alexander Del Mar, 1899
“There is no universal money.”

Henry George, 18971
“There is no such thing as an international currency.”

Hjalmar Schacht, 1967
International monetary institutions are a recent development in

human social organization, beginning only in the mid-19th century, if we
count the Latin Monetary Union as such an organization. But as the
development of warfare, political organization, rapid transportation,
instant communications, and world trade advanced, the possibililty of
international law emerged; and the need and viability of international
institutions to smooth the way in the monetary area became clear.
This development has been made more difficult by the immaturity
of national legal systems and the misdirection of monetary thought that
resulted in the near religious enthronement of the international gold
standard in the 19th and early 20th centuries. Since the system was adver-
tised as “automatic,” little need was recognized (except by those who ran
it) for organizations or government to administer it.
Those benefiting from control of that system used their power of the
purse to effectively dominate the schools of economics, assuring that the
economists trained there would be “fixed” regarding those concepts. A
trusting belief in the workings of the gold standard was so well
entrenched that a remnant of it continues today, especially among con-
servative and religious groups, which can be characterized as well mean-
ing, but monetarily illiterate.
But all of the plausible sounding gold standard theory could not
change or hide the fact that, in order to function, the system had to mix
paper credits with gold in domestic economies. Even after this addition,
the mixed gold and credit standard could not properly service the grow-
ing economies. They periodically broke down with dire domestic and
international results.
The worst such breakdown, the Great Crash and Depression of
1929-33, described in Chapter 20, can be traced directly to England's
gold standard moves from 1925 to 1931; and this breakdown occurred in
peacetime. China was not on the gold standard and was hardly affected
at all by the Great Depression. It was widely noted that those countries
did best that left the gold standard soonest.
THE PROBLEM OF INTERNATIONAL PAYMENTS
The problem originates in the nature of money as a creature of the
legal system. This makes money a national rather than an international
instrument. Because international law is still very limited, so is the pos-
sibility of lnternational money at this time; but that could change rapidly.
Several diverse observers have noted the “nationality” of money:
Alexander Del Mar commented on this limitation in most of his mone-
tary writings. In 1967, Hjalmar Schacht observed, “There is no such
thing as an international currency. 2 But just two years later the
International Monetary Fund (the IMF) introduced the SDR (Special
Drawing Rights), which is intended as a kind of international money
reserve for governments.
EARLIER EXAMPLES OF INTERNATIONAL PAYMENTS
Egypt had a central banking system that could effect payments
through branches in various cities. In its near-2,000 year history, Rome
never used a central banking system within its territory, and the Old
22 INTERNATIONAL MONETARY ORGANIZATIONS 605
World Order carried on international trade in kind, or transported gold

and silver in a form of barter.
In the medieval period the great regional trading fairs, held under the
auspices of various princes, used an extra-territorial payments clearing
mechanism for participants from various countries. They also had the
ability to arrange for credit and deferred payments to be made at anoth-
er fair, in a different jurisdiction.
The Knights Templar organization could clear payments across bor-
ders without shipping metal, by balancing credits and debits in different
countries. From the early 1700s the Bank of England could be drawn
upon to effect payments around the world.
THE INTERNATIONAL
GOLD STANDARD
“Gold may not be capricious, but the men who
manipulate gold between countries are capricious.”
Robert de Fremery3
After England demonetized silver in 1816, the Latin Monetary
Union followed in the 1860s (see Chapter 18). So we consider that the
international gold standard dominated from the mid-1800s to 1931.
However, it was well recognized that international trade was almost
entirely an exchange of goods. In theory, when a country's imports and
exports got out of balance, it would have to import or export gold to
bring them into balance. For example, if a country imported more than
it exported, enough gold to make up the difference would be shipped
abroad. In theory this kept imports and exports in line:
“Any important dis-equilibrium in the balance of trade will cause
gold to flow, and the movement of(gold) will set in motion forces which
remove the initial cause of the disturbance.”
That's how a 1935 study of British gold movements by W.E. Beach
phrased it. The original theory held that these “forces” worked by chang-
ing the price level of goods and services in the country that was out of
balance. With less gold in the country, in theory prices would fall, caus-
ing exports to rise, leading to a balance in trade.4
However, the theory was later altered when it was learned through
investigation of the facts that there was not always the expected correlation
between prices and exports - that for some periods high exports co-
incided with high prices for goods. The justifying theory of the gold
standard called for the opposite.
The theory was adjusted yet again to include the fact that the level
of bank credit in a country might be altered, at least temporarily, to make
up for gold expons. As late as 1982, a symposium of economists could
not really agree on how the gold standard system had functioned.
However, they did agree that the international gold standard was not
automatically adjusting, and though they are not quite certain how it
worked, they realize it didn't function in the advertised manner.5
At its base the international gold standard attempted to attribute an
objective value to gold. This made gold a kind of fetish and did not ade-
quately take into consideration that the value of gold itself was not
objective and fixed, but was variable.
Nor did it take into account the value that legal actions imparted to
gold. More simply stated, the gold standard theory was based on a false
concept of money's nature.
THE GOLD STANDARD GIVES FOREIGN BANKERS
LOCAL CONTROL
There is one indisputable aspect of the international gold standard
that economists recognized but ignored: the control of a country's inter-
nal credit policy - whether there would be contraction or expansion - was
ultimately in the hands of those who could move gold into or out of the
nation. So long as a country's balance of payments were cleared through a
gold standard system, forces outside the country could quietly bring on a
depression and thereby a (likely) change of government within the
country.
WORLD WAR I LEADS TO THE BANK FOR INTERNATIONAL
SETTLEMENTS (THE BIS)
The unprecedented level of horror endured in the first World War
gave strength to movements toward international law, that for better or
worse found expression in the League of Nations. WWI also led to the
formation of the first truly international monetary organization, the Bank
for International Settlements, known as the BIS, which was organized as
a result of suggestions by the Experts Committee on German WWI
Reparations as a way to facilitate reparation payments.
As the first international monetary organization, the BIS was not
organized as an authority superior to central banks, nor was it to engage
in the banking business. Its purpose was to establish an international gold

clearing system, balancing credits and debits between member countries,
thereby reducing the necessity of actual gold shipments. The BIS was
also to assist countries to go back onto the gold standard after leaving it
in WWI.
Organized at the Hague Conference in January 1930, the BIS is sit-
uated in Basel Switzerland and has a Swiss charter but as an interna-
tional organization under international, not Swiss, law. It was founded
by six central banks, and a group of three private U.S. Banks: J.P.
Morgan, First National Bank of New York, and First National Bank of
Chicago.
OWNERSHIP AND CONTROL OF THE BIS
The organization is owned and controlled by government central
banks except that all the American and part of the Belgian and French
shares have been sold to private parties, so that about 14% of the bank
is in private hands. Private shareholders have no voting power and are
not allowed to attend the bank's meetings.
The Bank's authorized share capital is 1.5 billion gold francs, divid-
ed into 600,000 shares, giving each share a par value of 2500 gold
francs. The actual paid-in capital is 323.2 million gold francs. The gold
franc is used as a unit of account for bookkeeping purposes and under-
scores the original gold bias of the BIS. It was the gold value of the
Swiss Franc in 1930, at 0.29 grams of gold per franc.
The Bank's assets and liabilities in U.S. dollars are converted to gold
francs (for accounting purposes) at $208 per ounce, meaning that one
gold franc equals $1.94.
THE BIS UNDERTAKES BANKING SUPERVISION
While the Bank was primarily set up as a gold standard institution to
facilitate German war reparations, by 1931 England was forced to aban-
don its ill-conceived gold standard and many other countries followed
(see chapter 20). Then in 1932, the question of German WWI reparations
was buried and forgotten at the League of Nations in Geneva.
Thus the original reasons for founding the bank quickly evaporated
and the Bank shifted its activities into other areas. From 1961 the Bank
coordinated the “Gold Pool,” a last ditch effort to maintain the facade of
an international gold standard. Pool members contributed gold towards
keeping the U.S. dollar internationally redeemable to gold at $35 per
ounce. But in 1967 France pulled out of the Pool and it collapsed in 1968.
One change the Bank made was to actually engage in the banking
business, but as a bank whose depositors are confined almost exclusively
to central banks. As such, the Bank holds a significant part of the
world's foreign exchange reserves; 113 billion dollars in such
deposits were held in March 1997, representing 7oZ«of all foreign
exchange reserves. It is also probably the world's largest single hold-
er of gold.
Though the BIS states that it doesn't advance money to governments
or open accounts in a government's name, most of the BIS deposits are
held in short term government securities.
MONEY CREATION POWERS
The BIS has no formal money creation powers, and is not a bank of
issue. However, Paul Einzig, writing in 1930, noted that conservatives
were alarmed that the BIS would become an instrument of great infla-
tion by creating excessive credits to central banks, based on fractional
reserves. That is, it would credit the central banks with several times
their deposits; and those credits would then be used as further reserves
by the central banks to create more money, etc.6 Only conservatives
could worry about inflation during the 20th century's worst deflation.
Of course it didn't work out that way. But it can be mentally filed
away that this potential engine for money creation in the form of the BIS
still exists out there, and under proper regulation, the author would con-
sider that a good thing in the present deflationary environment. If, that
is, the bank could be placed under public authority.
The Bank promotes itself as an important meeting place for central
bankers to “Facilitate international co-operation in areas of common
interest in particular as regards to monetary matters and support to the
international financial system,” especially its stability. It devotes a sig-
nificant effort to research and statistical work in the area of internation-
al loans; and more recently it has directed its attention to the volatile and
potentially de-stabilizing trading in financial derivatives.
In the 1988-1992 period, it fostered an international agreement
on how to evaluate the adequacy of a bank's capital and set mini-
mum requirements that internationally operating banks are expect-
ed to follow. These “regulations” are now having a greater effect on
how banks operate than is realized - arguably more than local regu-
lators have.
In 1996-97, an additional nine central banks from Asia, Latin
America and the Middle East were admitted into the organization, bring-
ing the total BIS membership to 41 central banks. The administration of
the Bank includes an annual general meeting held the 2nd Monday in
June. It has a Board of Directors drawn from 11 major industrial coun-
tries and there is a management and staff of nearly 500 people from 27
countries.
The BIS as an organization tended to look backward toward gold.
Thus it would be the more forward looking IMF which became central
to international monetary developments between 1945 and 1973.
THE INTERNATIONAL
MONETARY FUND
For the second time in the 20th century, European regimes proved
unable to stop the forces that warmongers unleashed upon them, deci-
mating their people and nations in WWII. Power over international
finance flowed to the Federal Reserve System, as American industry sup-
plied both sides during most of WWI, and the Allies during WWII. Almost
sixty percent of the West's monetary gold was in New York at the end of
WW2.
Confident of victory, planning for the post-war monetary system
began in 1941. The central institution of this reform would not be the
BIS but the International Monetary Fund (IMF), which took shape at the
1944 conference at the Hotel Mount Washington in Bretton Woods, New
Hampshire. Seven hundred and thirty persons descended on the hotel for
the conference.
The Englishman John Maynard Keynes, whose theories had encour-
aged governments to borrow money to get out of the Great Depression,
wanted to go all the way and create an international central bank - a cen-
tral bank of central banks - with the power to create money and interna-
tional reserves based on a new monetary unit which he called the
“Bancorp.” But world conditions were not ready for this. In practice it
would require the member states to give up a part of their sovereignty to
the new central bank, and it was unrealistic to expect the U.S. to cede
sovereignty - to give up power - just when it had emerged as the world's
only financial superpower.
The IMF would be much more limited. Formulated mainly by the
61 0 The Lost Science Of Money
American Henry Dexter White, it would reflect the fact of American

power. It began operations in 1946 with 29 member countries, growing
eventually to 181. Each country deposited a quota of gold, dollars, and
their currency, which comprises the IMF reserves. The original U.S.
quota was $2.8 billion.
Hans Aufricht, Counsellor to the IMF, noted that:
“...there is every indication that the amount of the U.S. quota in the
fund was, in all likelihood not entirely unrelated to the book gain of the
U.S. Treasury which resulted from the reduction in the weight of the
gold dollar in 1934...(when Roosevelt raised the price of gold from
$20.67 to $35 per ounce) which amounted to $2.81 billion. 7
AMBIGUITY OF ORGANIZATIONAL STATUS
Again we find a degree of ambiguity into which the Anglo-
American bankers love to place their operations. The IMF is nominally a
special organ of the United Nations, under UN Article 57, #3, but the
UN has no control whatsoever over IMF policies. Thus the IMF operates
22a. Harry Dexter

White (left) and
John Maynard
Keynes. The IMF
would reflect
American power -
the dollar ruled.
Keynes’ proposal
for an abstract
international
reserve unit, the
”Bancorp,” had to
await the creation
of SDRs in 1970.
But by then it
couldn't stop the
IMF from degener-
ating into a strong-
arm collection
agency for the big
banks.
with whatever advantages the prestige of its UN “affiliation” status gives

it, but without the responsibility implied in that.
The IMF is ruled by a Board of Governors, which meets annually,
with one representative from each member country. In practice it is run
by its 24-member Executive Board, with strong representation of the
major industrial nations. This board meets at least three times a week.
Votes are generally not taken but consensus of members is sought for
IMF decisions and much weight is given to the views of the Managing
Director.
Traditionally the managing director is a European or at least a non-
American, while the president is normally an American. The total staff
at the IMF numbers about 2200. Like UN employees, their salaries and
benefits are tax free - any taxes they pay are made up by the organiza-
tion. IMF staff take an oath that they “will accept no instruction in regard
to performance of ...duties from any government or authority external to
the fund.”'
IMF OBJECTIVES
While the original stated objectives of the IMF included full
employment and the maximum development of resources, its core activ-
ity was initially to try to institute fixed exchange rates between curren-
cies. Each country was to establish a parity level (a “price”) between its
currency and gold, and stay within one percent of it. Exchange stability
and stopping countries from making competitive devaluations were
emphasized. Later, currencies could move in a 10% band, as long as
advance notice was given of changes.
By 1949 major currency exchange adjustments occurred when the
British Pound had to be devalued from $4.03 to $2.08. But the IMF had
made substantial progress. In 1947 there had been a severe worldwide
dollar shortage; but from 1948 to 1954 the gold and dollar holdings of
the non U.S. members doubled. By 1958 twelve countries were able to
establish external convertibility for their currencies. By mid 1967 the
consumer price level was only 1.4 times the 1948 level, even though
Europe and Japan had been rebuilt. The Marshall Plan's $12 billion of
assistance to Europe was also of immense importance.
THE U.S. DOLLAR RULES
The U.S. dollar held a special position in the system, reflecting U.S.
strength. Dollars were given equal status with gold, as reserves for cur-
rency creation. This meant that U.S. gold reserves counted twice in
creating world reserves. First they could be used to create dollars, then
those dollars could be used as reserves to create other currencies. So at
least twice as much money would be created worldwide than if gold
alone were the reserve. The IMF was a mixed system of gold and a priv-
ileged paper dollar.
This was a “gold-exchange standard,” similar to that which emerged
from the 1922 Genoa Conference. In the 1920s the U.S. Dollar and the
British Pound were maintained convertible to gold by their central bank-
ing systems, while other European currencies were convertible not to
gold, but to the Dollar and the Pound. Thus the term “gold-exchange
standard” was a more accurate description than gold standard.
The paper nature of the system was slightly hidden because the
United States (and only the U.S.) undertook to maintain the dollar con-
vertible into gold for other members, at $35 per ounce.
But from the founding of the IMF, U.S. gold holdings were in a
downward trend, until they reached a level around $11 billion in 1971,
at the $35 valuation. It can be argued therefore that this system was
never really functioning as a sustainable gold based system, but began
“running out of gas” right from the start.
Use of the dollar for reserves by other central banks allowed the U.S.
to run large balance of payments deficits, prompting leaders like Charles
De Gaulle to attack Dollar Imperialism - the use of American dollars to
buy up European assets in the 1960s.
FLOATING RATES
The parity system broke down on August 15, 1971 after the Gold
Pool and U.S. gold reserves proved inadequate and President Nixon
closed the “gold window,” refusing to honor the commitment to
exchange dollars for gold. This was the end of the Bretton Woods agree-
ment, but the IMF continued. From March 1973 the exchange rates of
various major industrial currencies floated, with smaller countries’ cur-
rencies pegged to larger ones. Monetary theorists such as Robert de
Fremery, and several economists such as Friedman, Haberler and
Meade, had advised using floating rates for years, and they seemed to
function well.
SPECULATORS UNDERMINE THE IMF
The speculation problem began with gold and the way the “Gold
Pool” allowed private speculators to take risk-free positions speculating
in gold against the U.S. dollar. In 1968, Xenophon Zolotas, Greece's
foremost monetary scholar, warned in The Gold Trap and the Dollar that:
“...the financial set up of the world - and thereby its freedom of
trade and economic prosperity - has become subservient to the interests
of gold speculators and hoarders. As a result more and more experts
agree on the necessity for gold to be phased out. 9
70 Billions of
U.S. $
60 U.S. Gold Reserves under the

IMF's Bretton Woods system
50
Total external $ liabilities

40
30-
U.S. Monetary gold
20•
Rest of world's
Monetary gol
10.
$ liabilities held by foreign
monetary authorities
' I I IN T I I I I I II UI I I I U I I I I I I
1945 1950 1955 1960 1965 1970
22b. An examination of U.S. Gold reserves shows the system under pressure
from 1949, near the beginning of Bretton Woods. Declining U.S. holdings
meant the system was only running on reserves, which were draining away.
The IMF's official historian, Margaret de Vries, implied that the sys-
tem was brought to its knees by some of its own biggest beneficiaries -
large corporate speculators:
“The extreme volatility of capital fiows (e.g. around $200 billion in
1976), in response to interest rate difference or anticipation of exchange
rate changes, was in large part responsible for undermining the inter-
national monetary order that existed until the late 1960s. ’0
Thus by the IMF’s reckoning, large capital flows by major specula-
tors severely harmed the system, which had been designed not for their
speculative games but to facilitate liquidity, production and trade
between nations. Michael Bordo has noted that:
“The architects of Bretton Woods envisaged a system characterized
by limited international capital mobility. 11
The early 1970s were a critical moment for the IMF. Which would
take precedence, the ability of corporate and other speculators to shift
huge amounts of capital overnight without warning, in order to take
advantage of a l/20th of a percent interest rate differential between cur-
rencies, or the ability of producers to create and trade goods, upon which
the world's peoples depended?
The IMF and the world community would either have to resist such
misuse of the world's monetary facilities and mechanisms, or be ruled
by them. It surrendered without a fight, subjecting its operations to the
notion that “free markets” in currency and interest rate speculation take
precedence over all else. It did this without any evidence that would
demonstrate a benefit to the world community arising out of the instability
such a viewpoint would bring to currency holdings. Perhaps Adam Smith's
market deity “Hand the Invisible” was supposed to take care of that.
In 1974, rather than negotiate a reformed system, the Governing
Board decided to let the new system evolve, until a revised charter was
approved in April 1978. The role of gold was reduced substantially and
the SDR was chosen to become the IMF’s “primary” reserve asset.
HOW TO END PRIVATE CURRENCY MANIPULATION
This author proposes three simple changes which would greatly
reduce the ability of speculators to manipulate national currencies,
which endangers the livelihoods of millions of persons.
A tax on currency transactions
For some years economists have called for placing a small tax on all
speculative currency transactions and using the proceeds to better service
the markets involved. This is a fine idea, but does not go far enough
because it will not stop the large currency debacles, where a small tax
won't be enough to stop currency manipulators.
Prohibit speculative short-selling of currencies
The currencies of some developing areas (for example Southeast
Asia during the 1997 crisis) could have been placed into a category of
no short selling allowed, or setting low position limits for short sales.
Such a restriction would not affect those actually involved in production
and commerce in those areas, but would present a substantial block to
those attempting to take advantage of them. Appropriate exceptions
could be made by exchange authorities.
Settlement should be in “kind” instead of in “cash”
Economists still haven't recognized the potential importance of set-
tlement of futures and forward contracts in “kind,” rather than allowing
settlement in “cash.” Settlement in cash means that when it comes time
for short sellers to deliver the currency they sold, they have the option to
value the contract in dollars, and then pay in dollars. Thus they need only
the ability to deliver dollars, to protect their position.
However, requiring the contracts to be paid in “kind” would create
a very different situation. If the short sales of the currency drive down
the value of the currency, then when the delivery date approaches, those
who sold the contracts have to actually buy back the physical currency
to be able to deliver it. Such purchases push the price of the currency
back up, and conceivably the short sellers could get caught in a “short
squeeze” where they could not obtain the currency for delivery and
would have to default, with serious losses to themselves. Defaults in the
futures markets can bankrupt the largest speculators, as the billionaire
Hunt brothers discovered in the 1981 silver markets, and as Baring
Brothers Bank found in 1996.
These modest suggestions could help insulate currency markets
from typical forms of manipulation.
IMF'S MONEY CREATION POWERS
Originally the primary money creation mechanism of the IMF was
the use of dollars as a reserve on which other currencies were created.
U.S. balance of payments deficits could fuel monetary creation in coun-
tries such as Germany, which obtained the dollar reserves through for-
eign trade surpluses. But this was an automatic structural feature, not a
discretionary power.
The IMF can also create limited liquidity by extending loans to

members. The source of the funds are the reserve quotas that the mem-
bers deposit with the IMF. Countries in trouble can borrow up to three
times their quota, however, from 1982, the members limited the total
amount that could be loaned out to 60% of the total of all IMF reserves.
SPECIAL DRAWING RIGHTS (SDRs)
Special Drawing Rights (SDR's) were first agreed to as an interna-
tional reserve asset in August 1969 after four years of negotiation, in
order to reduce “the problem of international liquidity and to. ..(create) a
new reserve unit to supplement gold, the supply of which was insuffi-
cient, or of national currencies such as the U.S. $,” wrote De Vries.12
This was more along the lines envisioned for the IMF by John
Maynard Keynes, and was a truly momentous development. Managing
Director Pierre Paul Schweitzer hailed the SDRs as:
“The most significant development in international financial co-
operation since Bretton Woods. 13
The SDRs were activated on January 1, 1970, causing the price of
gold to actually drop ten cents under the official $35 per ounce. From
January 1970 to the end of 1972 there were $9.5 billion of SDRs creat-
ed to augment the IMF’s $39 billion in gold holdings, and total interna-
tional reserves of $75 billion. SDRs are valued in terms of a weighted
basket of the five leading industrial currencies.
From 1975, not only the dollar, but also the D mark, yen, swiss
franc, pound sterling, and French franc became usable as reserves.
Eventually the Special Drawing Right (SDR) was decided on as the pri-
mary reserve asset, and from late 1978 there was a gradual reduction in
the role of gold in the system. One-sixth of the IMF’s gold was sold to
the public. Another sixth was returned to members, who could thereafter
buy and sell it like a market commodity.
The IMF has not created any new SDRs since January 1981, and as
of the present, only 21.4 billion SDRs are in existence, each worth about
$1.38, or 2 Swiss Francs. The IMF is presently proposing an expanded
issue of SDRs, which should be a welcome and long overdue addition to
international liquidity. SDRs have also had a very limited commercial
usage, for example, in defining Suez Canal rates, airline fares, and some
Eurobond issues.
INTERNATIONAL BAILOUTS
After the gold parity system collapsed in 1971, IMF activities have
22c. The International

Monetary Fund (IMF)
in Washington, DC. is
not living up to its
potential to facilitate
international liquidity.
Instead it condones
de-stabilizing currency
speculation and forms
of international loan
sharking.
focused on supervision, surveillance, and consultation with its members.

The IMF developed into a major lending institution and in the second
half of the 1970s, when lending to its troubled members became its pri-
mary activity (especially to the U.S. and Britain).
When lesser developed countries needed bailing out of loans
improperly advanced to them by the world's largest private banks, the
IMF has served to bail out the bankers, generally shifting their costly
errors onto the average citizens of the member states.
UNFAIR “CONDITIONALITY”
In that process, the IMF has come under some of its harshest criti-
cism, and engaged in some of its most questionable actions in the area
of “conditionality” - the terms it sets for the debtor nation to receive
assistance. Critics make the case that the IMF’s demands fall mainly on
the poor, causing brutal income reductions - far more than necessary. A
frequent feature is the elimination of food program subsidies. Frequently
the IMF demands reductions in wages and increases in corporate profits.
In the Brazilian bailout, the IMF insisted on cutting Brazil's public
expenditure by 50% from 1982 to 1983, then another 50 o/» in 1985.
Imagine the effect of cutting 75% of public expenditure in America,
Germany or Switzerland in four years!
To a large extent, the (IMF) makes debtor countries bear the entire
burden of balance of payments adjustment through recession. In addi-
tion, Robert Meir notes that:
“(The) Funds definition of good economic management encourages
a certain kind of development: export orientation, reduced protection-

ism, less forced import substitution, more efficient public corpora-
tions...reduced public sector deficits... ’4
The IMF conditions also have a very strong bias toward urban rather
than rural or agricultural areas. But Meir's most serious charge is that
the IMF's adjustment programs are not designed to succeed, but only
to get debt payments made as fast as possible.
There are important lessons from the IMF to date. First, through the
failure of the IMF gold parity mechanism, members found that common
sense responsibility, production, and trade, not gold, was the key to an
international monetary order. Second, an organization created and con-
trolled mainly by bankers will act as an agent for bankers and neglect its
larger responsibilities toward society. Third, the successful operation of
the SDR to date indicates that international liquidity can be created
through legal agreements, at least between those nations not threatening
each other by warfare.
Fourth are the important and inevitable conclusions from the current
experience with laissez faire in currency speculation, a lesson that the
powers that be at the IMF apparently do not want to acknowledge. What
is urgently needed is not an ideologically driven set of regulations
carved in stone, but reasonable guidelines for acceptable activity.
The benefits of generally convertible currencies are immense. The
author recalls that time in the 1960s, that Englishmen who went on vaca-
tion could only take a maximum £150 out of England! Imagine carrying
on an impon-export business where each transaction payment requires
central bank approval.
Likewise there is a valid role that currency speculation can have in
providing some very limited added liquidity to currency markets and in
serving as an advance warning system that can alert the community to
otherwise hidden problems.
The danger arises when reasonableness, proportionality and balance
are cast aside,’ where the basic purpose of the monetary system is
subverted to a near sociopathic greed,’ where under cover of one ideol-
ogy or another, currency institutions and mechanisms, upon which the
livelihood of millions of people depends, are destroyed without a second
thought. That must be stopped - it is a form of cannibalism.
Furthermore, the past gains obtained through such piratical activities
should not be considered as property, as though they were earned by the
speculators. It's more appropriate to consider them as stolen, and to
legally confiscate and apply them to healing their victims.

It is becoming clear that if the IMF continues in its ill conceived
course as handmaiden and enforcer for comipt banking practices world-
wide, that its time is limited. Already politically unpopular, even in the
United States, unless substantial changes occur, it would not take much to
see this once important and useful organization slip into oblivion. The
danger then will be that the more conservative, more privately ori-
ented Bank for International Settlements will assume the role that
the IMF once played, and that would not be a wholesome monetary
development.
REFORMING THE IMF
International monetary reform is desperately needed, especially by
the poorer nations. The youthful demonstrators who have managed to
focus a spotlight on injustices at the IMF, World Bank, and World Trade
Organization (the “WTO”) meetings should be applauded.
Unfortunately, after the September llth destruction of the World Trade
Towers, it is easier for the financial establishment and their media hacks
to portray those highly moral, youthful demonstrators as merely hooli-
gans and terrorists, and to take harsh actions against them. That is very
convenient for those who control Western capitalism.
It may still be possible to reform the IMF, if the comiption is limit-
ed to its top echelons. But they have been involved in so much evil doing
these past two and a half decades, that it may call more for punishment
than reform. Especially if the diseased attitudes have been spread
throughout the organization, it would be preferable to dissolve the IMF
and start over with a new institution. The answer is not yet clear.
The focus of the American Monetary Institute has been more on
national monetary reform. Because of the dominant position of the
United States and the dollar in the international monetary arena, real
reform of the U.S. money system would automatically solve many of the
most pressing international monetary problems.
Regarding the difficulties of the un-payable debt burdens of the less-
er developed countries, Pope John Paul 2nd is the best economist: debt
forgiveness, plain and simple, makes sense in most of those cases.
62fi The Lost Science Of Money
THE WORLD BANK GROUP

The Bretton Woods Agreement in 1944 also created the
International Bank For Reconstruction and Development (the IBRD)
also under UN Article 57 (section #4). Its purpose was to help in the
reconstruction of Europe and Japan after WWII. From 1945 it became
known as the World Bank.
When the job of reconstruction was completed by the early 1960s,
the IBRD shifted to financing projects in under-developed countries,
with the stated purpose of reducing poverty around the world. Critics of
the Bank find serious shortfalls in its operations. Cheryl Payer, a long-
time critic of the Bank, charges that it actually increases local poverty by
demanding and getting special privileges for its often elitist projects.’5
OWNERSHIP AND CONTROL OF THE WORLD BANK
The World Bank (IBRD) is owned by its member governments.
They have committed an amount of capital to the Bank's operations, but
only a small part has been paid in, with the rest remaining on call, to
guarantee the Bank's bonds. This gives the bonds a very high credit rat-
ing. The bonds are sold worldwide and are the World Bank's main
source of loanable funds.
The World Bank is ruled by a Board of Governors, where each of the
180 member countries sends one governor, usually the minister of
finance, to the September annual meeting. On a daily basis the Bank is
run in Washington, D.C. by its 20 resident executive directors and its
president, who normally meet several times a week. Five of these 26
directors are selected by the five member nations with the largest num-
ber of shares, and the other 15 are selected by the rest of the members.
Traditionally the president of the World Bank is a U.S. citizen,
though the U.S. share ownership of the Bank is shrinking: 35% in 1947,
21% in 1981, and 17% in 1997.
WORLD BANK PROJECTS DO MAKE MONEY
World Bank projects have a very high average rate of return: 18% as
of 1987;'6 and 16% in 1997. IBRD loans are typically paid back over a
10-to-15 year period. The same rate of interest is charged to all borrow-
ers: '/2 % above the cost of borrowing to the Bank.
One of the criteria for measuring the success of a project is that it
have at least a 10% rate of return. World Bank projects do not fail. Since
it began, the World Bank has lent about $400 billion. All of the IBRD's
clients are governments, but it works closely with private enterprise.
The Bank's website stresses how it helps to reduce poverty:
“In the past few decades, East Asia has achieved some of the most
remarkable poverty declines in history; 27% from 1975 to 1985 and 35%
from 1985 to 1995. Along with substantial improvements in the educa-
tion and health of the poor.” However, what will the 1997-98 Asian
financial debacle (brought on by large scale currency speculation) do to
these statistics?
The World Bank's public relations materials are a bit disingenuous.
For example their website states:
“Our Articles of Agreement explicitly prohibit the Bank from inter-
fering in the country's political affairs and require it to take only eco-
nomic considerations into account in its decisions. 17 But the Bank's
“economic considerations,” its definitions of good and bad, like those of
the IMF, are heavily loaded with political implications which work to
maintain or increase the disparity of wealth and income between rich
and poor.
THE INTERNATIONAL FINANCE CORPORATION (IFC)
This affiliate of the World Bank Group was founded in 1956 and is
the only one that invests in private sector projects in developing coun-
tries, and without a government guarantee. The IFC also arranges private
financing for these projects. Since its founding, it has committed about
$21.2 billion of its own money, and arranged another $15 billion in
underwriting syndications for 1,852 private companies in 129 develop-
ing countries.
In 1997 the IFC invested more than $8 billion. It also “helps” gov-
ernments to privatize state owned enterprises, and raises private finance
for ventures.
The IFC management, shareholders and Articles of Agreement are
independent from the rest of the World Bank Group. Its share capital is
provided by its 173 member countries, and it raises most of its funds by
issuing bonds.
THE INTERNATIONAL DEVELOPMENT ASSOCIATION (IDA)
This most recent addition to the World Bank Group came into exis-
tence in 1960. Today it is proudly put forward as the “good deeds” work
of the bank, because it makes 35 to 40-year interest-free loans to really
poor countries (those with less than about $1,000 per capita annual
income). At present 80 countries are eligible for IDA loans. The popula-
tion of these countries is about 3.3 billion people, or 69% of the devel-
oping world's population!
The IDA charges an annual administrative fee of 0.75%. Critics say
that the IDA was only formed when there was a threat that the United
Nations was going to set up its own lending agency (the Special UN
Fund - SUNFUND for economic development). Eugene Black,
President of the IBRD at the time, admitted that the IDA “was really an
idea to offset the urge for SUNFUND.”18
IDA and the IBRD share the same staff and offices and report to the
same President. All IDA funds come from taxpayers of the IDA's mem-
ber governments, through cash contributions from its member govern-
ments, which are refreshed every three years. Since 1960 the IDA has
loaned about $108 billion to 106 countries. It generally lends $5 to 6 bil-
lion per year. According to the Bank's Website, IDA projects are target-
ed in the following categories:
Human resource development (education, health,
population, nutrition, water supply and sanitation) ................. 33%
Agriculture and rural development ......................................... 23%
Infrastructure ..... . .... . . .. . 23%
THE “STRATEGIC COMPACT”
The World Bank Group is currently engaged in a 30-month
“makeover” to re-examine and re-vamp all aspects of its activities. Its
description looks like a corporate efficiency drive, which goes so far as
to discuss how it will get rid of non-performing personnel at the Bank
itself! They do mention probably the most important area to reform, to
“design more appropriate conditionality.” However, their focus on firing
their own employees undercuts the grandiose announcements, and indi-
cates a retrogression may be coming, rather than a progression.
ISLAMIC MONETARY
DEVELOPMENTS
Echoes of Scholasticism
“Social justice is the hallmark of the Islamic economic System.”

International Center For Research
in Islamic Economics'
Just as concepts of exclusivity and elitism in capitalism are ulti-

mately based on and excused by the Old Testament's legacy of a “cho-
sen people,” Moslem economic thought has also been framed by its holy
book - the Koran. While the Old Testament had strong prohibitions
against usury, it was slightly ambiguous regarding the practice of usury
against non-Jews. This “loophole” allowed some elements to drive a
truck through the otherwise strong condemnations, and to create a repu-
tation for the Jews as history's greatest userers.
But the Koran is very clear that all usury is forbidden:
“Those who devour usury...will not stand except
as stands one whom...The Evil one by his touch
Hath driven to madness...That is because they say:
‘Trade is like usury’,...but God hath permitted trade
and forbidden usury.”
Koran; Sura II, 275
In addition, the Koran contains a kind of “inoculation” for its read-
ers, against some of the hypocrisy so evident in Western Capitalism.
That is in a section that explicitly warns the Jews to beware of a partic-
ular segment of their fellow Jews and Christians:
“O Ye People of the Book. . .It is a wish
of a section of the People of the Book to lead you astray.. .
Ye People of the Book!
Why do you clothe the truth with falsehood
and conceal the truth while ye have knowledge?”
The Koran; Sura III. 65-71
Furthermore, perhaps because the Prophet Muhammad had been a
merchant in his youth, Moslem writings on business ethics have been
taken more seriously by the faithful. Of particular interest are the devel-
opments occurring in Moslem monetary thought. For it turns out that
Mohammed understood the nature of money as a legal creation, and
taught his followers that nominally valued copper coinage was to be
as acceptable as gold and silver:
“According to Muhammad, the property of currency attaches to cir-
culating fulus (copper coins), and they are to be considered as an
absolute currency. ..They are in his view suitable for partnership invest-
ment like all other absolute currencies, viz., dirhams (silver) and dinars
(gold).” Kasani, 6:59-60.20
Imagine the effect on Christian money systems had Jesus Christ
made a similar observation.
“SHARIA” AND “FIQH”
“Sharia” refers to Islamic sacred law. Out of this was developed the
“Fiqh” - Islamic jurisprudence or a religious doctrine of duties and man-
ners. But in business, the Fiqh has been viewed as as ideal of how things
ought to be, and is not often followed. The Koran forbade the taking or
paying of interest, and when the interdiction was first imposed iii the 7th
century, business flourished:
“With the abolition of interest, economic activity in the Moslem world
did not suffer any decline. In fact there was increased prosperity,” wrote
M.U. Chopra, financial advisor to Saudi Arabia's Monetary Authority.21
This is interesting, but it was also a period of great expansion for
Islam. As early as the 11th century a person conducting “commerce in
accordance with the law was looked upon as ridiculous by all other mer-
chants,” according to Hurgronge.22 Thus there has been a large gulf
between Islamic practice and theory. Moslem countries over the last two
centuries gradually adopted an interest-based money and banking system,
under the influence of colonialism. But that is now beginning to change.
Chopra distinguishes three phases in the recent Moslem economic
revival. First, a re-evaluation of the Moslem position was begun in the
1930s (after viewing the West's Great Depression?) and was conducted by
non-economist Moslem scholars who re-affirmed the classical Moslem
positions. Then from about 1965, Moslem economists have worked on
analyzing these ideas. The third phase is the effort underway to actually
develop interest-free banking and financial institutions. Chopra says the
fourth phase will be in the area of monetary theory and implementation.
Pakistan especially has given impetus to these developments
through its 1973 Constitution in which article 227 provides that all exist-
ing laws shall be “brought into conformity with the injunctions of the
Holy Quran and Sunnah” and that Riba (usury) be eliminated as soon as
possible. Chopra comments that this is “the first time that a serious
commitment of this nature has been expressed by the government to
mold the economy in the framework of Islamic values. 23
RIBA AND ZULM
The two terms Riba and Zulm are close in meaning to the way the
Christian Scholastics used the term “usury.” Riba covers more than
interest, but applies to all forms of unfair financial exploitation. Islam
seeks to eliminate “the injustice perpetrated in the form of the financier
being assured of a positive return without doing any work or sharing in
the risk, while the entrepreneur, in spite of his management and hard
work is not assured of such a positive return. *4
“Zulm” is an even more comprehensive Islamic term referring to all
forms of iniquity, injustice, exploitation, oppression and wrongdoing.
Islamic economic thought actively seeks to remove Riba and other forms
of exploitation and does not separate justice and morality from econom-
ics. Islam has an “Unflinching dedication to the brotherhood of
mankind,” Chopra tells us in his book Toward a Just Monetary System.25
NISAB AND ZAKAA
An interesting Moslem concept is of a three-sector economy: the
Public Sector; the Private Sector and the Voluntary Sector. Faridi
describes how those with “Nisab,” the ability to easily be generous, are
acting honorably when they give “Zakaa,” at 2 '/2 % of income, which
goes from the rich to the poor and is something more than alms.26
INTEREST-FREE FINANCE IN THE ISLAMIC WORLD
By the early 1980s interest-free banks were functioning in Egypt,
Jordan, the United Arab Emirates, Kuwait, Sudan and Bahrain. Chopra
counted 38 banks operating interest free in Africa and Asia, and even in
the Bahamas, and Geneva, Switzerland. In Pakistan, 6,500 bank branch-
es had opened interest-free sections where separate counters accepted
deposits for interest-free investment accounts. According to one report
these accounts were earning 8 to 15% per year from dividends and capital
gains. They're like mutual funds.
Pakistan also started a “National Investment Trust” to accept small
household savings for investment, through bearer and registered shares. It
will be interesting to see how these various interest-free mechanisms
626 The Lost Science O/ Money
work and develop over time.

Pakistan and most other Moslem countries do belong to the IMF, and
the World Bank Group. But her current development and testing of
nuclear weapons is highly unfortunate and far riskier than the political
leaders can imagine. They may be providing “interested” (pun intended)
parties with the cover excuse to annihilate their evolving interest-free
system, by warfare. The existence and demonstration to the world that
such a system can function well, would be far more powerful than a
nuclear weapons arsenal.
FUTURES “DEALING” IS ALLOWED
The Koran explicitly refers to futures dealing:
“When ye deal with each other...in transactions involving
future obligations...in a fixed period of time,
reduce them to writing.”
Koran; Sura II, sect. 39, # 282
But this does not apply as a blanket approval to all types of futures trading.
ISLAMIC ECONOMISTS PROMOTING MONETARY JUSTICE
Thus when moral concepts are applied to money, whether from a
Christian, Moslem or secular viewpoint, they appear to move toward
similar conclusions. Dr. Mabid Ali Al-Jahri proposes a 100% reserve
requirement on all commercial banks, and Dr. Anas Zarqa strongly
agrees, because in part:
“Money creation is a social prerogative, and hence the benefits of
money creation should accrue to the whole society. *7
Chopra advises that good monetary reform should bring about a
larger number of smaller enterprises, and discourage large scale busi-
nesses except where they are unavoidable.
The Moslems also appear to have a healthier attitude toward mar-
kets:
“While Islam recognizes individual freedom, it does not give any
sanctity to market forces. The Blind operation of market forces need not
automatically reward socially productive effort, curb exploitation or
help the weak and the needy,” writes Chopra.2'
Some of the Moslem economists appear to be more scripturally ori-
ented than the Christian Scholastics were. But hopefully, enough ration-
ality will be applied, as well as attention to desired outcomes and actual
results. Unfortunately, prescriptions regarded as having a sacred origin
can too easily go wrong and even run amuk.
It will be interesting to follow monetary and banking developments

in the Moslem world and to see whether opportunities arise for co-oper-
ative reform activities.
PAKISTAN'S PRECARIOUS POSITION
After the World Trade Center attack of September 11, 2001, the U.S.
pressured Pakistan to help take action against Afghanistan's Taliban rul-
ing religious clique. It would be extremely serious if Pakistan's govern-
ment, also under presure from India, were to be de-stabilized and
replaced by a fundamentalist regime. After September 11th, the thirty
nuclear weapons, “advertised” as in Pakistan's arsenal, wouldn't be
allowed to remain in fundamentalist Moslem hands. A war between
America and Islam, being promoted by the worst elements from around
the world, would be underway for the foreseeable future.
IT IS U.S. MONETARY REFORM THAT IS NEEDED
In summary, after WWII the U.S. emerged as the monetary super-
power. This meant the dollar ruled in the International Monetary Fund.
Though ostensibly based on a gold exchange system, right from the start
the gold just drained away.
Ambiguously organized under the United Nations, but with no pub-
lic responsibilities, over time the IMF degenerated into a strong arm col-
lection agency for the major banks, applying biased economic theory to
maintain the power of the super-wealthy. This corruption may have
placed it beyond reform. (For example the IMF forced Pakistan to
reduce educational funding, leaving the field open to the religious
Mishrams promoting fanatical hatred of America.)
The positive developments among Moslem economists are noted
and encouraged. The author suggests that international reform will fol-
low quickly from U.S. reform. Therefore reforming our own money sys-
tem should be the primary focus of Americans desiring a fair interna-
tional system.
Notes to Chapter 22
' See Stephen Zarlenga, Henry George ’s Concept Of Money, Robert
Schalkenbach Foundation, 2001.
2 Hjalmar Schacht, The Magic of Money, (London: Oldbourne, 1967), p. 75.
Robert de Fremery, Rights vs. Privileges, (Provocative Press, 1993), p. 116

4 W. Edwards Beach, British International Gold Movements and Banking
Policy, 1881-1913, (Harvard Univ. Press, 1935), pp. 8-9.

5 See Michael Borda & Anna Schwartz, A Retrospective on the Gold Standard,
(Univ. of Chicago Press, Natl. Bureau of Econ. Research, 1983).

6 Paul Einzig, The Bank for International Settlements, (London: Macmillan, 1930.
7 Hans Aufricht, The International Monetary Fund, (New York: Praeger, 1964).
IMF rule N-10.

Xenophon Zolotas, The Gold Trap and the Dollar, (Athens: Papasissus, 1968), p. 21.
10 Margaret G. De Vries, The IMF in a Changing World, 1945-1985,
(Washington: IMF, 1986), p. 98.

11 Michael Bordo & Barry Eichengreen, A Retrospective on the Bretton Woods
System, (Univ. of Chicago Press, 1993), p. 623.

2 De Vries, cited above, p. 76.
1° De Vries, cited above, p. 88.
14 Robert I. Myers, Political Morality of the IMF, (New York: Transaction
Books, Carnegie Council on Ethics & Intematl. Affairs, 1987), pp. 25, 44-5.
'5 Cheryl Payer, 77ie WorldBank -a Critical Analysis, (Monthly Revlew Press, 1982).
" Barend A. de Vries, Remaking the World Bank, (Washlngton: Seven Locks,
1987), Ch. 1.
17 World Bank Website at: http://www.worldbank.org
I Payer, cited above, quoting IDA hlstorians Mason and Asher, p. 33.
*’ Money and Banking in Islam, ten papers delivered at the January 1981 con-
ference of the Institute of Policy Studies, Islamabad, Pakistan. Published by the
International Center for Research in Islamic Economics, King Abdul Aziz Univ.,
Jeddah, Saudi Arabia. From p. 3 of the Introduction.
20 Abraham L. Udovitch, Partnership and Profit in Medieval Islam, (Princeton
Univ. Press, 1970), p. 53

° M. Umer Chopra, Toward a Just Monetary System, (London: The Islamic
Foundation, 1985), p. 76.
22 Udovitch, cited above, quoting Hurgronge, Selected Works.
23 Money and Banking in Islam, cited above, p. 212.
2^ Chopra, cited above, p. 64.
25 Chopra, cited above, p. 27.
26 Money and Banking in Islam, cited above, papers by Faridi and Chopra.
27 Money and Banking in Islam, cited above, paper by Al-Jarhi.
2 Chopra, cited above, p. 47.
629
CHAPTER 23
THE EUROPEAN
MONETARY
UNION A
“Many (governments) make a mistake, not only in giving too

much power to the rich, but in attempting to overreach the people.
There comes a time when out of a false good there arises a true
evil, since the encroachments of the rich are more destructive
to the state than those of the people.”
Aristotle (Politics)
“Europe will be built through a currency

or it will not be built at all.”
Jacques Rueff
It's well to keep Aristotle's and Rueff's words in mind as Europeans

embark on the greatest monetary reform since Bretton Woods and the
International Monetary Fund. This development is going to affect the
lives and economies of all people, everywhere, far into the future.
This is a rare moment in time to “get it right” as much as possible,
while attention is focused on creating the new system. After that moment
A Much of this Chapter first appeared as Special Report #2 of the American
Monetary Institute in May 1997, commissioned by the Conzett Investment
Management group of Zurich, Switzerland. A part of its intent was to influence
in some small ways how the EMU would structure its definition of money and
other matters; therefore several explicit suggestions are made. The number ref-
erences are to the sections of the treaty as given at the European Community's
Web site at: http://www2.echo.lu/legal/en/treat1es/ec/ecbstat.html#HD NM 14
passes it becomes more difficult. However, even the process of making

necessary revisions later can be aided with some extra forethought and
planning now. We can now apply the main principles of money we've
observed in numerous historical cases to the formation of the European
Monetary Union.
The primary institutions of the European Community (hereafter
referred to as the “Community”) are seen as the European Parliament,
the Court of Justice, the Council and the Commission. These include the
legislative, judicial, and executive powers and are set forth in Article 4,
Section 1 of the Maastricht treaty. The monetary power is primarily to
be embodied in the European Central Bank (the ECB), described in the
Protocols of the treaty. Because it is set forth separately from the other
institutions, in Article 4, Section A, and is being formed years after the
others, there's the impression that it is subsidiary to them. It is not.
The overriding importance of the monetary power in determining
the fate of nations and empires is evident from our histofical examples.
Thus the ECB deserves the same organizational status as the European
Parliament, Council, and Court of Justice. Viewing it that way would
help to draw the attention of the whole Community to properly formu-
lating and monitoring it.
EUROPEAN MONETARY UNION STRUCTURES
These descriptions will sound a bit legalistic, since for accuracy we
paraphrase the various points of the treaty. The key central institution of
the European Monetary Union (the EMU), is the European Central Bank
(ECB). It, along with the central banks of the member states, comprise
the European System of Central Banks (ESCB). The ESCB is governed
by the decision making bodies of the ECB, which are its Governing
Council, its General Council, and its Executive Board.
The ECB Governing Council is composed of the heads of the nation-
al central banks and the members of the ECB Executive Board. Each
national central bank governor has one vote, except on certain specified
categories, where the votes are weighed according to the article 29 for-
mula (where half the voting weight is determined by the members rela-
tive gross domestic product, and the other half by its relative popula-
tion). The votes of the Executive Board members get no extra weighting.
The Governing Council acts by majority vote, except on some matters,
where a “qualified majority” is required. Then action requires affirma-
tive votes representing at least 2/3 the subscribed capital of the ECB, and
one half of the shareholders.
23 EUROPEAN MONETARY UNION 631
The executive board is to be drawn from recognized professionals in

the monetary/banking area, and appointed by agreement at the head of
state level, after being recommended by the European Council, in con-
sultation with the European Parliament and the ECB Governing Council.
The executive board has a president serving for eight years, a vice pres-
ident serving for four years, and at least four other members serving for
five-to eight-year terms. President and vice president are appointed in
the same manner as Board members.
The Executive Board implements the decisions of the Governing
Council, and is responsible for the current business of the ECB.
The General Council of the ECB is composed of the president and
vice-president of the ECB and the Governors of the national central
banks. The others members of the Executive Board may participate in
meetings, without having the right to vote.
The European Monetary Institute (EMI) is a temporary body formed
to lay the groundwork for, and prepare the transition, to Monetary
Union. It's structured nearly as a twin of the ECB, and goes into liqui-
dation upon the ECB’s establishment.
COMMENT
The institutional structure of the ESCB has sufficient centralized
power to wield effective control over the European money system. Real
sovereignty and power are being ceded by the national central banks,
and their respective nations, to the ECB. There are no visible structural
leaks whereby money can be created or liquidated by unilateral national
decision. The structure appears efficient, except that perhaps the ESCB’s
General Council may end up as too redundant to its Governing Council.
This centralization of monetary power can be good or very bad,
depending on how wisely it is implemented. There are clear benefits of
having a single currency for the whole community: it will simplify trade,
pricing, and payments. It can also protect the community from capri-
cious foreign currency meddling.
The danger is not well recognized: that the potential for catastroph- ic
error is greater from one single power center than from twelve somewhat
independent ones, closer to their constituencies. Consider Byzantium's
golden grip on Europe's throat for 900 years.
One can say that we know better today, and we do. However,
Byzantium's rigidity stemmed partly from a form of religious ideology,
which is still a big part of human nature. Today we see its manifestation
not so much in churches or temples, but in the rigid ideological bias of
most members of the economics profession. Their prejudices are based

on unproven theories rather than demonstrated realities.
The stated intention to restrict management of the ECB to recog-
nized professionals in the monetary or banking area is not a good idea.
It will probably result in management with a monolithic viewpoint,
which tends to follow the dictates of monetary theories, rather than to
carefully observe the results of their monetary actions upon the econo-
my and people.
Restricting the management of the institution to people who have
been indoctrinated into essentially the same economic theories is dan-
gerous because, as we've observed in Chapters 12 and 13, those theories
themselves have been structured over time to serve particular interests.
The highest degree of technical expertise must be obtained for those
positions requiring it. But technocracy is not equivalent to the leader-
ship, vision and judgment that running a monetary system requires.
Extra effort needs to be made to achieve diversity of viewpoint among
the management.
THE OWNERS
The ECB will be owned entirely by the national central banks, with
their individual share subscriptions to its 5,000 million EURO capital set
according to the Article 29 weighting formula. The shares can't be sold
or transferred. (28.2.)
The national central banks will provide the ECB with foreign
reserve assets, other than Member States' currencies, ECU's, IMF
reserve positions and SDRs, up to the equivalent of EURO 50,000 mil-
lion. The Governing Council decides on the proportion to be called up
on the establishment of the ECB, and the amounts called up later. (30.1.)
The “monetary income” accruing to each of the national central
banks in the performance of the ESCB’s monetary policy function will
be determined by their individual income generating activities. It will be
allocated at the end of each financial year according to an accounting,
after a portion up to 20% goes into a reserve fund. (32.1.)
COMMENT
By avoiding private ownership of the European Central Bank, the
Community has wisely avoided creatlng an institution that is liable to
take important monetary actions in the interest of its owners, rather than
for the proper functioning of the money system.
There is still the potential for those who manage the central bank to
take actions that favor their former/future employers, their perceived

class affiliation, or even their friends and associates. This is another rea-
son for requiring diverse backgrounds among management.
REPORTS AND SCRUTINY
The ECB will publish a consolidated financial statement each week,
an ESCB activity report at least quarterly, and an annual report on ESCB
activities, including the monetary policy of both the previous and the
current year.
The ECB and the national central banks will be audited by inde-
pendent external auditors recommended by the Governing Council and
approved by the General Council. The auditors have full power to exam-
ine all books and accounts of the ECB and the national central banks and
obtain full information about their transactions. (27.1.)
However, monetary decisions will not be made openly. The
Proceedings of all meetings are to be confidential for all time. Members
of the governing bodies and the staff of the ECB and the national central
banks will be required to maintain “professional secrecy,” even after
they leave the organizations.
COMMENT
Timely publication of reports and independent auditing may seem
obvious, but this is in fact a key feature. Europeans would probably be
surprised to learn that the U.S. Federal Reserve System has never been
independently audited. Its Bank of England model had also gone for
years without issuing reports, even to shareholders.
The secrecy to the grave requirement, on meetings and other mat-
ters, raises some concern. Certainly the ECB should not make it easy for
speculators and others to thwart or unfairly benefit from its policies. But
that can be done without giving the institution too much of an air of
secrecy, which could lead to worse problems.
CONVERGENCES
In the steps toward monetary union, member states had to bring cer-
tain key monetary measurements into convergence:
Fiscal Deficits had to be no more than 3% of the planned or actual
gross domestic product at market prices; and government debt no more
than 60% of gross domestic product, both at market prices. (104c(2))
Price Stability had to be sustainable at an average annual rate that
doesn't exceed by more than 1 1/2 percent, the three best performing
member states in terms of price stability. Inflation is measured by adjusted
consumer price indexes. (109j(1))

Exchange Rate Stability of currencies had to stay within normal
fluctuation margins specified by the Exchange Rate Mechanism, without
severe tensions or unilateral devaluations for at least two years.(109j(1)
Interest Rates on Member's average long-term government bonds
(adjusted) had to be within 2% of the three best performing Member
States in terms of price stability. (109j(1))
COMMENT
The convergence requirements, especially on deficits, proved to be
a real test of the ability of member states to conform to some tight
requirements, which even the economically strongest had great difficul-
ty meeting. This indicates the conditions were too arbitrary and demand-
ing. Perhaps there is nothing sacred in keeping deficits under 3% of
Gross Domestic Product, and at times fluctuations to higher levels must
occur. The real meaning of the convergence tests may have been to see
whether the Community could demonstrate the kind of flexibility need-
ed for the ESCB to be workable over time. But such flexibility was not
demonstrated.
The willingness of Germany to go to 12% unemployment in its
effort to meet the pre-ordained requirements and set a kind of example
for the community represents a danger signal that ideology may be
allowed to dominate the system, rather than requiring that the money
system work effectively to improve life in the community.
MONEY CREATION PROCESS
Usually the key feature of a monetary system is how new money is
created and added to the system, or removed from circulation. This is of
paramount importance because it is the main way the money system is
controlled. It determines whether sufficient money is circulating and
industry is thriving, or whether money is too scarce and the economy
and people are suffering, while bondholders are enriched.
It is normally through the creation of new money that a self styled
elite makes its grab for power; thanks to the obfuscations of economists,
the process is not generally understood by the public, or even by many
economists.
It is also important because in the process of defining how the
money supply is created, it is normally necessary, and always desirable,
to clearly state the exact definition of money in the system.
The ECB takes effective control of the several methods of creating
and liquidating money:

Policy determination
The ECB Governing Council formulates the monetary policy of the
Community including intermediate monetary objectives, key interest
rates and the supply of reserves in the ESCB, and establishes the guide-
lines for their implementation. The Executive Board implements the
monetary policy guidelines and decisions of the Governing Council, and
gives the necessary instructions to the national central banks. The ECB
will have the power to instruct the national central banks to carry out
operations that form part of the tasks of the ESCB. (Art. 12)
The national central banks as an integral part of the ESCB must fol-
low the guidelines and instructions of the ECB. The Governing Council
will take the necessary steps to ensure compliance and require that any
necessary information be given to it. (14.3.)
To conduct their operations, the ECB and the national central banks
may open accounts for credit institutions, public entities and other mar-
ket participants and accept assets, including book-entry securities, as
collateral.
Bank notes
The most visible method of creating money is the printing of gov-
ernment notes or of banknotes, and the minting of coins.
The ECB’s Governing Council has the exclusive right to authorize
the issue of bank notes within the Community. Both the ECB and the
national central banks may issue such notes. The bank notes issued by
the ECB and the national central banks will be the only such notes to
have the status of legal tender in the Community. (105a(1)) Coinage will
be minted in limited amounts by the national central banks.
Monetizing debt
A more important method of money creation is the monetization of
government debt. Article 104 forbids the monetization of national debts
by the ESCB or the ECB, by forbidding overdrafts or the direct purchase
of bonds from member governments and their institutions. Furthermore,
the European Community will not be responsible for the commitments
of the member states.
(Article 104) Overdrafts or any other type of credit facility with the
ECB or with the national central banks in favor of Community institu-
tions or bodies, central governments, regional, local or other public
authorities, other bodies governed by public law, or public undertakings
of Member States shall be prohibited, as shall the purchase directly from

them by the ECB or national central banks of debt instruments. (21.1.)
Open market and credit operations
Central banks have also “monetized debt” by purchasing govern-
ment and other debt instruments in the open market. This injects new
money into circulation. If they sell their bond holdings, they remove that
money from circulation. The ECB and the national central banks may
operate in the financial markets by buying and selling outright (spot or
forward) or under repurchase agreement and by lending or borrowing
claims and marketable instruments, whether in Community or in non-
Community currencies, as well as precious metals; conduct credit oper-
ations with credit institutions and other market participants, with lending
being based on adequate collateral.(18.1.)
The ECB establishes general principles for open market and credit
operations carried out by itself or the national central banks, including
the announcement of conditions under which they stand ready to enter
into such transactions. (18.2.)
Loan creation through fractional reserve banking
Since the fall of Byzantium, commercial banks have created money
by making loans - by entering credits on their books. The European
Central Bank can increase or decrease this potential for money creation
by raising and lowering the minimum reserve requirements that banks
must have to extend loans.
Minimum reserves
The ECB may require credit institutions established in Member
States to hold minimum reserves on accounts with the ECB and nation-
al central banks in pursuance of monetary policy objectives. Regulations
concerning the calculation and determination of the required minimum
reserves may be established by the Governing Council. In cases of non-
compliance the ECB can levy penalty interest and impose comparable
sanctions. (19.1.)
The Governing Council will define the basis for minimum reserves
and the maximum reserves and the maximum permissible ratios between
those reserves and their basis, as well as the appropriate sanctions in
cases of non-compliance. (19.2.)
The emergency clause
Presumably for emergencies, or to meet other evolving conditions
the Governing Council may, by a two thirds majority of the votes cast,
use other operational methods of monetary control as it sees fit, respect-

ing Article 2. The Council shall, in accordance with the procedure laid
down in Article 42, define the scope of such methods if they impose
obligations on third parties.
COMMENT
There are two important things missing regarding the money cre-
ation power that should be corrected. First, the ECB is about the cre-
ation, control, and liquidation of money. But there is no clear definition
of money. Do they think it is unnecessary? The lack of a good money
definition in the U.S. Constitution eventually allowed the monetary
power to overwhelm the whole structure.
Fixing the exchange rate of the Euro in terms of the national cur-
rencies will define its value at that starting point, but does not define the
nature of the Euro. One can infer a jumbled definition of this money, as
“backed” by, (but not redeemable for) various existing assets, commodi-
ties, government and other securities. In this system, money is what the
ECB says is money, and rightfully so, but it should clearly declare what
money is! For example, see pages 656-57.
To avoid confusion and error, not only of participants, but of the
ECB itself, it should make explicitly clear its definition of money now.
In doing so, even if it moved forward with a less than perfect definition,
that error will become easier to correct as the definition is examined and
brought into convergence with the real nature of money.
The second crucial item missing is a discussion of exactly how the
ECB will create the new money needed as Europe's population, indus-
try and commerce grow. Which guidelines will be used? Will money
growth be geared to population growth? Adjusted upwards for growth in
production and services? Be dependent on foreign trade balances? Left
largely to the discretion of private bankers as in the U.S.? The
Community needs to know and seriously discuss these things now, if
confidence in the overall fairness of the system is to be fostered. The
ECB will also need such guidelines to execute its own duties.
THE FRACTIONAL RESERVE PROBLEM IN THE EMU
Another important matter is the ECB’s intent to allow banks to
engage in fractional reserve lending. We have noted the problems with
fractional reserves in Chapters 19, 20, and 25. It shifts the power to cre-
ate money from the government (in effect the people) to the bankers.
While European bankers may be a different breed from American
bankers and have not acted as recklessly in the past, this does not change
the fact that a great privilege is bestowed upon bankers in the power to
create money. This privilege leads to a continuing concentration of
wealth and power into the hands of bankers, without their earning it. It's
wrong.
Furthermore, as discussed in Chapters 19 and 20 it is the source of
panics and crashes in money and banking markets.
One hundred percent reserves could be implemented as in the plan
discussed in Chapter 24, except that presumably this would be political
death to the EMU, with the bankers preferring fractional reserve bank-
ing under their old national systems, instead of 100% reserves in the
European Community. If fractional reserves are a political necessity at
present for the EMU to move forward, removing this problem should be
on the reform agenda.
It would negate much of the ultimate purpose of the ECB to rely on
fractional reserve banking as its main method of creating money. The
ECB needs the ability to do that independently and directly. It needs the
ability to create reserves or simply money out of thin air, when it deter-
mines that is the best way to monetarily serve the Community. Without
that power it would be a eunuch among world central banks, and the
European Community would be accepting the disadvantages of central-
ized control, without the main advantage.
Yet there is not sufficient reference to the ECB’s power to create
reserves - or its intended use in the ECB protocols: “The Governing
Council shall formulate the monetary policy of the Community includ-
ing. ..the supply of reserves in the ESCB and shall establish necessary
monetary guidelines for the implementation.” (Ch. 3, Organization of
the ESCB, art. 12.1)
This is simply not an adequate discussion of how reserves will be
created by flat. It's as though the organizers don't want to clearly state
the power (which is there) for fear that it might bring on demands for
more monetary expansion by sections of the Community. They are like
temple priests bowing low to the ground in the presence of the holy of
holies, afraid or forbidden to even to look directly at “the power.”
NEW MONEY TO BE BASED ON FOREIGN TRADE SURPLUSES?
Because the Bundesbank previously relied heavily on trade surplus-
es to obtain U.S. dollar monetary reserves, perhaps there is a hope of
continuing to do this with the ECB. But this method of obtaining
reserves is problematic, and misses the point on the nature of money.
Consider that German labor, which used to be less expensive than

American labor, must now compete against Asian labor, which is so
cheap that it approaches slave labor.
In a situation where American banks finance state of the art factories
in Asia, European labor can compete with that only if they too enter into
a form of slavery. There is no modem tradition for that in Europe and it
may be fought with blood, and rightfully so. Ultimately, free trade can
be a good idea if its benefits are truly shared by the peoples of the
respective nations, rather than their ruling elites.
The European System of Central Banks will have to directly face the
question of creating new money within the system. In any case selling
more than you buy creates friction with your trading partners. It is a
mentality that treats the money system like a game of marbles, where the
“winner” takes the marbles home to his hoard. The only period it worked
well was when it was desirable to spread reserves that were overly con-
centrated in the U.S. to the rest of the world. It is time for the central
bankers to face their real responsibilities toward their own and other
nations. They need to stop acting as facilitators for international curren-
cy speculation, which does not produce anything, and can only destroy.
“Free trade” should never include unlimited speculative trading of
national currencies.
If the intent of some is to twist up Europe into a Puritanical knot of
scarce money and “pious” monetary morbidity, that will become appar-
ent fairly soon. At such a point, Europeans should remember that the
ESCB contains the monetary power to help make the economy flourish,
not merely to grow. It can be used when there is the will to do it.
IT WAS IN THE HANDS OF THE EMI
Until recently, the task of defining money, and of creating the guide-
lines on how and how much new money will be created, was in the
hands of the European Monetary Institute (EMI). According to the EMI
Protocol (art. 4.2): “the EMI shall specify the regulatory, organizational,
and logistical framework necessary for the ESCB to perform its tasks...
in particular. ..to prepare the instruments and procedures necessary for
carrying out a single monetary policy.”
Back in 1997 we invited the EMI to specify these guidelines in
greater detail, so that the community could discuss them and be assured
of their adequacy. These are not minor matters.
Why proceed with an unjust and unstable fractional reserve system?
The EMU must go forward because there is really no choice,
64tl The Lost Science Of Money
considering what Europe faces in the monetary hegemony of the Federal

Reserve System, and those who control the world's dollar based finan-
cial order, using it as a club to bludgeon weaker states.
We saw in Chapter 2, in the Caesar's establishment of a gold stan-
dard in Rome, the danger of placing the control of the money system
outside the community. The recent monetary debacle of Southeast Asian
countries in 1997-98 demonstrated the danger of basing one's economy
on a money system and monetary unit that someone else controls.
Previously, international firms could employ Indonesians for 15 or
20 U.S. dollars a week equivalent in local currency. Now, by cutting the
value of Indonesia's currency by 75%, the wages paid to these people
was also reduced 75% in dollar terms. This brought a change of govern-
ment, and thereby removed politically entrenched local competitors.
This experience highlights a system of unlimited free trade in cur-
rencies, and the resultant mobilization of billions of dollars that can be
deployed with no advance notice, at the speed of light, plus '/2 minute
(the maximum time it should take for the order to go from the telephone
or computer to the trading pit). This system has shown itself capable of
producing even worse results than the old international gold standard, in
giving financial manipulators the ability to decide the fate of nations.
Today, almost five years after the Asian currency debacle, the
Indonesian government is still in tatters.
The European Central Bank, properly empowered to create money,
backed up by the fact of Europe's combined size and production capa-
bility, can be strong enough to keep the monetary manipulators at bay.
That would be good for the peoples of Europe, the America's and Asia.
In fact, Articles 73f and 73g provide the decisive power to stop cur-
rency manipulations. Under the terms of those sections the ECB can
block disruptive movement of currency to and from 3rd countries for up
to six months. Any member state can also take such action unilaterally
against non-member countries. This valuable and appropriate power
could be combined with further measures such as denial of visas, and
even arrest warrants against those in the corporate chain of command of
offending organizations.
REGARDING GREAT BRITAIN
Great Britain has not yet signed on to integrate the British Pound
into the Euro system, though it would be clearly beneficial to the English
people. Even at this distance we catch glimpses of a propaganda cam-
paign out of London, aimed at politically swaying the citizenry against
joining. It appears in its present phase, as a somewhat racially oriented

campaign based on English chauvinism. As in the past, we observe some
of the best, and the worst, coming out of England.
The nasty element has given up trying to scare European leaders
with economic theories, as in 1976 when Frederich Hayek, a professor
at the London School of Economics, attempted to throw a theoretical
monkey wrench into the plans for the Euro, in his essay
Denationalisation of Money. Ridiculing the proposal of the new Euro as
“utopian” he proposed instead that private banks in the Common Market
be given full leeway for:
“...free dealing throughout their territories in one anothers curren-
cies (including gold coins) or of a similar free exerclse of the banking
business by any institution legally established in any of their territo-
ries...This seems to me both preferable and more practicable than the
utopian scheme of introducing a new European currency, which would
ultimately only have the effect of more deeply entrenching the source
and root of all monetary evil, the government monopoly of the issue and
control of money. ..I have grave doubts about the desirability of (unify-
ing Europe) by creating a new European currency managed by any sort
of supra national authority.”1
The American Libertarians have bought into Hayek’s “grave
doubts;” the non-English speaking European nations (and of course
Ireland) have not.
The question of British participation in the European Monetary
System is more important than would appear on the face of things. It is
not that the Euro needs Britain in order to succeed. But if done correct-
ly, integrating Britain into the European monetary system can help
resolve a three centuries old problem that has plagued the world.
THE EURO AND THE “PROBLEM OF EUROPE”
In his last book, Tragedy and Hope, Prof. Carroll Quigley defined
the “problem of Europe” - i.e. that a united German powerhouse tends to
become dominant - as really being the problem of England's reaction
toward that potential dominance. He analyzed the English problem in
terms of its financial establishment's desire or belief that England was
an Atlantic rather than a European power and must be allied, or even fed-
erated, with the United States and must remain isolated from Europe.
We see the fundamental relevance of Quigley's analysis to the present
day, as elements in England try to keep the nation aloof from the
European Union.2
Without belng too melodramatic, one visualizes that within England
there still lurks the dark and powerful remnants of the “Bank of England
Gang,” for want of a better term. A doctrinally, hereditarily, or finan-
cially linked residue. If Britain were firmly in the European Monetary
System that gang's power to disrupt either in America or Europe would
be dramatically reduced, and they would be isolated there in the Atlantic,
between two great powers, where they can wither away before doing any
further damage to humanity.
The actions of the Continental Powers have been wise in terms of
helping bring England into the system. The Community's soft approach
toward England should be continued until the British people can relax
and fully understand its in their best interest to align with Europe. Come
what may, the door should remain open to them on favorable terms.
ACCOUNTABILITY
Article 35.1 is an important one - it gives the Court of Justice juris-
diction to review and interpret acts or omissions of the ECB. Presumably,
not providing an adequate money supply sufficient for industry and com-
merce would be an omission. Central banks have been sued for this in the
past, for example in the U.S. as we saw in Chapter 16.
The reader will sense that we are more concerned with the danger of
too little, rather than too much money in circulation. That has historical-
ly been the case. It's doubtful the European wartime inflations could have
been stopped. They were the result of paying for wars, not necessarily of
monetary mismanagement. Chapter 22 discussed the German case.
Institutionalize a formal review process
One suggestion would be to establish an automatic formal review
process providing for critical reviews of how the ECB is functioning
after 5, 10, and 20 years. A broad based commission, working with the
Court of Justice, could make recommendations with the necessary
“teeth” in them to alter the ECB's performance, if that is called for. It's
best that the process be automatic, and not subject to political decision
later. In 1956 the U.S. Congress tried to organize such a review of the
Federal Reserve System, but the bankers blocked it politically.
STATED GOALS
Article 105 states that “The primary objective of the ESCB shall be
to maintain price stability.” Continuing, the ESCB’s task shall be to
“define and implement the monetary policy of the Community. ..conduct
foreign exchange operations ...[and to] hold and manage the official
foreign reserves of the member states.”
But what may well turn out to be the most important statement of
purpose in the ECB’s founding documents are in the objectives listed in
the amended B) Part One “Principles,” Article 2:
“To promote throughout the Community a Harmonious and balanced
development of economic activities, sustainable and non-inflationary
growth respecting the environment, a high level of employment and of
social protection, the raising of the standard of living and quality of life,
and economic and social cohesion and solidarity among Member States.”
However, it says this is to be done “without prejudice to the objec-
tive of price stability,” by which they mean less than 20/o inflation.
COMMENT
Here we clearly see the division in attitudes that hopefully will
evolve into a healthy balance of forces in the Community. On the one
hand there are the heavy footprints of the “High Priests” of economics
and banking who appear to sincerely believe that “price stability” is a
sufficient measure of success or failure of the EMU!
Price stability, while important, could never be the primary
objective. Price stability of what? Of a well functioning currency sys-
tem that has been properly provided to the community - providing
that currency system is clearly more primary than “price stability.”
In Article 2 we see the importance of clearly stating the obvious. For
it is not obvious (or even desirable) to all, that the money system must
be held accountable to foster desirable results. Article 2 is the human
face of the EMU, the provisions that can serve to tame the worst misus-
es of the ECB, which the most myopic management might someday
attempt to impose. Such poor policies have been imposed, for example,
by the Federal Reserve System. A typical American banker's view would
be that the money system is fine, as long as their own profits are being
maximized.
In Article 2 is embodied a “silent” but important monetary principle:
the correct vision that the money system must be managed to produce
superior living results, not just to conform to dead theory. In other
words, its success is defined in terms of the desired outcomes. The
money system must be the servant and not the master.
POLITICAL INFLUENCE BLOCKED
Article 7 : “neither the ECB, nor a national central bank, nor any
member of their decision-making bodies shall seek or take instructions
from Community institutions or bodies, from any government of a

Member State or from any other body. The Community institutions and
bodies and the governments of the Member States undertake to respect
this principle and not to seek to influence the members of the decision-
making bodies of the ECB or of the national central banks in the per-
formance of their tasks.”
COMMENT
Again, we see the footprints of the bankers/economists. Is the ECB
prohibited from reciprocal influence attempts on the member states? Are
the political implications, already embodied in the (banker promoted)
economic and monetary theories that will guide the ECB, going to be
honestly acknowledged for all to understand?
LIKELY OUTCOME
As presently constituted the ECB appears superior to the Federal
Reserve System. Consider for example the public ownership of it and its
broad statement of social goals, which have no counterpart in the Federal
Reserve. As presently written, however, the ECB does not stop an over-
ly technocratic approach to running the money system, without enough
thought (?) and detailed written provision for the human, social and eco-
nomic requirements, which the money system must serve. To try to sub-
ordinate these elements to the mantra of “price stability” may indicate
what some of the organizers intend. It is no secret that price stability, if
achieved through overly restricting the growth in the money supply, will
favor wealthy bondholders at the expense of both industrialists and the
less well off, increasing the gulf between rich and poor, not through nat-
ural talents, abilities, or productive effort, but based rather on one group
controlling the money system, measuring and proclaiming the success of
that system in terms specially designed to favor itself.
That has almost always been the rule for monetary systems.
However, the EMU need not repeat this mistake of the past. A stronger
provision can be made in the founding documents to protect from such
injustice and its resulting effects. If that proves impossible, then the
question becomes whether the structure can react intelligently, after an
overly harsh implementation, and become self correcting, or will it dis-
integrate in the direction of its national parts?
CONCLUSION
For the first time in three generations Europeans do not have the bur-
den of rebuilding destroyed infrastructure, factories and homes. Instead
they are poised to create a significant advance in their material well

being and the social benefits that can accompany it. The main obstacle
to such success may be poorly defined monetary theory.
The European Community's approach to monetary union - carefully
deliberating the matter, publishing and then reworking its articles with
informed input from many quarters and nationalities - is unique in the
history of monetary reforms. Compare this to the secrecy, special deal-
ing, and deception that has marked major reforms of the past such as the
founding of the Bank of England, the First and Second Banks of the
U.S., and the Federal Reserve System. This bodes well for the future of
the Community.
However, the plan as formulated (May 1998, latest available docu-
ments) does not yet present sufficient detail in several areas. There are
warning signs and contradictions in the stated objectives of the plan,
which could become system breaking problems, depending on how the
plan is implemented. The potential obsession with prlce stability is one
problem. The system must avoid ideological rigidity, be alert to feed-
back, and be flexible to adjust course.
These trouble signs can be substantially reduced by clarification of
the flat nature of money as a legal institution of the Community, and the
specification of the initial guidelines that the ECB will use ln making
increases in the money supply. Also, it should be clarified what condi-
tions would cause a re-thinking, upward or downward. These are not
matters that should be left vague, or couched in overly concise technical
jargon.
The attempt to disconnect the money system from politics reflects a
distrust of the citizenry in such matters. Of course it should have inde-
pendence, like the Judiciary. But it must also be accountable, and it is
through politics that the citizens express (lndirectly) whether the money
system is functioning well or not. In fact, they are the ultimate judges of
that, not the high priests of an undefinable ideology, not some bank's
board of directors, not an arbitrarily drawn list of statistics. The raison
d'étre of the money system is to serve the community, and history gives
us little reason to place more trust in money systems controlled by elites,
rather than by the citizens. If anything, the balance of monetary history
indicates the opposite.
The Europeans are flexible and wise enough to make the necessary
adjustments over time. The only question is the extent and type of exter-
nal pressure that will most certainly be brought against them by elements
in the U.S. and England to discourage a proper running of their money

system.
THE EURO'S LAUNCHING AND AFTERMATH
In the last third of 1998, just prior to the introduction of the Euro (in
January 1999), the U.S. dollar fell in foreign exchange markets. This
meant that European currencies such as the German Deutschmark rose
substantially, and thus the initial launching value of the Euro in terms of
Dollars was artificially higher that the 1 to 1 (par) value desired by the
ECB managers.
Starting out at about $1.18, or 18 cents over par, the Euro was over-
priced and proceeded to decline in terms of dollars for 21 months. The
English language press reported on this as though it indicated major
problems for the Euro, and succeeded in scaring most market partici-
pants, even some sophisticated players, that the Euro might be dead on
arrival. Much was made of its falling through par, and continuing down-
ward. They forgot the events prior to launch, and they ignored that over-
priced items tend to keep falling until they become underpriced.
Just as we predicted, the Euro bottomed at about 82 cents, almost
exactly as much under par as it had started out over par.
At that point our projection was that it would rise through par to
about $1.07-1.10, and could then be expected to oscillate around $1. We
continue to hold that opinion.
Remember that, prior to the Euro’s introduction, there was only one
“world class” currency in existence - the U.S. dollar. Now there are two,
DEUTSCHE MARK RISE -1998 and that truly represents progress
for humanity. No one country
should ever control the world's
moneys. The next major develop-
ment will be for China, Japan and
others to introduce an Asian
equivalent to the Euro.
CONFLICT WITH EUROPE?
Hard as it is to imagine, there
is now a potential for monetary
(even military?) warfare between
the U.S. and Europe. The phrase
fig. “dollar hegemony” refers to finan-
cial elements, generally but not
was
exclusively in the U.S., using the monetary dominance of the U.S. dol-
lar to politically dominate other countries and regions. This has reached
the point where growing numbers of lesser developed countries have
adopted the U.S. dollar as their official standard (for example, in South
and Central America).
Although monetary control differs from military dominance, some
in
1.15
1.10
- .05
Par - —1.00
95
-. 90
- 85
'1999 '2000 '2001

23b. The ECB intended to launch the Euro at par with the U.S. dollar, but
currency markets forced European currencies higher just prior to the
launch so that the Euro came out at about $1.18. The decline from there
may have been intended to spook the ECB into foolish actions, but
failed to do so. A good sign for the new currency.
of the effects are similar. As noted, in the 1960s General Charles

DeGaulle understood how abstractly created U.S. credits were being
used to buy up and control tangible French industry and property. He
tried to restrict that process, but with only limited success, since
Europe's de facto standard was to a large extent not gold or their indi-
vidual national currencies, but the U.S. Dollar.
The Euro has changed that, beginning the process of taking Europe
out from under the Federal Reserve's dollar hammer. Faced with
European monetary independence, some really bad people may attempt a
form of military domination instead. This possibility is raised, because
NATO (North Atlantic Treaty Organization) appears to be emerging as a
vehicle for such dominance. This became visible in NATO's dispropor-
tionate (and illegitimate?) bombing of Serbia including the city of
Belgrade last year. This was done mainly under the direction of British
and U.S. elements. These elements could be characterized as an Anglo-
American Establishment, comprising the worst elements from both
countries. In England, the same financially powerful element is present-
ly blocking England's full entry into the European Community.
Thus, even without direct attacks, NATO (i.e. the Anglo-American
Establishment) - has been militarily determining the political landscape of
parts of Europe. At some point we expect to see the European Union
develop a process to begin breaking free of NATO and to eventually seek
its dissolution. Such moves are to be encouraged. Unfortunately, after
the tragedy of the World Trade Towers on September 11, 2001 and the
ensuing Bush Administration's “war on terrorism,” nasty elements are
finding it easier to promote this NATO vision of Europe, under cover of
the crisis.
We must especially beware of those forces prodding the U.S. to take
military actions that increase the probability of a long term religious
conflict with Islam. Just who would that be convenient for? Not
America; not Europe; certainly not the hundreds of millions of Moslems
who would die. Such a development has the potential to derail the
progress of humanity more than all the past tricks these groups have
pulled, put together. One would have to seriously consider whether their
real goal is not further riches and power for themselves, but death and
destruction for much of humanity.
THE EURO RESULTS THUS FAR
The results of the Euro have been impressive: upon introduction in
1999 it immediately became the world's second most important money,
even before actual coin and currency began circulating in January 2002.
Inflation has been kept near its target level of 2% annually and is expect-
ed to be under that in 2002.3
Production and economic growth have increased - 3.4% in 2000 -
the strongest growth in a decade. Unemployment, though still high by
U.S. standards, has dropped from around 12% to about 8%. These lev-
els are less ominous than they would be in the U.S. because of the exten-
sive safety nets Europeans maintain, including universal health care.
Also because unemployment figures in the U.S. are understated.
The Euro area reported a strong balance of trade surplus but a weak
balance for services and financial transfers. This resulted in a balance of
payments deficit of E70 billion in year 2000. This deficit dropped to
E9.3 billion in 2001, and the month of December 2001 showed a balance
of payments surplus of E2.9 billion.
ECB President Willem F. Duisenberg's letter in their 2000 Annual
Report notes that: “Financial markets have shown confidence in the
determination and ability of the ECB to maintain price stability, its
23c.
Actual Euro coin
and currency
introduced in
January 2002. A
one Euro coin
and a 20 Euro
note are pictured
here (not to
scale). Notes have
a common Euro
theme on one
side, and a
national French,
German, or
Italian, etc,
theme on the
reverse. All are
current through-
out Europe.
primary objective...The ECB has already built up considerable credibility.”

Yet even in this “price stability” regime the managers have been able
to adopt a general target of 4.5% annual growth in the money supply.
That should be enough to avoid deflationary problems. The test will
come when a situation arises where the banks don't want to create the
new money, and the ECB will have to find a way to make that happen.
Duisenberg reports that “The first two years of the Euro have also
shown that the policy-making framework at the European level is satis-
factory. No major flaws emerged, as had been feared by some.”
Also interesting is that the ECB had a net profit of 2.6 billion Euro
in year 2000, and especially that “The profit made in the context of the
ECB's intervention in the foreign exchange markets was a significant
element of this result.” Thus while the attack on the Euro in the foreign
exchange markets temporarily interfered with building popular confi-
dence, it was not without cost to the speculators.
All in all an auspicious launching of this important new develop-
ment for humanity.
Notes to Chapter 19
l
Frederich Hayek, Denationalisation of Money, (London: Institute of Economic
Affairs, 2nd edition, 1978), pp. 19 - 20.
Carroll Quigley, Tragedy and Hope, (New York: Macmillan, 1966), p. 950
3 These statistics and those that follow are from the ECB's Annual Report
for the year 2000 and from from its January and February 2002 Bulletins.
651
CHAPTER 24
PROPOSALS FOR U.S.

MONETARY REFORM
TOWARD A FOURTH BRANCH
OF GOVERNMENT
“These tremendous powers have been wielded

with such a lack of scientific or financial skill, and
in so narrow and selfish a spirit, that its arbiters have
repeatedly plunged the commercial world into bankruptcy,
and confiscated or inequitably redistributed its accumulated
earnings, either for their own benefit or else to save themselves
from the effects of their own blundering.”
Alexander Del Mar'
Portia to Shylock: “For as thou urgest justice,

be assured thou shalt have justice, more than thou desirest.”
Shakespeare's Merchant of Venice
Portia's words could be appropriately directed to those holding the

U.S. monetary power. They piously call for “law and order” and ask for
greater individual responsibility and harder work from their subjects,
even as they make life more inhumane. Ever larger numbers of working
families are slipping into poverty as more and more wealth concentrates
in the hands of the very rich. In 1985 there were 33 million Americans
living in poverty, but by 1995 it increased to 37 million. During that
652 TOWARD A FOURTH BRANCH OF GOVERNMENT
period 234,000 family farms were lost, and now close to 20% of
American farmers live in poverty!2
As Americans go further into credit card debt just to make ends
meet, they are subjected to obscene rates of interest, around 200/ . That
this has been “legalized” makes a farce of the law. The usurers have had
usury limits removed and are now actively bribing legislators to change
the personal bankruptcy laws in order to assure that American debtors
can be held in a form of perpetual bondage to them.
American vacations are a thing of the past, or have been reduced to
a break too short to shake off the psychological stresses of an increas-
ingly pressurized work atmosphere. The average vacation is now ten
days. Americans hear of Europeans' five week vacations in disbelief.
In the enforcement of the laws, property, especially that held by
financial institutions, is sacred, but industry is treated as subordinate,
and labor is merely a pawn. Too many of the American poor, facing this
bleak existence, and the American wealthy facing a meaningless one, try
to escape into chemically induced hallucinations through drugs and alco-
hol. Their “wars on crime” have now imprisoned a larger percentage of
America's population than any other nation on earth, over 1.5 million
citizens, mainly on drug charges. They have made the building of pris-
ons America's leading “growth industry.”
An even darker side of the U.S. prison situation is the growth of pri-
vate corporations' systematic substitution of prison labor (at 23 cents to
$1 per hour) for normal labor. Prison labor is a form of slave labor. Some
factories have been closed in order to move the production into nearby
prisons. This has moved so fast that the various main line religious
denominations have not yet reacted to this important development.
Europeans should understand where the policies of the free market
gang lead, so they can reconsider whether they really want to blindly fol-
low the U.S. In any case our current direction toward some strange form
of “disneyland fascism,” must change.
Much of the crime in the U.S. arises from an inequitable money sys-
tem, which rewards those skilled in manipulating the financial rules, and
neglects those doing an honest day's work. Some minorities succumb to
the illegal drug trade because they have no alternative employment.
American blacks especially are limited from meaningful participa-
tion in the economy. On an individual basis they can rise above the obsta-
cles and many capable individuals do. System wide, however, in an econ-
omy designed to ration work and keep a standing army of unemployed
24 PROPOSALS FOR U.S. MONETARY REFORM 653
available to put downward pressure on wages, it's not possible for the
group as a whole to overcome the disadvantages, which take their toll on
large percentages of its members. It should come as no surprise then that
blacks make up a disproportionate part of the U.S. prison population.
WHO IS RESPONSIBLE?
Those in charge of the U.S. money system, and their predecessors,
must bear a large part of the responsibility for this inequitable situation.
They broke the banks in 1929-32 and would not re-establish the money
supply except to make war. They proceeded to base the economy on the
military industrial complex for five decades, amassing many thousands of
thermonuclear weapons which could only be used if the Earth was
being destroyed. In 1970-74, the system was kept from total collapse
only by the perception that the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation
was government guaranteed.
The banking disasters of Penn Central, Continental Illinois, Franklin
National, and the B.C.C.I. among others, have kept U.S. banking fraud
in the headlines over the years. The Savings and Loan scandals of the
late 1980s and early 1990s were a direct result of their removal of gov-
ernment banking regulations, and finally cost the American taxpayers
over $100 billion to bail them out.3 There is no comparable banking mis-
management to be found in any European country.
It appears to be a pillar of the U.S. “justice” system that the banking
crime connected with these dlsasters must go essentially unpunished.
This pattern for non-punishment of grand scale financial crime is
ingrained in the English speaking world, beginning with the scandals
surrounding the South Sea Bubble in 1721. Chapter 11 described how
England's ruling elites were involved in that swindle. We must find a
way to give these “financiers” the justice they deserve.
The author is not advocating a view ofjustice that ignores individ-
ua1 differences between men, or in which nature is denied, but is sug-
gesting that the cannibalism, as embodied in our present money system,
must stop. It is degrading to the human species.
MISDIAGNOSIS OF AMERICA'S PROBLEMS
Maintaining a confused concept of the nature of money has allowed
the money system origin of so many of society's serious problems to be
obscured. For example:
Balancing the federal budget
Balancing the federal budget is sold to the American public as a fiscal
problem of balancing income and expenses. In the 1990s about 14% of

the U.S. annual budget has been going to pay interest on the national
debt. But this debt is unnecessary and arises out of a flawed money sys-
tem. The problem thus becomes re-defined as one that requires monetary
reform, not penny-pinching and parsimony.
Actually there is no federal “budget”
The budget debates are meaningless because the U.S. Federal
Budget does not distinguish between capital outlays and operating
expenses. Money for new buildings and equipment, computers, air-
planes, roads, bridges, airports, etc. are treated like operating expenses
and there is no capital side to the budget, where such items should be
amortized over their many years of use. This fact alone sabotages the
operation of our government.
Deterioration of the American infrastructure system
Again this results from not understanding that money should be cre-
ated by government for such expenditures. Infrastructure spending is an
excellent way to introduce new money into circulation, distributing it
geographically, funding decent paying jobs and leaving valuable infra-
structure for the citizens to use for many years. Good roads and bridges
and brightly painted divider lines on highways also save lives.
The American Society of Civil Engineers' 1998 Report for
America's Infrastructure is an unanswerable indictment of the current
way America's monetary resources are allocated. The Report graded 10
major infrastructure categories and estimated how much money is need-
ed to remedy the ills:
Department Present Condition $ Needed for Repairs
Roads D- $357 billion
Bridges C- $ 80 billion
Mass Transit C $ 72 billion
Aviation C- $ 60 billion
Schools F $172 billion
Drinking Water D $138 billion
Wastewater D+ $140 billion
Dams D $ 1 billion
Solid Waste C- $ 75 billion
Hazardous Waste D- $750 billion
Grade average: D Total Needed: $1.8 Trillion
Nullification of local government

The monetary strangulation of government occurs at the federal,
state, and local levels. Small towns are forced into more debt in order to
perform necessary functions. The interest costs on this debt approximate-
ly doubles the cost of all equipment, construction, or services provided.
Where the towns are up against debt limits, the lenders have con-
trived to lend to newly created quasi-official agencies, whose debts are
guaranteed by the municipality. Local governments are being advised to
merge activities with other localities to save money. Recently in our
upstate New York area the emergency medical services (ambulances)
were told to merge. That means a drop in services, with no drop in taxes.
Rescuing Social Security and Medicare/Medicaid
Lack of money to pay for crucial programs is again not a fiscal but
a monetary problem caused ultimately by the false idea that government
must get money only by taxation or borrowing. The distribution of
newly created government money through such programs is an excellent
method of getting new money into circulation; it would be widely dis-
tributed by population and geography, in small amounts.
A broken down educational system
Overcrowded schoolrooms and dilapidated buildings plague the
education system. The problem is that most of the funding for schools
comes from property taxes mainly on middle class homes. Its not unusu-
al to pay $3,000 per $100,000 house valuation, each year in school taxes
alone. This has gone beyond reasonable limits and more retired
Americans are forced to slowly trade their homes for the tax payments.
The federal government could be supporting education much more if it
were in control of the money system.
Another larger problem of the schools is what's being taught:
“Everything is relative; there are no absolutes” translates in the stu-
dents' minds into “there's no right or wrong.” What's not being taught is
how to think, how to reason and evaluate facts and experience to arrive
at absolute, or probable conclusions.
But a financial system based upon so many falsehoods requires a
high degree of ignorance in the population or the system will be seen
through and be overthrown.
Teen-age suicide and murder
A regular anguish of American life are the news reports of yet anoth-
er teenager who snaps mentally and shoots teachers and classmates. In
addition, the suicide rate among American teenagers has risen dramati-
cally: up 300% in the last 30 years. Whatever the individual facts and
failings related to these tragedies, an important factor on the teenagefs is
the unbearable level of hypocrisy that our system now embodies.
Even the super-rich are not shielded from the violence. Consider the
1996 Colorado murder of 6-year-old Jean Bennet Ramsay right in the
home of her multi-millionaire parents; the 1996 New York murder of the
son of the billionaire Chairman of Time Warner company; the 1996 mur-
der in North Carolina of the father of half-billionaire basketball super-
star Michael Jordan; the 1997 murder of the son of half-billionaire enter-
tainer Bill Cosby in California; the 1997 Florida murder of multi-mil-
lionaire designer Gianni Versace.
Absence of a national caretaker
Behind these problems is the fact that the nation is controlled more
from behind the scenes by financial institutions than by the citizens
through elections.
When society loses control over its money system it loses whatever
control it might have had over its destiny. It can no longer set priorities
and the policies for achieving them. It can't solve problems, which then
develop into crises and continually mount up.
Its leaders substitute public relations for action and although the
media is part of this pretense, an awareness slowly develops that there is
“nobody home” in Washington. Nobody is taking care of America.
People stop voting and a deep sickness of the spirit develops.
MONETARY REFORM IS CRUCIALLY NEEDED
It's long overdue to admit that the money system is responsible for
so many social crises. Basic monetary principles can then be applied to
reforming the money system to help resolve society's most serious prob-
lems. Implementing the reforms requires effective political action.
MONEYS' NATURE MUST DICTATE MONETARY REFORM
Readers should now understand what money is - what it is we are
reforming. We've noted our inheritance from past genius:
from Aristotle - “Money exists not be nature but by law;”
from Plato - “a money token for purposes of exchange;”
from Paulus - “This device being officially promulgated, circulated and
maintained its purchasing power not so much from its substance as from
its quantity.”
Then after a long darkness,
from Berkeley - “Whether the true idea of money as such, be not alto-
gether that of a ticket, or counter?;”
from Locke and Franklin who viewed money as a pledge for wealth
rather than wealth itself;
from Del Mar we have:
“...what is commonly understood as money has always consisted,
tangibly, of a number of pieces of some material, marked by public
authority and named or understood in the laws or customs: that its pal-
pable characteristic was its mark of authority; its essential characteristic,
the possession of value, defined by law; and its function, the legal power
to pay debts and taxes and the mechanical power to facilitate the
exchange of other objects possessing value. ;4
and from Knapp - “Our test, that the money is accepted in payments
made to the states offices.”
We accept these concepts and add: Money's essence (apart from
whatever is used to signify it), is an abstract social power embodied
in law, as an unconditional means of payment.
This can be referred to as a socio/legal Constitutional Concept o]
Money. Wordsmiths are invited to submit a nicer sounding title to the
AMI. The term “Societal Concept ofMoney” also fits well. Perhaps sim-
ply the“Nomisma Concept of Money,” or just “Nomisma” is sufficient.
We could also call it the “Aristotelian concept of money,” in his honor.
A good money system will accomplish the above goals in a just and
efficient manner, assisting the widespread creation of values for living.
A bad one will raise unnecessary obstacles to the production of values,
establish privilege and comiption, and concentrate wealth and power
into undeserving hands. We presently have a very bad one.
This book has shown that it is historically self evident that the best
money systems have been controlled and monitored through law, by
public authority. Leaving the money power in private hands has invited,
even assured, disastrous results. This is also consistent with the logic of
money: since the money system is a creature of law, it rightfully belongs
within government, just as the law courts do.
We propose that ultimately the monetary power should be
constituted as a fourth branch of government, like the execu-
tive, judicial and legislative branches. We have concluded that the
nature of man and of society requires four, not three, branches of
government.
REFORMING THE U.S. MONETARY

SYSTEM
“Specialists without spirit, sensualists without heart;
this nullity imagines that it has attained a level of civilization
never before attained.”
5
Max Weber
Max Weber's comment was directed at “victorious capitalism.. .In

the field of its highest development, in the United States.” The smug atti-
tude he observed in the early 1900s continues today and presents a sub-
stantial obstacle to reform. A pre-condition of reform is usually to appre-
ciate why it is needed.
In America today, monetary reform is not yet a mainstream issue.
Among those who are interested, many fall into error in several margin-
al and futile areas: those supporting a gold standard; supporters of so-
called “free banking;” advocates of various LETS systems; and lastly the
“all money is debt” people.
THE GOLD PROMOTERS
There is always a small fervent faction composed of conservative
elements, some fundamentalist religious folk and lots of people with a
financial interest in gold mining or coin investments. Unaware of all the
historical evidence to the contrary, they have convinced themselves that a
gold standard would be good for the country.
But history shows that over and again the so-called gold standard
has been little more than a ruse and a way to concentrate special mone-
tary privileges into the hands of a plutocracy. Examples include the first
and second Banks of the United States, the various state banks, and the
early Federal Reserve System, all described in previous chapters.
The misinformation being spread that a gold standard helps the com-
mon man because it stops inflation misses the point. First, it does not
always stop inflation, as we saw in the doubling of prices from 1917-
1920, or the 400% rise in prices in the sixteenth century. More recently,
from 1971 to 1974 gold rose over 500% from $38 to $200 an ounce. In
1975, gold dropped 50%, to $103. It then rose 700% to over $800, and
then declined to $238. These movements were not due to changes in the
dollar. Gold does not represent an objective value and to base a money
system on it would be folly.
Secondly, labor and industry have suffered far more from deflation
or restriction of the money system than from inflation and a metallic-

based money system is normally a formula for deflation. In a deflation,
it is those with money or to whom money is owed, who automatically
benefit without giving anything in return. Those in debt are harmed
because they must repay in more valuable money. As industrialists in a
society are usually large debtors, industry is harmed and this harm is
quickly passed through against labor, while also harming production.
In the late 1800s Henry George derided the idea of metallic money:
“We are digging silver out of certain holes in the ground [called mines]
in Nevada and Colorado and poking it down other holes in the ground
[called vaults] in Washington, New York, and San Francisco,” he wrote.6
Robert de Fremery made these salient comments on a gold standard:
“Would it be wise to have such a currency convertible into gold?
Certainly not. That would make it a credit currency - the very thing that
has caused so much trouble. There are people who look with distrust
upon ‘printing press’ or fiat’ money. But they overlook one of the basic
facts about money. It is true that we need a ‘hard’ money. But we should
not make the mistake of associating ‘hardness’ with convertibility into
gold. The essence of a hard money is not determined by the material of
which it is composed - or the material into which it is convertible. The
essence of a hard money is that its supply is fairly stable and there are
precise limits to it... And a purely paper or flat’ money can be a hard
money if we set precise limits to its supply, or it can be a soft money if
we set no precise limits to its supply. 7
THE “FREE BANKING” IDEOLOGUES
The term “free banking” is vague, because its supporters have not
uniformly defined it. We take it to mean a system where bankers are
allowed to create the money supply in the form of their credits, or notes,
which are allowed to circulate without restriction or regulation, to the
extent that the markets will allow. But isn't it really up to these advo-
cates to define their own terms if they want to be taken seriously?
The “free banking” advocates misuse the deductive method and take
laissez-faire beyond applicable limits, insisting bankers can be allowed to
issue unlimited amounts of money, as long as customers are willing to
accept it. But Professor Soddy explained why this can't be allowed:
“The issuer of money who first passes it into circulation cannot
help getting something for nothing, namely the exchange value of the
money...the value of everyone's holdings of money is directly affect-
ed by every new issue or cancellation...It reduces to a hypocritical
sham all the enactment’s...to insure just weights and measure.”’

Remember, if government issues the money, it is essentially a tax,
the proceeds of which are available to benefit the society. If the bankers
are allowed to issue money, they will primarily enrich themselves.
We discussed several of the problems with the free bankers in
Chapter 16. These fellows realize that men can have the freedom of most
action that does not harm others; but they don't understand that when a
private party creates money it represents a punch in the face to everyone
else! By now our readers should be aware of that.
The economist Milton Friedman, after years of resisting the free
banking supporters, then appeared to embrace their position, or at least
acquiesce with it. Hopefiilly he will take another look.
LOCAL CURRENCY (“LETS”) ADVOCATES
A third grouping has apparently given up on reform and is attempt-
ing to establish local currencies called LETS (Local Exchange Trading
System) to supplement the national circulation. These LETS systems
vary from locale to locale, and are not always as well defined as one could
ask. They are normally well meaning attempts to remedy the shortage of
national currency that undeniably exists in many localities. Mainly they
enable participants to trade their labor and some other items with one
another without using the national currency.
These systems can be traced back to Josiah Warren, the originator of
the Labour Exchange idea, put into practice by Robert Owen in London
in 1832 following a very tight money period. The problem is that while
these local systems do no financial harm and can alleviate local cash
shortages, they have been of very limited benefit, and generally soon end.
These currencies will continue to be limited unless they can qualify
as a true money form. That means taxes, at least local taxes, have to
become payable in them. One would then expect them to be issued by
the taxing body. At present this is not possible, except in emergencies.
Even state governments are forbidden from issuing their own currencies.
Furthermore, such local currencies do not stop the continued mis-
management of the money system at the national level - they can't stop
the continued dispensation of monetary injustice from above through the
privately owned and controlled Federal Reserve money system. Ending
that injustice should be our monetary priority. Thus the real harm done
by “LETS” systems is to distract otherwise concerned citizens from
advocating real reform.
THE “ALL MONEY IS DEBT” FACTION

This group confuses the nature of money, through their observation
of one perverted form of it. They say that since most of the money in cir-
culation is in the form of credits issued by banks (which are also debts
to those being credited), that therefore the nature of money is that it is
always debt, and some of them define money as “assignable debt”!
This viewpoint was especially spread out of England (see the dis-
cussion ofA. Mitchell Innes in Ch. 19) and in considering why they have
so much difficulty understanding the concept of money apart from debt,
the author realized that the English have no historical tradition of gov-
ernment issued money comparable to our own. For as we have seen,
while the Massachusetts colony issued government paper money in
1690, in 1694 the privately owned Bank of England took over England's
money issuing process, and kept it in private hands until the national-
ization of that bank in 1946.
Credit can function imperfectly as money, when it has been (improp-
erly) monetized under the law. For example the legal treatment of the
private Federal Reserve notes as money by accepting them for taxes and
making them a legal tender.
But these credits are only one form that money has taken, as rec-
ognized both in Del Mar's and in Knapp's definitions. Those who
argue that it is the only form of money, should realize that they are
actually defining “money” out of existence, and substituting “cred-
it” for it. Money and credit denote two different things. That's one
of the reasons we give them separate names.
A society such as the U.S., depending on private bank credits in
place of government-created money, is operating in moral quicksand. It
has established a special privilege of power for those private parties issu-
ing the credit - the bankers. As Prof. Soddy and others have shown, this
cannot help but do serious harm to the population as a whole.
It is contrary to the spirit of the U.S. Constitution, and, if one con-
siders that this monetary privilege amounts to the formation of an aris-
tocracy, it is also contrary to the letter of the Constitution (Art. I, Sect 9).
Such immorality leads to serious troubles. Properly constituted
government money, except when spent on warfare, tends to be used for
those things and items of infrastructure of concern to the state - the
broad interest of the citizens such as bridge and road and water infra-
structure; public health and education.
Private credit tends to go for fast profit, defined in its least productive
manner; for quickly getting back more than one gives, in terms of shuf-
fling paper instruments. As we have seen, monetizing credit - in partic-
ular private bank credit - can lead to such poor results that it even makes
the primitive practice of monetizing “precious metals” look good! And
in that regard, the “goldbugs” do have a point.
The apologists for banking privilege argue that the banking business
is open to all those who have enough money to satisfy the legal and
financial requirements. But that is a variation of the argument put for-
ward by John Law in the early 1700s, who remarked: “All may share in
the establishment of the bank through ownership of it.”
We discussed this in Chapter 12, and noted how much more appro-
priate and convenient, for all to benefit, if the bank of issue is a National
Bank, owned and operated by society. It's a mystery why otherwise
intelligent persons don't see that such a privilege would necessarily fall
into the hands of the already wealthy, unjustly enriching them, and fur-
ther aggravating the obscene concentration of wealth in America.
To say that this “business” is open to all, is also reminiscent of the
Roman “Ager Publicus,” the lands that were owned by the Roman state
in the 1st and 2nd centuries BC and were, in theory, available to be used
by all Roman citizens. But only the wealthy could take advantage of the
possibility, as discussed in Chapter 2.
Modern apologists also assert that bankers are generally of “high
moral character.” But why would moral people seek to gain an unfair
advantage over their fellow citizens, through a little understood legal
privilege, to engage in a process that necessarily robs from society and
historically gives little or nothing back to society? This is very different
from the kind of license a doctor obtains to practice medicine. For the
doctor must provide valuable services to his patients, for which he is
paid. Bankers, with the privilege to create money can pay themselves,
one way or another.
Some apologists assert that the modern profit margins of banking are
not unreasonably high, again missing the point. Instead of earning prof-
its from their operations, bankers would pTObably be willing to pay for
their banking privilege if necessary, because of the power it gives them; a
power that can always translate into riches.
More important than their “earnings” is the power they usurp: they
control the rationing of credit. If that credit has been improperly substi-
tuted for money, the bankers are more in control of the society than is the
legislature, executive, and judiciary, not to mention the citizens.
GOVERNMENTS RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE THE MONEY

We regard the provision of the money mechanism to society by gov-
ernment as a major advance over any prior barter or credit arrangements.
The author agrees with Knapp’s evaluation of this step: “The most
important achievement of economic civilization, the chartalism (using
tokens for money) of the means of payment.”
Private credit being used as money is conditional; it depends on the
ability of the issuer of the credit to stay solvent and to maintain an image
of solvency. It unfairly transfers wealth and power to a privileged few.
As long as we maintain our memory of the Greenbacks, the “money
is debt” position will be seen as false. For we know that they were not
debts, but money. We can understand why the bankers were so anxious
to remove the Greenbacks from circulation, where they provided a daily
practical lesson in “monetary theory.”
The effect of the “all money is debt” viewpoint is to eliminate the
real concept of money. That only serves the interests of bankers.
REFORMING THE FEDERAL RESERVE SYSTEM
Fortunately there is a monetary reform that can reach our goal for
the nation to control its own money system, and to end the monetary
privileges that the financial classes have grabbed. This is our best and
most direct course of action - the real thing. Reform can begin, even
without a complete and detailed blueprint of the ideal money system to
be ultimately reached as long as reform is consistent with the nature of
money, and considerations ofjustice play the major role.
That is not to say reform can proceed in a half-baked way with
under-developed knowledge. That could do more harm than no action at
all. Special care must be taken to avoid a program that leads to deflation,
as some past monetary reforms have. In chapter 15 we saw how Van
Buren and Jackson's well meaning anti-bank reforms adopting metallic
money resulted in the worst depression the country had seen. The not so
well meaning English reform after the Bullion Report, discussed in
chapter 11, also led to deflation and depression.
The American Monetary Institute's strategy for monetary reform is
to concentrate on three minimal reforms that place time on the side of
justice instead of against it as at present. Then other questions can be
resolved and refinements can be made over time without a crisis atmos-
phere. These minimal reforms should be agreeable to thoughtful, honest
observers; but on these three points there should be no compromise:
REFORM # 1: NATIONALIZATION OF THE FEDERAL RESERVE

Since issuing money is a proper function of government the first
essential point is for the government to regain direct control over the
nation's money system and become the sole issuer of money. How? At
the onset of the next (or the next) banking created crisis, instead of once
again bailing out the bankers and saving them from their latest malfea-
sance, our government, with sufficient political support, should nation-
alize the Federal Reserve System as England nationalized the Bank of
England in 1946.
This is not as far fetched as some people tell themselves. Several
past Chairmen of the House Banking Committee have introduced bills to
do away with the private Federal Reserve System, including Wright
Patman, and later Henry Gonzales, the chairman until 1994. But these pro-
posals did not receive any attention from the media, and little popular sup-
port was generated for them. That is what has to change.
Henry Gonzalez’ bill would have repealed the Federal Reserve Act,
but the American Monetary Institute prefers to keep the Fed intact, in
24a. Congressman
Henry Gonzales,
Chairman of the House
Banking and Currency
Committee until 1994,
regularly introduced
legislation to repeal the
Federal Reserve Act.
recognition of the extensive experience, know-how and administrative

procedures developed there over the past nine decades. For example,
their knowledge of the necessary seasonal variations needed in the
money supply. However, the Fed's role and mandate would change, as it
would be nationalized and function as part of the U.S. Treasury.
The process of reform starts with an understanding of money's
nature as a legal institution, not a commodity, or so-called economic
good. The legislation nationalizing the Federal Reserve System must
24b. Congressman Wright

Patman, Chairman of the
Banking and Currency
Committee from 1963 to
1975, did his best to alert
Americans to the dangers
of the Federal Reserve
System. Patman was also
the first to call for the
Watergate investigation,
repaying an old “debt” to
President Richard Nixon.
explicitly recognize that fact, with an accurate definition of money.

The process of building political support for nationalization of the
Fed could use market oriented actions such as boycotts. The selective
direction of pension fund assets and mutual fund investments could be
used as a means of both moving toward reform and alerting investors to
its necessity. For example, most banking shares and their satellite cor-
porations would be boycotted as part of a socially conscious investment
policy. The impact could be enormous.
An important project the American Monetary Institute is working
on, and seeking funding for, is the development and testing of guidelines
for socially responsible investing, using such monetary “filters.”
Socially conscious investment managers could then consult our grad-
ings. To keep abreast of our work on this, periodically check our web site
(http://www.monetary.org).
Short term, once in charge of the money system, the U.S. Treasury
could carefully start to use modern American Greenbacks - debt free
U.S. money - to break the current depression and near subsistence levels
so much of the population is still mired in, even as Wall Street had
soared. For example, debt-free money could be used to build and re-
build roads, bridges, water and sewer systems, and schools and air traf-
fic control systems called for by the American Society for Civil
Engineers. In addition, quality low-cost housing and the Internet free-

ways are worthy projects. New U.S. money could be used to clean the
environment and to assure that the Social Security and Medical pro-
grams continue to function and improve. Universal health care is also a
priority. Above all else, the general level of education - the reading and
thinking abilities - achieved by the typical American needs to be raised.
By careful trial and error, not just isolated theory (which has been
custom designed for bankers), the Treasury will determine about how
much money should be in circulation, and to what degree to base it on
population figures, industrial production, and other measures. The man-
agers would be aware of Ben Franklin's observation that it is better to err
on the side of a little too much money, rather than too little.
WHAT WOULD SUCH MONEY BE LIKE?
To see an example of this superior money form, the reader need only
check his or her pockets for quarters, nickels, dimes, pennies, or dollar
coins. The United States Government puts these coins into circulation
through the Treasury's mints. No interest is paid on them and they do not
add to the national debt.
Such copper-clad coinage could also be minted in much higher
denominations. But since paper is more convenient, cheaper, and now
harder to counterfeit, most U.S. money would take that form. In future
money may be in an electronic form, but the essential point is that only
our government should issue American money.
HOW DOES THE PLUTOCRACY RESPOND?
Those holding the money power have promoted a two century smear
campaign against government to raise the fear of inflation under such a
system, even though the evidence clearly shows greater monetary abuse
by privately controlled money systems than by government ones. That's
why economists are steered away from the study of history.
In this smear campaign they still advertise the 600-700 year old
cases of monarchs “debasing” their coinage, but never give the context
that this kingly abuse occurred after the collapse of monetary order with
the fall of Byzantium in 1204 AD. They don't mention that much of the
alteration in coinage was an accepted form of taxation, or that Republics
generally fared much better monetarily than monarchies. Nor do they
discuss the much greater monetary problems caused by private bankers
during these times (all discussed in Chapters 4 to 8).
In more recent times, during warfare, the money power acquiesced
in government issued money to assure their own survival, as in the
Revolution and the Civil War. Or when allowed to get away with it, as
in WWI and WWII, they issued the money in large quantities them-
selves. They knew the resulting production would be blown up, sunk or
be useless and not become new consumer goods or production facilities
or improved infrastructure, which would have lowered prices, benefitted
the populace, and made the people more independent of the bankers.
Warfare thus became associated with “getting the economy mov-
ing.” But it wasn't the warfare; it was the accompanying monetary and
production activity that did it.
We haven't seen modern cases in the English speaking world where
such high levels of money creation were directed into real production,
and not specifically destined for destruction. Partial exceptions are the
limited efforts undertaken by Roosevelt after the Great Depression,
which gave us projects like Hoover Dam, and the water and sewer sys-
tems still used in our upstate New York area. Another exception was
NASA's all-out effort to reach the moon, which fostered much of our
modern miniaturized computerization.
In short, the Plutocracy's inflation theme is “the big lie.”
TOWARD A FOURTH BRANCH OF GOVERNMENT
Longer term, it will become recognized that the monetary power
is stronger and more pervasive than the three other branches of gov-
ernment. In keeping with its actual power and importance in the
daily lives of the citizenry, the monetary department should evolve
into a fourth branch of government. In fact that's what it is now, but
it's run mostly for private gain instead of the common good.
This fourth branch would refine and codify its protocols in ever-
increasing accuracy, starting from the point of considerable technical
knowledge and expertise already embodied in the Federal Reserve appa-
ratus. The overall objective, however, would be changed. Instead of
managing the money system to further enrich the leisure class, helping
them create and rule their “New World Order,” the goal would be to
“promote the general welfare,” an explicit objective of our Constitution.
And yes, a new order of the world would evolve out of this, but not the
slave system we are presently headed for.
NEARLY ALL CITIZENS WOULD GAIN
Those who want smaller government would be happy to see that it
could shrink, since so many of its present day activities, started to coun-
teract the inequitable effects of an unjust money and banking system,
would no longer be needed. Those who want more government controls
would be happy to see the need for such controls disappear as the type
of corporate predators now in charge would find most of their funding
and power cut off. Those who want to abuse government for their own
private gain would find it much harder to do that.
AND THE LOSERS WOULD BE...?
Those presently benefitting from special monetary privileges would
find those benefits ended; but even for the majority of them the improve-
ments in the quality and security of life and the release of new creative
and industrial energy resulting from a fair money system would likely
outweigh any loss.
Only that tiny fraction of a percent at the very top would be big los-
ers; but considering what they have been doing, shouldn't they be happy
to escape with their lives - if they can?
There's one more group of losers: the type of ideologues who value
so-called free markets above life itself - other people's lives, that is.
These apologists, largely economists, devote careers to justifying the
worst predations upon mankind. In their hands those economic theories
are used as bludgeons to beat down their most vulnerable fellow men.
THE FACE OF EVIL
Most would agree that, where evil is being purposely done under
cover of economic theory, it should be clearly identified and thereby
destroyed. Some economists will scoff at being characterized as evil for
merely making deductions from their beloved theoretical premises that
they place their faith in, for merely acting as good priests of their hal-
lowed market god.
But they truly serve an evil deity and the fruits of their theories grow
monotonously bitter. The hallmark of those intent on doing harm is their
ever readiness to take current benefits from the common man, promising
him instead some imaginary heaven in the long term, to be made possi-
ble by the intercessions of their god, Hand, the Invisible.
Somehow their theories always manage to reserve the current bene-
fits for wealthy predators, parasites really, who in the main part fund
their salaries. At present, society is in trouble to the extent that these
“econo-myths” dogmas are being followed. Their prescription? - yet
more “free market discipline”- their brand of free trade theories dictate that
American workers must compete with underpaid workers in countries
where labor has minimal rights and where environmental concerns are
ignored; with what is in effect a form of slave labor. This props up foreign
tyrannies and supports the investments of the economists' patrons.

Of course not all economists are evil. Many moral economists are
just afraid of losing their jobs, or have fallen into a rut of mental obedi-
ence. But it's long overdue for those able to think clearly to become
much more vocal, and not just between themselves but with the public
in clearly understandable language. Galileo had to be severely threatened
- he was led through the Vatican's torture rooms and shown some of their
devices - before he mouthed the “party line.” But economists appear
almost anxious to kneel and serve comipt power. Time to stand up, boys!
REFORM # 2: ENDING FRACTIONAL RESERVE BANKING
AND INSTITUTING THE 100% RESERVE SOLUTION
The reform process will soon arrive at requiring banks to hold 1000/a
reserves for money that they lend. To phrase this more universally, banks
can lend what has been deposited with them, but would not be allowed
to create money, beyond some minor specified amounts. Private money
creation has been the source of the bankers' power. It has also been the
source of the periodic crashes of the system.
Most economists, even good ones, will panic at this proposal
because their mindset can't conceive of the banks as servants rather than
masters. But far better methods can quickly be found to introduce new
money into the system and properly direct it toward real production
and improvement of values for living, methods far more effective than
private banking has been.
Banking panics occur because banks have the privilege to create
money in the form of bank credits on their books. The banking system's
reserves of actual money are often only one tenth (or less) of these bank
credits. They used to do this in the 19th century by printing about ten
times the number of banknotes as the coinage they held. Now since the
Federal Reserve notes are money the way the coinage used to be, they
do it, system wide, by creating new credits on their books to a multiple
of the amount of paper money and old credits they have received.
The banking system pretends that these bank credits are equivalent
to money, but they are not. For they depend on the Bank's image and
ability to stay liquid and pay its depositors; whereas paper money in
hand is more secure. In the words of Robert de Fremery:
“This essentially fraudulent practice multiplies bank deposits that
exist only as book entries...but making this unsound practice legal does-
n't prevent the public from periodically losing confidence and asking for
its money. The result is panic and depression. 9
AVOIDING BANKING SYSTEM PANICS AND COLLAPSES

But how can we restructure our present unstable banking system in
which banks do create money? The Austrian School of Economics for
decades has been mis-educating Americans that any credit expansion
must be followed by a crash, and many American conservatives and
Libertarians now believe this. For example, Ludwig Von Mises writes:
“There is no means of avoiding the final collapse of a boom brought
about by credit expansion. The alternative is only whether the crisis
should come sooner as the result of a voluntary abandonment of further
credit expansion, or later as a final and total catastrophe of the currency
system involved.”10
This fatalist doctrine is being spread in America, setting people on
the wrong course regarding how to react in their personal investments
and in the determination of banking policy. It's based on what we may
justly refer to, after 23 chapters of demonstration, as the “childish” view
that money is a commodity or “economic good.” If the Austrian School
understood the nature of money as a social/legal invention of mankind,
they'd have to abandon their conclusion that catastrophe is inevitable.
De Fremery points out that:
“A more plausible theory is that all economic activity is continually
reaching a new equilibrium between the total circulating medium of
exchange and the goods and services offered for it. In other words, an
expansion of bank credit leads to a collapse not [only] because of mis-
directions in production but rather because of the operation of
Gresham's law. The use of bank credit as a medium of exchange gives
us what Bishop Berkeley called a ‘double money.’...”
The reason for the collapse then is the preference for the cash money
as opposed to the bankers’ credit money, resulting in runs on the banking
establishment to draw out cash.
“According to this theory, it is possible to avoid a collapse follow-
ing a period of credit expansion simply by converting the existing
volume of bank credit into actual money having an existence independent
of the debt, and at the same time take away the banking system’s
privilege of creating any more credit, i.e., force banks to confine their
lending operations to the lending of existing funds.””
Those who hold a commodity view of money can't accept this possi-
bility because neither gold nor economic goods can be brought into exis-
tence out of thin air, to change the bank credit into their idea of real money.
When one understands the nature of money as an abstract legal
power, it clearly becomes possible for the government to create and sub-
stitute such trusted real money for the already existing, suspect bank
credit. Thus we are not held hostage to preserving the existing flawed
banking system, or to risk bringing down the whole structure.
WOULD IT HAVE WORKED IN 1929-32?
Could this “100% Reserve Solution” have prevented the Great
Depression? Could the situation be rescued even after years of misman-
agement by the bankers, and after the panic set in? The answer to these
questions is “yes.” The “100% Reserve Solution” has some marvelous,
almost magical effects. It is a way to get to 100% reserves without dis-
rupting the banking system, or calling in loans and creating a financial
disaster. It is done by increasing the reserves held by banks.
SODDY AND SIMONS DEVELOP THE 100% RESERVE SOLUTION
Under this plan the banks are required to establish 100% reserve
backing for their deposits, in this unique way.
The U.S. Treasury would loan freshly created U.S. paper currency to
banks to bring their cash reserves up to 100%. The banks would pay inter-
est to the U.S. on these loans. If the Fed had not yet been nationalized,
then Federal Reserve Banks would also borrow from the treasury suffi-
cient new currency to bring their cash reserves up to 100% of their
24c. Frederick Soddy

was Lee Professor of
Chemistry at Oxford. In
1921 he received the
Nobel Prize in chemistry
and laid the groundwork
for the “big bang” theo-
ry in cosmology. He also
brought great clarity of
thought to the problem
of banking panics and
invented the “100%
Reserve Solution.” This
is emphatically not the
same as merely requiring
100% reserves, presently
being advocated by some
misguided monetary
reformers.
demand deposits (funds deposited by their member banks for safekeep-

ing plus all government funds against which checks are being drawn by
the government). The amount ofU.S. securities (T bills and T bonds) held
by the Federal Reserve and other banks would be credited against these
borrowings, canceling an equal amount.
Thus the 100% Reserve Solution is totally different from just requir-
ing banks to keep 100% reserves, which would cause a disastrous defia-
tion, and a repudiation of all monetary and banking reform.
But with this elegant plan, all the bank credit money the banks have
created out of thin air, through fractional reserve banking, would be
transformed into U.S. government legal tender - real, honest money. All
of the prior U.S. debt extended in the old bank created money (banking
credits) would be canceled out by the banks' new borrowings from the
U.S. The approximately $600 billion of U.S. bonds held by the banking
system (in 1999) would go out of existence, lowering the U.S. national
debt by that amount.
The banks would be panic proof, having by definition enough cash
to pay all claims, without requiring a financial calamity through repudi-
ation and contraction. The reform would not fix cases where banks and
borrowers engaged in extraordinarily foolish loans, but the resulting
bankruptcies from them need not destroy the whole system.
The concept behind the 100% Reserve Solution was discovered by
Nobel Laureate in Chemistry Frederick Soddy in 1926. During the Great
Depression, Henry C. Simons was a professor at the University of
Chicago, my alma mater. Simons independently rediscovered the 100%
principle in 1933, and proposed it as the way to end the depression and
prevent future banking panics.'2
In July 1939, the plan was endorsed and put forward in a pamphlet
by Paul H. Douglas (University of Chicago), Irving Fisher (Yale), Frank
D. Graham (Princeton), Earl J. Hamilton (Duke), Wilford I. King
(NYU), and Charles R. Whittlesey (Princeton). It was circulated to most
members of the American Economic Association involved in monetary or
banking matters. Hundreds of economists, mostly professors, signed on
to the plan. Robert De Fremery gave the AMI a rare copy of the pro-
posal, including a list of those good economists. The Federal Reserve
System was aware of the plan but did not even acknowledge it!
100% RESERVE SOLUTION NEED NOT BE DEFLATIONARY
This reform would be neither inflationary nor deflationary, because it
would simply make real what had been thought to be the existing monetary
levels. From that point, it is crucial that alternatives to bank created cred-
it be used to make necessary increases in the money supply.
For example, newly created money could be spent into circulation
by government paying for social security and universal medlcal cover-
age for the nation. Or it could be loaned into circulatlon in interest free
loans from the federal government to local governmental bodies (from
school boards to states) to be used only for infrastructure construction and
repair. This would cut the cost of all such infrastructure in half.
These and other sound alternatives are available now. More can be
developed through careful thought, and even more careful trial and error.
For banking institutions to continue making new loans they simply
would have to attract such new money from depositors or investors.
CONGRESSMAN VOORHIS PROMOTED THE 100% RESERVE PLAN
Into the 1940s, California Congressman Jerry Voorhis advocated the
100% Reserve Plan. Then the bankers' lobby financed Richard Nixon's
first congressional campaign against him. Nixon ran a dirty campaign,
smearing Voorhis as a communist, and got elected. Voorhis learned from
one of his neighbors, who was Nixon's campaign manager, that the
American Bankers Association had financed Nixon.
“IKE” WAYLAYS THE PATMAN PROBE
Voorhis then worked with House Banking Committee Chairman
Wright Patman in 1956 on the “Patman Probe,” which was to formally
examine the results of the Federal Reserve System, on a scale like
Aldrich's Monetary Commission of 1908-12. As the bill to create the
Patman Probe was being passed in the House of Representatives, the
bankers' lobby pulled 31 congressmen from the floor of the House and
told them to change their votes or face defeat in the next election. The
lobbyists later went to President Eisenhower to head off the probe. “Ike”
told them not to worry - he'd set up a “blue ribbon” group of bankers to
“study” it. Thus meaningful monetary reform has not been on the polit-
ical horizon for over a generation in America.13
DE FREMERY KEPT THE 100% RESERVE SOLUTION AI.IVE
The work of Robert de Fremery (1916-2000) has kept the concept of
the 100% Reserve Solution alive today. For decades he wrote articles
and corresponded with economists on the necessity of banks to maintain
100% reserves. His two books, Money and Freedom (1955) and Rights
vs. Privileges (1992) have clearly explained why:
“Is it not obvious that there are serious defects in our banking sys-
tern and our tax system that deprive most of us of fundamental rights and
bestow enormous privileges on others?.. .How many riots must we
endure? How many prisons must we build? How many of our rights
must we lose? How many of our young people must be sent away to
fight in foreign wars before we decide that enough is enough?”l4
DeFremery believed that monetary reform had to be combined with
changes in the taxation system along the lines proposed by the 19th cen-
tury land reformer Henry George, and known as the “single tax,” in
which the full rental value of unimproved land goes directly to society
as taxation. It's a concept originated by the French Physiocrats (they
called it the “impot unique”) and the idea deserves more attention than
it is presently given. Father of the Revolution Thomas Paine held a
similar viewpoint toward land. See de Fremery's Rights vs Privileges.
De Fremery thought that unless land reform accompanied monetary
reform, the concentration of wealth and power spawned in either area
would soon re-establish a system of comipt privilege in the other area. In
the author's view, implementing our three major reform points will create
a climate of reform where other matters can be scrutinized and acted on.
REFORM #3: INSTITUTE ANTI - DEFLATION PROGRAMS
AND BEWARE OF DEFLATION
To proceed merely on the basis of restricting the bankers’ creation of
money is to invite deflation, depression and repudiation of the reforms.
This is a real danger since financial elements that would benefit from
defiation would promote reforms with such “unintended” consequences.
For three decades the fear of inflation has been drilled into the American
mind and the political climate is still vulnerable to an over reaction to
inflation phobia. Thus Fed Chairman Greenspan was praised for raising
interest rates 11 times in the late 1990s in fear of an imaginary inflation!
Therefore limitations on the bankers’ power to create money
must not only be accompanied by clearly defined powers for the
government to take their place, but also specific programs requiring
money creation, for example to re-build infrastructure throughout
the land in a major way. Paying for Social Security and a national
health care system through government money creation would also
serve to avert a deflation.
Are we advocating inflation? Certainly not. We like Henry George's
answer on whether he'd support the government issuing money too freely:
“(‘ecclesiastical expletive!’) I am a Greenbacker, but I am not a fool.”'5
24d.
Henry George school of
THE USURY PROBLEM REMAINS

Chapters 7 and 13 showed the problems of usury and interest are far
from settled. Whipple's calculation (see p. 346) demonstrated the impos-
sibility of long term interest, even at moderate rates, even where the
lender did not create the money, but loaned money he already owned.
While it's outside the scope of this book to resolve all elements of
this complex question, nationalizing the money creation process is a pre-
condition to solving the usury problem and its wealth concentration
effect. Continuing historical research and logical documentation would be
helpful. For example applying serious computer models to this question
could provide valuable information on how quickly usury concentrates
wealth to insupportable, society busting levels.
Some steps could be taken immediately: nationalize money creation
in government hands, where it can be created debt free, or at least inter-
est free as described above. There should be an immediate national legal
limit of 8% annual interest, including credit cards, with no offshore
loopholes. No interest should be paid on checking accounts. Cumulative
interest should never be allowed to exceed the amount loaned. Some of
these restrictions were in effect in the early 1980s, before the mad paper
chase took over our economy in its present form.
Regarding the international debt problem, Pope John Paul II, is
the best economist. His call for a “Jubilee” to forgive much of the
debt - to write it off - makes much more sense than most of them do.
FINANCIERS WILL TRY TO SABOTAGE REFORM
Once meaningful monetary reforms are underway in America, we
shouldn't be surprised if bankers and financiers attempt to derail the
reforms through economic disruptions, including bringing the economy to
a halt. They might spark foreign and domestic crises and violence.
Therefore the reforms must make substantial provision for this by cre-
atively giving such types enough other things to worry about so that they
have little time to attack the reforms. This shouldn't be too difficult, con-
sidering that reform would most likely proceed after another orgy of
banking induced disasters, rife with felonious activity.
Readers who feel the author has been too harsh on the bankers
should remember that even Jesus Christ felt compelled to use violence
against them, and them alone.
DON'T ALLOW ECONOMISTS TO DIRECT MONETARY REFORM
Monetary reform must not be left in the hands of economists. Such
reform is a legal, moral and political matter more than an economic one.
Economists have no training in those areas and generally disdain such
matters. Their indoctrination leads them to erroneously assume that the
market process best resolves such questions.
In Chapter 12 we likened the political economists to a Temple priest-
hood, trained to uphold the Temple ways. They have endured so much
mental pressure in their formative years in order to obtain their PHD seal
of approval from their predecessors that it's not realistic to expect or
count on them to break free of such thought patterns.
What role should economists play? Where exceptional individuals
have achieved an independence of mind, they can best contribute to the
reform process by evaluating technical matters connected with reform,
not the legal, moral or political questions regarding the main structures
reform should take. They can thus neutralize the destructive economists.
OBSTACLES TO MONETARY REFORM
The four main obstacles we must overcome are:
1. The banking and media establishments
The financial power of the bankers, related financiers, and their
lobbying power in the U.S. Congress is a formidable obstacle. The

dependence and interlocking of the banks with the major media and uni-
versities means that except for accidents, the message for meaningful
monetary reform will not likely reach the citizenry through major tele-
vision and radio stations, major newspapers and magazines, or
Hollywood films. Thus this book was first printed in German, by a Swiss
publisher.
Enacting meaningful reform in America will require using alternative
methods of communication. It's critical to develop strong person-to-per-
son relations on a grass roots level, that can be expanded to larger and
larger groups. Another key will be to educate and gain the support of
existing groups - to interest them in monetary reform. Documentary film
makers able to work closely with monetary researchers also need to be
attracted to the cause of monetary reform.
2. Poor monetary and economic thought
Much inane monetary thinking arises from the Austrian School of
Economics, which has more influence in America than in Europe, thanks
to its hold on American Libertarians. The monetary positions of this
school are weak right from its founder Carl Menger's theory of the ori-
gin of money. Their main monetary tract was written in 1912 by Ludwig
Von Mises at only age 31. Yet re-printings have almost no changes,
despite the momentous monetary events that occurred since then! This
reveals a kind of arrogance to beware of. Von Mises’ rarely read book
has many contradictions and bold unsupported assertions on its key
monetary positions, for example his assertion that:
“The concept of money as a creature of law and the State is clearly
untenable. It is not justified by a single phenomenon of the market. ’6
Why? No answer. That single statement brands him as either dis-
honest or foolish. It is clear from history that money is a creature of the
law and the state. We have documented case histories that prove him
wrong, in many of our chapters.
The Austrian School - “A leap backward”
The method of Von Mises and the Austrians is either a form of
shouting as in the above example, or it is theoretical, a'priori reasoning.
This use of deduction rather than observation, and their tendency to
ignore the scientific method, caused the Austrian School to be labeled “a
leap backwards” in economic thought by Edward C. Harwood, founder
of the American Institute for Economic Research (AIER) in Great
Barrington, Massachusetts:
“Dr. Von Mises denies not once but several times that his theories can
ever be disproved by facts. This point of view represents a leap backward
to Platonic Idealism or one of its offspring in various disguises. 17
The ongoing work of the AIER should not discard Harwood's acute
observations on this matter.C
It should be mentioned that among the Austrian economists, the
author truly admires Professor Murray Rothbard's clear and unequivocal
condemnation of fractional reserve banking as a “Ponzi scheme.” Von
Mises criticized it less forcefully; but most Austrians support it in the
name of free markets. Rothbard understood that free markets stop where
fraud and privilege begin.
We don't mean to only single out the Austrians. Similar charges
apply to other “schools” as well. As a “science,” economics is very ill.
3. Ayn Rand and the Libertarian free market theology
The anti-governmental aspect of most economists is the problem,
and ultimately their main thrust. For decades in America, as part of a free
market theology, they have attacked the one organizational form with the
potential to stand up against the Plutocracy on behalf of the people - our
government. The Libertarians didn't invent this idea. Adam Smith orig-
inated its present form, largely for the purpose of keeping the money power in
private hands, as seen in Chapter 12. The Libertarians are merely the
latest group to be captured by this ideology and to be convinced that they
represent something new, rather than an old plutocratic viewpoint.
Their idol, Ayn Rand, the 20th Century's greatest proponent of cap-
italism, was actually born in Russia as Alissa Rosenbaum. She renamed
herself after the brand name of her typewriter. Rand was so partial to
deductive reasoning as to be easily taken in by the conservative economic
line. Her monetary error of regarding money as a commodity, particu-
larly gold, is evident in the cocktail party speech by the colorful (and
your author's favorite of her characters) Francisco D'Anconia in her
novel Atlas Shrugged.1'
While it's only a novel, many of her followers treat it more like a
textbook or the “Gospel” and distribute an excerpt of that speech on
money. Her works transmitted this falsehood to the Libertarian political
party, which formed among her readers (without her blessing). But nov-
els are a medium that neither demands proof nor exposes the author to
C The author served as a Trustee and Executive Committee member of the American
Institute for Economic Research (AIER) in 1976, in a successful effort to help the
Institute resolve its problems with the Securities & Exchange Commlssion.)
serious scrutiny or dispute by those with real knowledge in the fleld.

Answering critics who said people like Ayn Rand's heroic characters
don't really exist, she replied that the proof of their existence was her
novels. That answer raised the initial red warning flag regarding method-
ological problems in her thinking.
One problem with merely applying reason and logic to complex life
situations is that no matter how precise one's logic is, if it is applied to
poorly defined concepts, the result will be tenuous at best. For example,
applying good logic, while utilizing a faulty definition of money will
produce a confused result where the outcome will be determined by the
dominant media of the dominant financial group: i.e. by power. That out-
come will support the existing financial order. That has unfortunately
been Ayn Rand's legacy. Her protégé, Alan Greenspan, has been chair-
man of the Federal Reserve since 1987.
Nietzsche provided Rand's power
Your author had read all of Ayn Rand before reading Nietzsche; but
after reading him, it was clear that what was powerful and of value in
Rand had its source in Nietzsche. Her mentioning him only once (and in
a somewhat negative way) was not a sufficient acknowledgment of the
great debt that she owed him. Ayn Rand took the powerful fern provid-
ed by Nietzsche, and filled it with the inane content of Adam Smith. In
part she turned Nietzsche's idea of the Superman (mans potential for
continuing heroic development) into a type of shopkeeper's mentality.
But contrary to Rand, Friedrich Nietzsche's advice to his better
people was to: “Get thee from the market place!”
The anti-social nature of current thinking
Rand's very strength of mind and egoism also led to errors in her
view of society. It is wonderfiil to have a confidence and certainty of
mind. The problem arises when the personality insists it can exhibit this
certainty in areas about which it is not sufficiently informed. This type of
personality is highly vulnerable to flattery and often demands adulation or
obedience, well known features of her personal makeup.
By over-accentuating man's faculty of deductive reasoning, she
consequently devalued the importance of his experience and of society.
For reason is normally an individual process and experience almost
always takes place within a social context. In her refreshing glorification
of the individual, Rand unnecessarily stretched it too far and down-
played that even reason takes place within the concepts and ideas of our
predecessors, relayed to us through society. For example, Newton said
that he saw so far because he was “standing on the shoulders of giants.”

That process only occurs in a social context, where knowledge can
be recorded and passed down. In any case, mankind only exists within
societies. Nowhere does man exist just as an individual. Ayn Rand did-
n't deny this, but the Libertarians are still struggling with the real-world
implications of that fact.
The facts call for an attitude adjustment
To effect meaningful reform, a change in attitude is needed, to rec-
ognize the proper relation of the individual to society. No doubt some
readers wince at the thought of instituting the monetary power in our
government. The reason is thatfor over two centuries, a poisoning ofour
attitude toward government has been underway. The stealthy promo-
tion of this self-destructive childishness must stop.
Significantly, such anti-government propaganda was intimately con-
nected with monetary proposals. As described in earlier chapters, your
author found it first in Adam Smith's 1776 book and later in cruder
attempts like Walter Bagehot's 1869 proposal for a union of American
and British currencies. Even crackpots like Oxford's Bonamy Price were
sent on tour to attack our government and befuddle American minds.
The great social/governmental/political task of our time is to define
the proper evolving relationship of man to society as a whole, and the
responsibilities and rights that individuals must have to live as men and
function optimally. This moral system needs to be specified optimally,
not just in terms of society, but ultimately in terms of humanity.
The jealous and vengeful thunder God of the Old Testament is not
capable of supplying any such morality for the modern world, and the
gentle teachings of Jesus have proved much too easy to comipt by those
only seeking advantage. One approach would be to isolate the best ele-
ments of various traditions and leave behind the trash, to separate the
wheat from the chaff.
But instead of helping to shape and define that relationship, Ayn
Rand's delinquent children - the Libertarians - are acting like spoiled
brats, with some of their leaders going so far as to assert there's no need
for any government.19 The kind of personal freedom being advocated
has a hollowness to it reminiscent of the “freedoms” that the oriental
cults promoted as they swept into Rome from the 3rd century BC, dis-
cussed in Chapter 2. It appears to be having a similar effect to that
described by James Frazer in The Golden Bough:
“The (result) was to withdraw the devotee more and more from the
public service.. .displacing the old ideal of the patriot and the hero who,
forgetful of self, lives and is ready to die for the good of his country. ..A
general disintegration of the body politic set in.. .the structure of society
tended to resolve itself into its individual elements and thereby to relapse
into barbarism, for civilization is only possible through the active co-
operation of the citizens and their willingness to subordinate their pri-
vate interests to the common good. 20
Similarly, while the Libertarian ideology gets people focused on the
individual, then certain already existing financial and religious organi-
zational structures can dominate by default.
The Libertarians cast off the jealous thunder God of the Old
Testament, and ignored Jesus and Mohammed. But they got suckered
into accepting the existence of ghosts created by those whose purpose it
was to monetarily rule societies. Their ghosts go under the name of
“invisible hands” supposedly exerted by the market.
As described by his High Priest Adam Smith, “Hand the Invisible”
promises that so long as society bows to neo-feudal elements in control
of the money system, Hand will appropriately distribute the economy's
rewards and punishments. To Adam Smith and the modem laissez-faire
advocates, the “Market” thus displays omniscience, omnipotence, and
benign goodness, the three essential attributes of a Deity.21
They pretend the “market” offers a valid, workable “morality” for
the guidance of society. But only people who have not seen the inner work-
ings of markets would entertain such a foolish idea. In effect they have sim-
ply done away with morality and consciously substituted “the bottom line.”
This is much more than an accounting problem. It is deeply embedded in
the so-called science of economics.
For in reality the only invisible hand is the one picking everyone's
pocket and transferring the contents to those abusing the monetary and
economic system! It's long past time to reform them out of existence, but
it's not too late.
4. Dangers to civil liberty from the “War on terrorism”
A precondition for monetary reform is that we keep our political
freedoms intact. Unfortunately, the destruction of the World Trade
Center in a context of Christian, Jewish and Moslem “fundamentalism”
has placed our Constitutional Republic and Bill of Rights in more
jeopardy than at any time since WWII.
Watching what we venerated as a magnificent permanence in New
York's skyline collapse into rubble was a traumatic experience. In the
aftermath, necessity called upon us to vigorously defend ourselves and

to honestly examine, and correct where possible, the root causes of the
trouble. Understandably the defense came first. Now it is time to do the
evaluations and to rationalize our Middle Eastern policy.
Fundamentalist elements in Israel, America and the Moslem world
want this crisis to degenerate into a war of the West vs. Islam. Thanks to
our nuclear arsenal, the West would “win” such a war. Hundreds of mil-
lions of Moslems would die. But America would also be destroyed in the
process, and not just from the millions dying in unstoppable biological
attacks, and the occasional nuclear briefcase, from whatever source, that
slipped through.
Consider how quickly our Constitutional Republic would perma-
nently be changed into a type of police state in futile attempts to stop
“terrorism.” We'd still have Mickey Mouse and Donald Duck, and
President Whomever, but our cherished rights, for which our forefathers
fought and died, would be gone forever. The protection of those rights for
ourselves and our posterity, not Middle-Eastern land politics, must be our
paramount concern.
Even as they took military steps to eradicate organized fundamental-
ist networks committed to terroristic activity against the U.S., President
Bush and Secretary of State Powell also announced their intent to support
formation of a Palestinian state, and to end the decades of occupation of
Palestine by Israel. These were courageous moves in the right direction.
Then the Enron Corporation collapsed in scandal, with the potential
(depending on media coverage) to destroy the present Administration.
Bush and Powell's initiative quickly faded with the next reprisal attack on
Israel, in its back and forth dance of death with the Palestinians.
Since it is generally “forbidden” in the American media for non-Jews to
criticize Israel, history and events have thus combined to place a special
responsibility upon Jewish Americans to promote a reasonable American
policy in the Middle East. While that requires much courage, we hope sig-
nificant numbers can rise to the challenge, as did soldiers in Israel's army who
refused to serve in the occupied territories. Like it or not, American Jews may
have been dealt a difficult but conspicuous and decisive hand to play.
However, time grows short, and if Jewish Americans don't move deci-
sively on this question, then reasonable people will have to demand it.
WHAT CAN BE DONE NOW?
Assuming that we are not sliding down a slippery slope into despotism, if
we are to succeed with monetary reform it will require that a lot more
Americans understand both the historical background and the essentials

needed for a just money system. Only in that way will political action be
directed toward intelligent goals. That's the purpose of this book and
hopefully you are motivated to act and to learn more. Please read it again,
and encourage others to obtain a copy, as that will help support AMI’s con-
tinuing research. If you have questions, email us at: ami@taconic.net or
write us at P.O. Box 601, Valatie, NY, 12184, and the American Monetary
Institute will address the questions.
The measures needed for reform must be accurately and simply dis-
tilled into the form of proposed non-partisan legislation as a focal point
for political action. This will require the assistance of trained legal and
political minds, and as progress is made it will be posted at AMI’s web
site (http://www.monetary.org).
Democratic, Republican and Independent sponsors must be found
and motivated to introduce such legislation. Widespread political sup-
pon is possible because of the highly positive effects a just money sys-
tem would have on almost everyone - what could become “The Next Big
Thing.” The millions of Americans presently working for social justice
and environmental concerns are natural supporters of such legislation, as
well as researchers and teachers. Americans concerned with our eroding
rights and freedoms at the hands of growing plutocracy are also natural
supporters; for we would reinstate one function to government - the
money power - and be able to start removing hundreds of functions,
made unnecessary by this reform.
We have no illusions about the difficulty involved in wresting away a
power that special interests have held entrenched for more than a century.
But neither are we pessimistic. The reform becomes politically achievable
each time the financiers run the world's economies into the wall. If at
such a time, the legislation is among the bills introduced in Congress,
and solid, thoughtful public support exists for it, it has a chance.
This underlines the importance of not compromising the legislation in
order to make it palatable to special interests. Their view won't matter, at
its most likely time for passage. No one will care what the Fed or the
economists who supported their system have to say at that point.
THE NEXT BIG THING?
The exciting advances in Internet technologies and in the biomedical
fields (and soon in nano-technology), have spurred the question,
“What's the next big thing”? Usually the motive of the question is to
identify some investment opportunity. But what might be the next big
thing transcends such personal considerations. The reader will see that, by
using the monetary concepts presented here, society has far more power to
solve its long and short range problems than the prevailing attitudes
toward government would indicate. In fact it's now possible to go beyond
mere problem solving and into the beginnings of “utopia” creation.
As long as there are unused resources available, such as unemployed
and under-employed people, or unused plant and equipment and natural
resources, and there are needs to be filled, society has the monetary
power to employ those factors without resorting to taxation or borrow-
ing. Since we have seen that private banks can't or won't do it, the
money to finance such development can be carefully created by govern-
ment within specific constitutional guidelines. The availability of the
new goods and services produced means that inflation need not result.
The new wealth and economic activity and connected taxes generated
are great bonuses from such productive efforts.
Some short-sighted economists will crow that “there is no free
lunch,” and think they have knocked down these concepts (but if there's
no free lunch, then why haven't these fellows starved to death long ago?)
What they really seem to hate is watching society accomplish good
things and solve problems. They want to limit such decisions and activ-
ity only to corporations, and the elites that rule them. That means the
kind of problems that only society can solve will grow until they lead to
warfare.
The real sources of the productivity are the work and thought and
tools and natural resources, and our inherited knowledge and experi-
ence, all existing within a supportive social and legal framework. Money
is just the indispensable lubricant that facilitates their employment. If
there are not sufficient numbers of skilled people, society can direct its
monetary power to improving our educational system and funding new
schools of all types. People might also better understand the negative
role the media has been exercising in generally glorifying or playing to
ignorance and promoting drug use. They might question whether that is
accidental, really just for the sake of profit, or much worse.
Other purposes to which the monetary power can lend a hand are
obvious: medical research to remove the scourge of cancer and other dis-
eases; automotive research to double or quadruple the efficiency of auto-
mobiles; or develop better, pollution free technologies. Energy and
waste management research will allow us to stop fouling our planet. And
yes, a missile defense shield, and other programs that keep our defenses
strong in the present dangerous world. To reduce those dangers, it

wouldn't hurt if we would increase our efforts to help and teach other
peoples how to raise themselves out of poverty.
Readers now know that “we can't afford it” is just an excuse.
We already have the knowledge and productive capability to at least
begin the creation of a near utopian existence on earth. What stands in
the way are mainly pernicious monetary, banking, and some “religious”
attitudes. Hopefully this book has provided enough of the monetary
background and solutions to help start us moving toward a brighter
future.
Stephen A. Zarlenga
Oak Street Beach, Chicago,
Labor Day, 2002.
Epilogue
If you are interested in these monetary themes on either a theoreti-
cal or practical level, you are invited to keep in touch with the Institute,
and if possible to become a sustaining member (see overleaf). We'll
keep all informed of developments with regular updates through e mail,
and regular mail for those not online.
No one knows just how the future will unfold, but we know that
monetary reform is crucially needed in America, and as long as we are
able to take meaningful steps to that end, we will. Our primary contri-
bution will continue to be in the area of monetary research and educa-
tion. We also have a responsibility to help implement the ideas discov-
ered there. That is fully consistent with our charter, and with the politi-
cal action limitations that 501(c)3 rules place on charitable trusts. Our
stated mission is “to advance the independent study of monetary histo-
ry, theory and reform, and to present the results in a way that’s under-
standable by the average citizen, so that it can lead to monetary reforms
that assure a greater level of economic justice in society and a more effi-
cient and equitable functioning of government.”
686
Notes to Chapter 24
' Alexander Del Mar, History of Monetary Systems, (repr., New York: A.M.
Kelley, 1969), p. 467.
2 Natl. Conf. of Catholic Bishop’s Pastoral Letter, Economic Justice for All, 1995.
3 A year 2,000 estimate by a Chicago Federal Reserve Bank economist. Earlier
figures of a $300 billion loss were reduced as many properties became salable.
4
Alexander Del Mar, Money in Ancient Countries, (London: Bell, 1885), p. 2
5 Max Weber, The Protestant Ethic and the Spirit of Capitalism, transl. Parsons,
(New York: Scribners, 1958), p. 182.

6
See Stephen Zarlenga, Henry George’s Concept of Money, Schalkenbach
Foundation, quoting Henry George's Social Problems, p. 168.
7 Robert de Fremery, Rights vs Privileges, (Provocative Press, 1992), pp. 54-5.
Frederick Soddy, Money Versus Man, (New York: Dutton, 1933, pp. 32, 45-6.
9 de Fremery, cited above, p. 76.
10
Ludwig Von Mises, Human Action, (Yale Univ. Press, 1949), pp.560-80.
I I de Fremery, cited above, p. 50.
12 Henry C. Simon, Economic Policy%r a Free Society, (Univ. of Chicago Press, 1948).
Oral history, drawn from conversations with Robert de Fremery.

4
de Fremery, cited above, p. 125.
l5Louis F. Post; The Prophet of San Francisco; (New York: Vanguard, 1930), p.
128. Post does not tell us what the “expletive” was!
6
Ludwig Von Mises, Theory ofMoney and Credit, (Capetown: J. Cape, 1934), p. 69.
7
' E.C. Harwood, Useful Principles of Inquiry, (Great Barrington, Mass.,
Behavioural Research Council, 1973), p. 211
I
Ayn Rand, Atlas Shrugged, (New York: New American Library, 1957), pp. 387-91.
19
My old friend Doug Casey, Co-Chairman of the Libertarian Party's 1996 Presiden-
tial race, said this ln a speech posted on the Internet at that time. C’mon Doug!
°0 James G. Fraser, The Golden Bough, (Macmillan, 1952), pp. 414-5.
21 Gemot Kohler pointed this out on the William Vickrey Memorial Website at:
http://pw2.netcom.com/ masonc/vickrey.html#KOHLERT
Publications and cassette recordings available to AMP Sustaining Members

The Lost Science of Money, by Stephen Zarlenga .................... donation: $60
Der Mythos Vom Geld - Die Geschichte der Macht, by S. Zarlenga . “ $48
History of Money in America, (audio cassettes - 4 hours of
S. Zarlenga interviewed on Tom Valentine's Radio Free America) ... “ $27
Henry George’s Concept of Money, (audio cassettes - 2 hour
address to Chicago's Henry George School of Social Science) .............. “ $15
Refutation of Menger ’s Theory of the Origin of Money,
by S. Zarlenga (a 21 page research paper) .............................................. “ $15
Robert De Fremery's Rights vs Privileges (paperback, 125 pp.) ............. “ $15
AMERICAN MONETARY INSTITUTE

PO BOX 601, VALATIE, NY 12184
Tel. 518-392-5387, email ami@taconic.net
http://www.monetary.org
The American Monetary Institute (“AMI”) is a publicly supported
charitable trust dedicated to the independent study of monetary history,
theory, and reform. To maintain that independence our funding must
come from a number of diverse sources and our research has to be avail-
able to a wide audience. This book has presented the results of that
research to date.
AMI SUSTAINING MEMBERSHIPS
Readers who find the themes of The Lost Science of Money to be
valuable and want to support our continuing research are encouraged to
become Sustaining Members by pledging to donate either $48 or $75 per
year, or whatever is a comfortable and sustainable amount for them. As
a 501c3 organization, donations to AMI are fully tax deductible. All
Sustaining Members receive a quarterly bulletin from the Institute high-
lighting current monetary developments. They also receive an equivelant
value of their donations in the form of our publications and tapes.
For AMI to be successful, its work must be understood by people in
many walks of life. This is a two-way process - feedback from readers
will tell whether we are truly communicating, or if more clarification is
necessary. AMI therefore encourages Sustaining Members to relay their
reactions as well as questions and proposals for further study.
We invite you to join and become more personally acquainted with
the AMI and these important monetary concepts. We also welcome your
participation in the coming efforts to achieve monetary reform. If that
can be accomplished in America, then it will become much easier to
begin resolving international monetary problems as well.
Please make your check payable to the American Monetary Institute,
PO Box 601, Valatie, NY 12184, and either photocopy this page or send
us the following information:
My check is enclosed for O $48 O $75 UOther: $
Enroll me as a sustaining member of the American Monetary Institute.
Name email
Address
City/State/Zip Phone
688
List of Illustrations
Abbreviations used: Nyplpc. - New York Public Library Photo Collection;
art. - artist; phot. - photographer; n.n. - not named; unk. - unknown.
la) Hook tool money, Ridgeway's Origin of Metallic Weights and Standards.
lb) Aristotle and Alexander, art. n.n., Nyplpc.
1c) Map of Greece and Turkey.
1d) Ionian stater, Smithsonian Institution, phot. Douglas Mudd.
le) Croiseus stater, Smithsonian Institution, phot. Douglas Mudd.
lf thru li) 130 grain coins, Smithsonian Instltution, phot. Douglas Mudd, &
American Numismatic Society, phot. Sebastian Heath.
lj) Athens owl, Smithsonian Institution, phot. Douglas Mudd.
lk) Solon, Casper Roig Edltores, Madrid, Nyplpc.
2a) Map of Italy.
2b) Aes signatum, Smithsonian Institutlon, phot. Douglas Mudd.
2c) Animal signatus, Smithsonian Institution, phot. Douglas Mudd.
2d) Heavy aes grave, Smithsonlan Institution, phot. Douglas Mudd.
2e) Lighter aes grave, Smithsonian Institution, phot. Douglas Mudd.
2f) Romano coins, Smithsonian Institution, phot. Douglas Mudd.
2g) Roma coins, Smithsonian Institution, phot. Dougtas Mudd.
2h) Roma quadrigatus, Smithsonian Institution, phot. Douglas Mudd.
2i) Denarius, Smithsonian Institution, Douglas Mudd.
2j) Roma victoriate, Smithsonian Institution, phot. Douglas Mudd.
2k) Oath scene gold/Mars eagle gold, Smithsonian Institution, Douglas Mudd.
21) Augustus bronze dupondus, Smithsonian Institution, phot. Douglas Mudd.
2m) Brutus’ “Eid Mart” daggers, Smithsonian Institution, Douglas Mudd.
2n) Constantine the Great, art. Jos. Buelow, 1860; Nyplpc.
3a) Abd El Malik coin, Smithsonian Institution, phot. Douglas Mudd.
3b) Map of middle-east land bridge.
3c) Early and late bezant, Smithsonian Institution, phot. Douglas Mudd.
3d) Walls of Constantinople, phot. E. Widmer, Nyplpc.
4a) Carolingian penny, Smithsonian Institution, phot. Douglas Mudd.
4b) Charlemagne, art. Meissonier; Nyplpc.
4c)St. Mark's Cathedral, phot. H. Simeone Huber, Nyplpc.
4d) Doge's secret chancellery room, phot. Tore Gill, Nyplpc.
4e) Venetian tournesello & star grosso, Lane's Money & Banking in ...Venice.
5a) Pope Urban calling for the crusade, art. n.n., Nyplpc.
5b) Siege of Jerusalem, art. Dore“, Nyplpc.
5c) Crusader coin, Smithsonian Institution, phot. Douglas Mudd.
5d) St. Peters castle at Bodrum, Internet source, phot. n.n.
5e) Map of 4th Crusade route.
6a) Champagne coln, Smithsonian Institution, phot. Douglas Mudd.
6b) Jacob Fugger, art. Hans Burgkmair, Nyplpc.
24 ILLUSTRATIONS 689
6c) Charles V* at Fugger's castle, art. Becker, Nyplpc.

6d) Brussels bourse, De Roover's Money, Banking and Credit in Medieval Brugge.
7a) St. Thomas Acquinas, art. n.n., Nyplpc.
7b) Aristotle, Internet source, art. n.n.
7c) Martin Luther, art. n.n., Nyplpc.
7d) John Calvin, art. Barbant, Nyplpc.
8a) Prince Henry the Navigator, art. Gustave Alaux; Nyplpc.
8b) Ferdinand & Isabella, art. unk., Prado Museum, Nyplpc.
8c) Potosi coin, Smithsonian Institution, phot. Douglas Mudd.
8d) Antwerp bourse, art. L. Legros, Nyplpc.
9a) Bank of Amsterdam, art. P. Saenredan, Rijksmuseum, Nyplpc.
9b) Amsterdam synagogue, Bloom's Economic Activities of the Jews ofAmsterdam.
9c) Frederick Henry, sculptor n.n., Nyplpc.
9d) Amsterdam Exchange, art. Von Hiob Berkheyde, Boymans Museum, Nyplpc.
10a) old English penny, Smithsonian Institution, phot. Douglas Mudd.
10b) clipped coinage, photo missing.
10c) Talley sticks, courtesy Bank of England.
10d) William 3rd in candlelight, art. n.n., Nyplpc.
l0e) John Locke, art. G. Knodler, Engr. S. Freeman, Nyplpc.
lla) William Paterson, art. n.n., Nyplpc.
11b) Charles Montagu, art. n.n., courtesy Bank of England.
11 c) Bank of England, courtesy Bank of England.
lld) John Law, J.W.H. Allen, French Natl. Portrait Gallery, London.
lle) Rue Quincampoix, art. n.n., Nyplpc.
12a) Adam Smith, art. n.n., Nyplpc.
12b) Bishop George Berkely, art. John Smibert, Nyplpc.
12c) Charles Montesquieu, art. Legeant, lith. Fonrouge, Nyplpc.
13a) Thorold Rogers, photo missing.
13b) Michael Sadler, art. n.n., Nyplpc.
13c) Jeremy Bentham, art. J. Watts, Nyplpc.
13d) Karl Marx, Internet source, phot. n.n.
13e) Stanley Jevons, Internet source, phot. n.n.
14a) Wampum, Smithsonian Institution, phot. Douglas Mudd.
14b) Pine tree coins, Smithsonian Institution, phot. Douglas Mudd.
14c) Massachusetts bill, Smithsonian Institution, phot. Douglas Mudd.
14d) NJ paper money, Smithsonian Institution, phot. Douglas Mudd.
l4e) Ben Franklin, art. Cochin, 1777, engr. H.W. Smith, Nyplpc.
14f &g) Continental Currency, Smithsonian Institution, Douglas Mudd.
14h) Tom Paine, art. n.n., Nyplpc.
15a) Robert Morris, art. C.W.Peale, 1782, Independence National Park Coll.
15b) John Witherspoon, art. n.n., Nyplpc.
15c) Alexander Hamilton, art. L.W. Gilbs, Nyplpc.
15d) Note of First Bank of U.S., American Numismatic Association.
690 ILLUSTRATIONS
15e) Thomas Jefferson, art. n.n., Library of Congress.

l5f) James Madison, art. n.n., Nyplpc.
159) U.S. Treasury note, March, 1815, American Numismatic Association.
l5h) 2nd Bank of the U.S., Philadelphia, American Numismatic Association.
15i) President Jackson, art. J. Van der Lyn, 1819, Nyplpc.
l5j) Jackson assassination attempt, art. n.n., Library of Congress.
15k) Daniel Webster, art. & engr. J.B. Longacre, 1833, Nyplpc.
151) Martin Van Buren, art. n.n., Nyplpc.
16a) French assignat, courtesy Cornell University.
17a) Greenback, Museum of Financial History, NY.
17b) Greenback vs Gold, Dewey's Financial History Of The US.
17c) Gettysburg scene, Library of Congress.
17d) Confederate money, Smithsonian Institution, phot. Douglas Mudd.
17e) Benjamin Butlef, phot. n.n., Nyplpc.
18a) Alexander Del Mar, from The Science of Money.
18b) Henri Cernushi, Cernushi Museum, Paris.
18c) August Belmont, phot. n.n., Nyplpc.
18d) 1865-75 Appreciating dollar, Hicks' The Populist Revolt.
19a) W.J. Bryan, phot. n.n., Nyplpc.
19b) J.P. Morgan, phot. n.n., Nyplpc.
19c) Del Mar's table, Del Mar's History of the Precious Metals.
19d) Ezra Pound, Internet source, phot. n.n.
20a) Wall Street bomb, phot. n.n., Nyplpc.
20b) DJIA 1900 - 1933, AMI collection.
20c) Bonus veterans, phot. Joe Costa, Daily News, Nyplpc.
20d) Mariner Eccles, phot. n.n., Nyplpc.
20e) Depression soup line, Phot. n.n., Nyplpc.
20f) Franklin Roosevelt, Phot. n.n., Nyplpc.
20g) Pope Pius XI, Internet source, phot. n.n.
20h) Archbishop Of Canterbury, A.P., Nyplpc.
21a) German hyper-inflation currency, AMI collection.
21b) Hjalmar Schacht, Internet source, phot. n.n.
21c) Gottfried Feder, phot. Heinrich Hoffman, 1933.
22a) Keynes And White, phot. n.n., IMF.
22b) US Gold Holdings Chart, AMI collection.
22c) Imf Building, IMF.
23a) D Mark run up chart, AMI collection.
23b) Euro chart, AMI Collection.
23c) Euro coin and currency, ECB.
24a) Henry Gonzales, phot. n.n., Library of Congress.
24b) Wright Patman, phot. Harris & Ewing, 1936, Nyplpc.
24c) Frederick Soddy, Scribner's Mag., Sept. 1905, phot. n.n., Nyplpc.
24d) Robert De Fremery, phot. n.n., AMI collection.
691
SELECTED BIBLIOGRAPHY
Items with a star * are referenced in the book. Items with a † are especially
recommended, and items with a were of direct importance in developing
elements of the thesis. Some unusual materials are identified by their call letters
at the NY Research Library. The abbreviation NY is used below to denote New
York City. For a bibliography organized by subject matter, please see the works
listed in the endnotes after each Chapter.
A
*Ackroyd, P.R. and C.F. Evans. Cambridge History of the Bible.
Cambridge Univ. Press, 1970.
*$ Adams, Brooks. The Law of Civilization and Decay. NY: Alfred Knopf, 1943.
.The Emancipation of Massachusetts. NY: Houghton Mlfflin, 1887.
*Addison, C.G. The Knights Templar. London: Green & Longmans, 1842.
*Alison, Sir. Archibald. History ofEurope From Fall ofNapoleon to Accession
of Louis Napoleon. Edingurgh: William Blackwood, 1852.
Analectics Magazine. On Banks and Paper Currency. USA: December, 1815.
*Anderson, Benjamin. The Value of Money. 1917. NY: Richard Smith, 1936.
*Andreades, Andreas. History of the Bank of England. London Univ., 1909.
*† . History of Greek Public Finance. Cambridge: Brown, Caroll, 1933.
*† Anonymous. The Paper Money Issued by Pennsylvania. By a “member of
the Numismatic Society of Philadelphia.” 1862.
*Appian's Roman History. Book 4. Loeb Classical Library. 1979.
*$ Aristotle. Politics, and Ethics.
*Aufricht, Hans. The International Monetary Fund. NY: Praeger, 1964.
B
*Bacon, Francis. Philosophical Works of Francis Bacon. Edit. J.M. Robertson.
Ellis & Spedding text. Freeport, NY: Books for Libraries, 1970.
* . New Atlantis. Chicago: Encyclopedia Britannica,Great Books
Collection, vol. 31, 1952.
*Bagehot, Walter. The Assimilation of the English and American Money.
London: The Economist, 1869. Repr., CN: Greenwood, 1969.
*Baigent, Michael and Richard Leigh. The Temple and the Lodge. NY: Arcade,
Little Brown, 1989.
*Bannlster, Saxe. William Paterson. Edinburgh: Nimmo, 1859.
* . The Writings of William Paterson. 1859. Repr., NY: A M. Kelley, 1968.
*I Barbour, Violet. Capitalism in Amsterdam in the 17th Century. Baltimore:
John Hopkins Univ. Press, 1950.
*Baring, Sir Francis. Observations on the Establishment of the Bank ofEngland.
1797. Repr., NY: A. M. Kelley, 1967.
Bartlett, C. J. Castlereogh. NY: Scribners, 1966.

*Barton, Willliam. Observations on the Nature and Use of Paper Credit
Including a Proposal for Founding a NatfOnal Bank. Philadelphia: 1781.
.True Interest of the U.S. and Particularly Pennsylvania Resulting
From a State Paper Money. Philadelphia: 1786; Evans microfilm # 194/197.
*Basler, Ray, editor. The Collected Works ofAbraham Lincoln. Abraham
Lincoln Assoc. Springfield, Il. Rutgers Univ. Press, 1953.
*Beach, W. Edwards. British International Gold Movements and Banking
Policy, 1881-1913. Harvard Univ. Press, 1935.
Beard, Charles. An Economic Interpretation of the Constitution of the U.S.
1935. Repr., NY: Free Press, 1986.
Beaumont, John. Cleanings ofAntiquity. London: J. Roberts, 1724.
*† Belloc, Hilaire. The Crisis of Civilization. NY: Putnam, 1937.
* .Cromwell. Philadelphia: Lippincot, 1934.
. Economics for Young People. NY: Putnam, 1926.
* how the Reformation Happened. NY:R. McBride, 1928.
*Ben Israel, Manasseh. The Hope ofIsrael. 2nd edition, 1640’s-50’s.
call # *KC1651, rare books room, NY Research Library.
*Bentham, Jeremy. In Defence of Usury. London: Payne & Foss, 1818.
*$ Berkeley, George. Querest (1735). London: Innis, Davis & Hitch, 1750,
(Sketch of National Bank Omitted).
Blel, Gabriel. A Treatise on the Power and Utility of Moneys. Univ. of
Thubingen, 14th Century, Univ. of Pennsylvania Press, 1930.
Billington, Ray Allen. The Protestant Crusade 1800-1860. NY: Rinehart, 1952.
*Bloch, Raymond. The Origin ofRome. NY: Praeger, 1969.
*Bloom, Herbert. Economic Activities ofthe Jews ofAmsterdam. NY:Kennikat, 1935.
Bodin, Jean. The Dearness of Things (l 568). In Early Economic Thought. A.E.
Monroe. Harvard Univ. Press, 1924.
*Boeckh, Augustus. Public Economy ofAthens. Lewis translation. London:
John Murray, vol.2, 1828.
*Borda, Michael and Anna Schwartz. A Retrospective on the Gold Standard.
National Bureau of Economic Research, Univ. of Chicago Press, 1983.
*Borda, Michael & Barry Eichengreen. A Retrospective on the Bretton Woods
System. Univ. of Chicago Press, 1993.
Borden, William. Address to the Inhabitants of North Carolina. (Proposal for
paper money). Williamsburg: 1746.
*Boxer, C.R. Portuguese Seaborn Empire, 1415-1825. London: Hutchinson, 1969.
Brandeis, Louis D. Other Peoples Money (1913). NY: Frederick Stokes, 1932.
*Breck, Samuel. Continental Paper Money. Philadelphia: John Clark, 1843.
SELECTED BIBLIOGRAPHY 693
*Breckenridge, Sarah. Legal Tender. Univ. of Chicago Press, 1903.

*t Bretton, Henry. The Power of Money. Albany: S.U.N.Y. Press, 1980.
*† Brock, Leslie V. The Currency of the American Colonies 1700-1764. NY:
Anno Press, 1975.
Bronson, I. Outline ofa Plan for a National Bank. NY: 1833.
Bryan, William Jennings. The Second Battle (Or The New Declaration of
Independence); Chicago: Conkey, 1900.
Buckle, Thomas. Posthumous Works. London: Longmans Green, 1872.
•Bullock, Charles J. The Monetary History of the U.S. NY: Macmillan, 1900.
*Burckhardt, Jacob. The Civilization of the Renaissance in Italy. London:
Phaedon, 1935, 1944.
Burnett, Andrew. Coinage in the Roman World. London: Seaby, 1987.
*Butler, Benjamin F. Speech in the House of Representatives. Congressional
Globe, 40th Congr, 3rd sesslon, 303ff.
Butler’s Book. Self published, 1888.
. Autobiography and Personal Reminiscences. Boston: Thayer, 1892.
c
*Calhoun, George M. The Business Life ofAncient Athens. Univ. of Chicago
Press, 1926.
*Calvin, John. Institutes. Trans. John Allen. Philadelphia: Presbyterian Board
of Publications, 1813.
* .Commentaries on the Epistle of St. Paul. Edinburgh: 1853.
Capper, Charles. The Port and Trade ofLondon. London: Smith, Elder, 1862.
*Campbell, Alexander. The True Greenback. . .,’ Chicago: Republican Book and
Job Office, 1868.
*Cantillon, Philip. Analysis of Trade, Commerce, etc. London: Self pub., 1759.
Carey, Henry C. Mat Constitutes Currency. Philadelphia: Lea and Blanchard, 1840.
The Credit System in France, Great Britain and the U.S.A. 1838.
Repr., NY: A.M. Kelley, 1974.
Principles of Social Science. Philadelphia: Lippincott, 1858.
*† Caterall, Ralph. 2nd Bank of the U.S. Univ. of Chicago Press, 1902.
*$ Cernuschi, Henri. Nomisma or Legal Tender. NY:Appleton, 1877.
. Anatomy of Money. London: P.S. King, 1886.
*Chamberlain, Houston Stuart. Foundations of the 19th Century. Trans. John
Lees. NY: John Lane, 1912.
*Chandler, Lester V. Benjamin Strong, Central Banker. Washington: Brookings
Institution, 1958.
Chang, Chen Huan. The Economic Principles of Confucius and His School.
NY: Columbia Univ. Press, 191 I .
Chapman, Stanley. The Rise ofMerchant Banking. London: Allen & Unwin, 1984.
*Charles-Picard, Gilbert and Colette. Daily Life In Carthage. Trans. A.E.
Foster. NY: Macmillan, 1966.
Checkland, S. G. Scotttish Banking - A History 1695-1973. London: Collins, 1975.
*Chevelier, Michel. The Probable Fall in the Value of Gold. NY: Appleton,
1859. Appendix notes on his 1853 Remarks on the Precious Metals
and on the Depreciation of Gold.
*Chopra, M. Umer. Toward a Just Monetary System. London: The Islamic
Foundation, 1985.
Cipolla, Carlo M. Monetary Policy of Fourteenth Century Florence. Univ. of
California, 1982.
Money, Prices and Civilization in the Mediterranean World. Padua
Univ. Press, 1953.
Clausen, A.W. Future Role of the World Bank. Brookings Institute, 1982.
*Conant, Charles Arthur. A History ofModern Banks ofIssue. NY: Putnam, 1909.
*Cooper, Peter. Letter to President Grant. June 1, 1877.
. A Paper Currency. 1870’s, TF PV64, at NY Research Library.
Copernicus, Nicola. Treatise on Coining Money. Trans. G. A. Moore.
Corey, Lewis. The House of Morgan. NY: Watt, 1930.
*Cowles,'v"irginia. The Great Swindle (South Sea Bubble); NY: Harper Brothers, 1960.
*Craig, John. The Mint- A History of the London Mint From 287 to 1948.
Cambridge Univ. Press, 1953.
*Crawford, Michael. Coinage and Money Under the Roman Republic.
Univ. of California Press, 1985.
Cusa, Nicholas. Unity and Reform. Edited by Patrick Dolan. Univ. of Notre
Dame Press, 1962.
D
*Davies, Glyn. A History of Money From Ancient Times to the Present Day..
Univ. of Wales Press, 1994.
*De Brunhoff, Suzanne. Marx on Money. Trans. M. Goldbloom. NY: Urizen, 1976.
*$ De Fremery, Robert. Rights vs. Privileges. San Anselmo: Provocative Press, 1994.
† . Money and Freedom. Self published, 1957.
*† De La Vega, Joseph. Confusione de Confusiones (1688). Harvard Graduate
Business School, u.d.,1960s.
*De Vries, Margaret G. The IMF in a Changing World 1945-1985. Washington:
International Monetary Fund, 1986.
*De Vries, Barend A. Remaking the World Bank. Washington: Seven Locks, 1987.
•$ Del Mar, Alexander. History of Monetary Systems. 1895. Repr., NY: A.M.
Kelley, 1978.
* History of Money in Ancient Countries. London: Bell, 1885.
*{ . Middle Ages Revisited. NY: Cambridge Encyl., 1900.
*{ . History of Precious Metals. 1902. Repr., NY: A.M. Kelley, 1969.
*{ . History ofMoney in America. c. 1900. Repr., NY: Burt Franklin, 1968.
*} . Money and Civilization. 1867. Repr., NY: Burt Franklin, 1969.
*$ . The Science of Money. NY: Cambridge Encyl.,1904.
*$ . History of Monetary Crimes. Washington: Del Mar Society, 1899.
* . Did the Hindus Discpver America?, Indian Rev., Madras, Sept. 1912.
*} Dempsey, Bernard. Interest and Usury. London: Dennis Dobson, 1948.
•{ Dewey, Davis Rich. Financial History of the U.S. NY: Longman's Green, 1903.
•† Dewolf, Lyman E. Money - Its Use and Abuse. Chicago: Pigott Webster, 1869.
*Dickeson, M.W. American Numismatical Manual. Philadelphia: Lippincott, 1865.
*†Dillaye, Stephen D. Assignats and Mandats. A True History, including an
examination ofA.D. White's Paper Money In France. Philadelphia:
Henry Carey Baird, 1877.
Dio. Roman History. Book 1. Harvard Univ. Press, Loeb, 1972.
Disney, Antony R. Twilight of the Pepper Empire. Harvard Univ. Press, 1978.
*Dollinger, Philip. The German Hansa. Trans. Ault & Sternberg. Stanford
Univ. Press, 1970.
Dorpalen, Andreas. The World ofGeneral Haushofer. NY:Farrar and Reinhart, 1942.
Dowd, Kevin. The Experience of Free Banking. London: Routledge, 1992.
Driscoll, David D. What is the International Monetary Fund? Washington:
International Monetary Fund, 1992.
*Dury, John. A Case Of Conscience. Letter of J. Dury to Samuel Hartlieb, from
Kossel. Printed for Richard Wodenothe, 1656.
E
Edbury, P.W. and D.M. Metcalf. Coinage in the Latin East. Oxford: BAR
International Series # 77, 1980.
*† Ehrenberg, Richard. Capital and Finance in the Age of the Renaissance.
*} Einzig, Paul. Primitive Money. NY: Pergamon, 1966.
* . Fight for Financial Supremacy. London: Macmillan, 1931.
* . The Bank for International Settlements. London: Macmillan, 1930.
Economic Foundations of Fascism. London: Macmillan, 1933.
. The Destiny of Gold. NY: St. Martin's, 1972
Emden, Paul H. Money Powers of Europe. NY: Appleton Century, 1938.
*I Ernst, Joseph Albert. Money and Politics in America 1755-1775. Inst. of
Early American Hist. & Culture, Univ. of North Carolina Press, 1973.
Evans, Allen. Some Coinage Systems of the 14th Century. Journal of Economic
and Business History III, 1931.
F
*† Feavearyear, A.E. The Pound Sterling. Oxford Univ. Press, 1963.
*Feder, Gottfried. Hitler’s Official Program. George Allen & Unwin. 1934.
Repr., NY: Howard Ferbig, 1971.
*Fenton, Roger. A Treatise on Usurie. London: imprinted by Felix Kyngston for
William Aspley, 1612.
*Ferguson, William S. Greek Imperialism. NY: Biblo & Tannen, 1963, 1941.
*Fisher, Sydney George. 1863 article in the North American Review.
Flursheim, Michael. Clue to the Economic Labyrinth. London: Swann
Sonnenschein, 1902, Repr. in Perth.
*Flynn, John. Men of Wealth. Freeport, NY: Books For Libraries,197l.
Foster, William Truffant. Edison-Ford Commodity Money. NY: Address to the
Academy of Political Science, November 1922.
Foster, William, & Wadill Catchings. Money. NY: Houghton Mifflin,1927.
*†Francke & Hudson. Banking and Finance in West Germany. NY:St. Martin's, 1984.
*†Frank, Tenney. An Economic History ofRome. NY: Cooper Square Pub., 1962.
*Franklin, Benjamin. Autobiography ofBenjamin Franklin. NY: Macmillan, 1911.
*{ . Modest Inquiry into the Nature and Necessiy ofa Paper Currency. i 729.
Benjamin Franklin; Writings. NY: Library of America, 1987.
continued. by grandson W. T. Franklin. Works, Memoirs of the Life
and Writings of. Vol. 3. London: H. Colburn, 1818.
*} Frazer, James George. The Golden Bough. NY: Macmillan, 1953.
*} Freeman, Kathleen. Work and Life of Solon. Univ. of Wales Press, 1926.
*† Friedman, Milton and Anna Schwartz. A Monetary History of the U.S. 1867-
1960. Natl. Bureau of Econ. Res., Princeton Univ. Press, 1971.
*Friedman, Milton. Capitalism and the Jews. In Morality of The Market. Edited
by Block, Brennan and Elzinga. Fraser Institute, Vancouver, B.C. 1985.
G
Gallatin, Robert. Considerations on the Currency and Banking System of the
U.S. Philadelphia: Carel and Lear, 1831.
• Garfield, James. The Currency Conflict. Atlantic Monthly, v.37.
•† Garrison, Elisha Ely. Roosevelt, Wilson, and the Federal Reserve Law.
Boston: Christopher Publishing House, 1931.
George, Henry. Progress and Poverty. NY: Schalkenbach Foundation, 1992.
*{ . Social Problems. 1884. NY: Schalkenbach Foundation,1992.
* . Science of Political Economy. NY: Schalkenbach, 1992.
*Gibbon, Edward. Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire. Great Books, Encyl.
Brittanica, Univ. of Chicago Press, vols.40, & 41, 1952.

*I Godfrey, John. 1204 The Unholy Crusade. Oxford Univ. Press, 1980.
*} Gouge, William M. A Short History of Paper Money and Banking.
Philadelph1a:T. Ustik, 1833.
*Grant Frederick C. Ancient Roman Religion. NY: Liberal Arts, 1957.
*Grant, Michael. Roman History from Coins. Cambridge Univ. Press, 1958.
Greeley, Horace. Political Economy. Boston: Fields & Osgood, 1870.
*Greenspan, Alan. Gold & Economic Freedom essay in Ayn Rand's Capitalism
the Unknown IdealNew. NY: American Library, 1967.
Greider, William. Secrets of the Temple. NY: Simon & Shuster, 1987.
*Grierson, Philip. Monetary Reforms ofAbd Al Malik. Journal of Economic &
Social History of the Orient, vol .3, Oct. 3, 1960.
. Commerce in the Dark Ages. Royal Hist. Soc., 5th Series, Vol. 9, 1959.
. Dark Age Numismatics. London: Varorium Reprints, 1979.
*{ Grimaudet, Francois. Law of Payment. 1560. In Humboldt's Fluctuations of
Gold. (listed below)
•Grisar, Hartman. Martin Luther, His Life and Work. Includes Kampschulte, I,
1869; Trans. F.J. Eble.Westminster Md: Newman Press, 1955.
*{Groseclose, Elgin. Money and Man, Univ. of Oklahoma Press, 1976.
*Guggenheim, Thomas. Pre Classical Monetary Theories. Geneva: Graduate
Institute of International Studies, 1989.
*Guillebaud, C. W. The Economic Recovery of Germany 1933-1938. London:
Macmillan, 1939.
•Guicciardono, Ludovico. Antwerp The Great Market. In Discrittione Di Tutti
i Passi Bassi. 1567. Trans. Pennock.
H
*Hamilton, Alexander, John Jay and James Madison. The Federalist Papers.
Chicago: Great Books, Encyclopedia Britannica,Volume 43.
•Hamilton, Alexander. Papers on Public Credit Commerce and Finance. New
York: McKee & Williams, Liberal Arts, 1957.
•t Haney, Louis. History ofEconomic Thought. NY:Houghton Mifflin, 1949.
*Harris, Joseph. Essay Upon Money and Coins. 1757. In Mculloch’s Rare and
Valuable Tracts on Money. Repr., NY: A.M. Kelley, 1967.
Harris, S. E. The Assignats. Harvard Univ. Press, 1930.
*Harvey, William. Coins Financial School. Edit. R. Hofstadter. Cambridge:
Belknap, Harvard Univ. Press, 1963.
*$ Harwood, William R. Yahweh and Jesus, Mythology’s Last Gods. 1983 doc
toral thesis, accepted by Columbia Pacific Univ.
Harwood, E. C. Cause and Control of the Business Cycle. Great Barrington:
American Institute for Economic Research (AIER), 1974.

. Useful Economics, Great Barrington, AIER, 1970.
*Hayek, F. A. Denationalisation of Money, The Argument Refined. London:
Institute of Economic Affairs, 1978.
Hazlitt, Carew. The Venetian Republic. NY: AMS, 1915.
*†Heichelheim, Fritz M. An Ancient Economic History. 1938. Trans. 1. Stevens.
A.W. Sijthoffs Uitgeversnaatschappy, 1958.
*t Heiden, Konrad. Der Fuerher, Hitler’s Rise To Power. 1934. Trans. R.
Manheim. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1944.
Helps, Sir Arthur. The Spanish Conquest in America. London: John W. Parker
& Sons, Vol 1, 1855.
Henderson, M.I. The Establishment of the Equester Ordo. Journal Of Roman
Studies; Liii, 1963.
*Hendy, M. Studies in the Byzantine Monetary Economy. Cambridge Univ. Press, 1985.
Herodotus. History.
*† Hicks, John D. The Populist Revolt. Univ. of Nebraska Press, 1961.
Higham, John. Anti-Semitism in the GuildedAge. Indianapolis: Bobs Merrill, 1957.
Hirst, Margaret E. The Life of Frederich List. London: Smith Elder,1909.
*† Hixson, William F. The Triumph of the Bankers. Westport, Ct: Praeger, 1993.
*$ Hobbes, Thomas. Behemouth. In Francis Maseres, Selected Tracts Relating to the
Civil Wars in England Under Charles I, Part II. London: R. Wilks, 1815.
Holdsworth, John Thom. The First and Second Banks of the United
Shales.Washington, DC: National Monetary Commission, 1910,
*$ Hollis, Christopher; The Two Nations. 1935. Repr., NY: Gordon, 1975.
Holzer, Henry M. Government’s Money Monopoly. NY: Books In Focus, 1980.
*Homer, Sydney P. A History of Interest Rates. Rutgers Univ. Press, 1963.
*Horsefield, J. Kieth. British Monetary Experiments 1650-1710’, Harvard
Univ. Press, 1960.
* Hudson, Michael, & Baruch Levine. Privatization in the Ancient Near Eastand
Classical World. Peabody Museum, Harvard Univ., vol 1 & 2 1994; 1998.
*Humboldt, Alexander Von. Fluctuations of Gold. NY:Cambridge Encyl., 1900.
*Humphreys, Henry Noel. Ancient Coins and Medals. London: Grant & Griffith, 1850.
I
*tMooeJ and Banking in Islam. Ten papers at the 198 l conference, Inst. of
Policy Studies, Islamabad, Paklstan. Pub. by International Center for
Research in Islamic Economics; King Abdul Aziz Univ., Jeddah, Saudi
Arabia. Intro. and papers by Faridi, Chopra and Al-Jarhi.
*Israel, Jonathan I. Dutch Primacy in World Trade. NY:Oxford Univ. Press,1989.
SELLC l Ll9 BlBLlUCrKAPH Y 699
*$ Jacobs, Willlam. The Precious Metals. 1831. Repr., NY: A.M. Kelley, 1968.
*† James, Marquis. The Life ofAndrew Jackson. Indianapolis: Bobs Merrill, 1938.
Japan, Bank of. The Bank of Japan. Tokyo: 1973.
*I Jefferson, Thomas. Letters & Addresses. Edited by William Parker. NY: 1905.
*Jevons, Stanley W. Money and the Mechanism ofExchange. 1875. NY:
Appleton, 1897.
•Jones, A. H. M. Asian Trade in Antiquity. In Islam & the Trade ofAsia. Edited
by D. S. Richards. Univ. of Pennsylvania, 1970.
Jones, Bassett. Debt and Production. NY: John Day, 1933.
K
Kendall, Amos. Autobiography. Philadelphia: Lee & Shephard, 1872.
*Kennedy, Ellen. The Bundesbank. NY: Council on Foreign Relations, 1991.
Kenyon, Edward P. German Financial Policies 1932-39. Harvard Univ. Press, 1939.
*Kettle, T. P. Southern Wealth and Northern Profits. G. & J. Wood, 1860.
Repr., Univ. of Alabama, 1965.
King, Robert G. On the Economics of Private Money. Journal of Monetary
Economics 12, 1983.
*} Knapp, George. State Theory ofMoney. 1905. London: Pub. on behalf of Royal
Economic Society by Macmillan, 1924.
*Knox, John Jay. History ofBanking in the United States. NY: Rhodes, Bradford &
Youngman, 1903.
•Kraay, Colln. Greek Coins. NY: Harry Abrams, 1966.
*† Kolko, Gabriel. The Triumph of Conservatism. Chicago: Quadrangle, 1967.
Kublin, Hyman. Jews in Old China. Paragon, 1971.
*Lane, Frederick C. Venetian Ships and Shipbuilding. Baltimore: John Hopkins

Univ.; 1934.
*† . Money and Banking in Medieval and Renaissance Venice.
Baltimore, John Hopklns Univ. Press, 1985.
* . Venice in History. Baltimore: John Hopkins Univ. Press, 1966.
*† Langholm, Odd. The Aristotelian Analysis of Usury. Oslo: Universitetsforlaget, 1984.
*Lansing, Robert. The Peace Negotiations. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1921.
*Laughlin, Laurence. Principles of Money. NY: Scribners, 1911.
*I Laum, Bernard. Heileges Geld. Section trans. by Stephanie Watjen.
Tubingen: J.C.B. Mohr, 1924.
*Law, John. Considerations sur Ie Numeraire. 1852.
* . Ouvres Completes, vol.1. {? Paris: Lib. du Recueil Sirey, 1934?}
* . Money and Trade Considered. London: W. Lewis, 2nd edit, 1720.

Lehrman, Lew, and Ron Paul. The Case for Gold. Minority Report of the U.S.
Gold Commission, Cato Institute, 1982.
Lenin, Vladimir. What is to be Done? 1902. Edited by Trachtenberg, 1929.
*t Lenormant, Francois. Monnaes de Antiquita. Paris: Bibliothetic Nationale,
Rallen et Fevardent, vol.1-3, 1878.
Leo XIII; Serum Novarum. 1891. At: http://www.osjspm.org/cst/rn.htm
Leon, Harry J. The Jews ofAncient fio/tie. Philadelphia: Jewish PubliCatlon
Society of America, 1960.
*Lerner, Eugene M. On Confederate Money. In Studies in the Quantity Theory
of Money. Milton Friedman. Univ. of Chicago Press, 1956.
Letwin, William. American Economic Policy Since 1789. Chicago: Aldine, 1964.
*I Lewis, Lawrence. The Bank ofNorth America. Philadelphia: Lippincott, 1882.
*$ LiSt, Frledrich. National System of Political Economy. 1844. London:
Longmans Green, London, 1885.
Livy. Roman History. Book 7.
*† Locke, John. Essay on Money andBullion. London: for B. Lintot, 1718. (*c.p.v.72)
*[ 1. Remarks Upon a Late Ingenious Pamphlet by an Impartial Hand.
* . An Essay Concerning Civil Government. Great Books, Vol. 35.
* . Considerations of the Consequences of the Lowering ofInterest. 1692.
London: Repr. in Mcculloch's Principles of Political Economy.
. A Letter Concerning Toleration. NY: Liberal Arts Press, 1950.
Lomask, Milton. Aaron Burr. NY: Farrar Strauss Giroux, 1979.
*Longworth, Phillip. Venice - the Rise and Fall. London: Constable, 1974.
Lowndes, William. Report Containing an Essay for the Amendment of the Silver
Coins. London: Bill, 1695.
*Luther, Martin. Von Kaffshandlung und Wucher. 1524. In Hartman Grisar's,
Martin Luther, His Life & Work. Trans. F.J. Eble. Westminster, Md:
Newman Press, 1955.
*Lyan, WilllalTl R. Pirenne’s Thesis Today. In The Origins of the Middle Ages.
Norton, 1972; as excerpted in The Middle Ages. NY: Knopf, vol. 2, 1983.
M
MacDonald, George. The Evolution of Coinage. 1916. Chicago: Obo1, 1980.
Machievelli. Chief Works. Trans. Allen Gilbert. Duke Univ. Press, 1965.
*Maclay, William. Journal of William Maclay. NY:Appleton, 1890.
*Madison Papers. Elliot Debates, vol. 5.
Mahmoud, Ibrahim. Merchant Capitalism and Islam. Univ. of Texas Press, 1990.
*$ Maitland, James, 8th Earl of Lauderdale. The Nature and Origin of Public
Wealth. 1804. Repr., NY: A.M. Kelley, 1962.

* .Three Letters to the Duke of Wellington. 1829. Repr., NY: A. M. Kelley, 1965.
*Malthus, Rev. Thomas; Definitions in Political Economy. London: J. Murray, 1827.
.The Measure of Value. NY: Kelly and Millman, 1957.
*Marx, Karl. Capital. Trans. from 3rd edition by S. Moore & E. Aveling. Edit.
by F. Engels. Revised and amplified fourth German edition of E.
Unterman. Chicago: C. H. Kerr & Co., 1912, NY: Modern Library,
u.d., based on Kerr vol. 1 text, with identical pagination.
History of Economic Theories from the Physiocrats to Adam Smith.
Edit. Karl Kautsky. Trans. Terence McCarthy. NY: Langland, 1952.
*Mattingly, Harold. Roman Coins. London: Metheun, 1928.
Roman Coins. London: Spink & Son, 1977.
Mayhew, N.J. & Spufford, Peter, editors, Later Medieval Mints. BAR
International Series, 1985.
McCulloch, J.R. Rare and Valuable Tracts on Money. London: Pol. Econ.
Club,1856
*McNeal, John T. History and Character of Calvinism. Oxford Univ. Press, 1967.
* Melville, Lewis. The South Sea Bubble. (pseudonym) by "Benjamin". Repr.,
NY: Burt Franklin, 1968.
Michel, H. Sparta. Cambridge Univ. Press, 1952.
*Mill, John Stuart. Principles of Political Economy. NY: Appleton, 1864.
*† Miller, Dean. Imperial Constantinople. NY: John Wiley, 1969.
Miller, Harry E. Banking Theories in the United States Before 1860. Harvard
Univ. Press, 1927. Repr., NY: A.M. Kelley, 1972.
*Milne, J. G. The Monetary Reform of Solon. Journal of Hellenic Studies, 1930.
. Article on Nomisma, The Classical Review, vol. 63, 1949.
Milward, Alan S. The German Economy at War. Univ. of London, Athlone, 1965.
Minton, Robert. John Law, the Father ofPaper Money. NY:Association Press, 1975.
*$ Mitchell, Wesley. Gold Prices and Wages Under the Greenback System.
Berkeley: Univ. Press, 1908.
*Mommsen, Theodore; The History of Rome. Trans. W.P. Dickson. 5 vol. NY:
Scribners, 1903.
Monteneiro, Mariana. As David and the Sibyls Say. Edinburgh: Sands, 1905.
*Moore, Frank. Diary of the American Revolution. NY:Charles Scribner, v. 1, 1860.
Mottram, R.H. A History ofFinancial Speculation. Boston: Little Brown, 1929.
*Muhlen, Norbert. Hitler’s Magician - Schacht. Trans. Dickes. NY: Alliance, 1939.
*† Mullins, Eustace. The Federal Reserve Conspirac y. New Jersey: Common
Sense Press, 1954.
This Difficult Individual, Ezra Pound. NY: Fleet, 1961.
*Munro, Dana Carlton. The Kingdon of the Crusades. 1935. Port Washington:
Kennicat Press, 1966.
Musolini, Benito. The Fall of Mussolini, His Own Story. Trans. F. Franaye. NY:
Farrar Strauss, 1948.
*Robert J. Myers. Political Morality of the IMF. Transaction Books, Carnegie
Council on Ethics & International Affairs, 1987.
N
Nathan, Otto. The Nazi Economic System. Duke Univ., 1944.
*† Nelson, Benjamin N. be Idea of Usury. Princeton Univ. Press, 1949.
*Neusner, Jacob. The History of the Jews of Babylon. Scholar's Press, 1984.
*Nevins, Allan. Henry White: Thirty Years ofAmerican Diplomacy. NY: Harper
Bros., 1930.
Newton, Sir Isaac. On the Subject of Money. 1856. In McCulloch's Rare and
Valuable Tracts on Money. Repr., NY: A.M. Kelley, 1966.
Niebuhr, B. G. History of Rome. Trans. Hare & Thirlwall. Philadelphia: Lea
& Blanchard, 1844.
*Nielsen, Francis. 77ie Makers of War. Appleton Wisconsin: Nelson Publishing, 1950.
*Nolan, Patrick. A Monetary History of Ireland. London: King & Son, 1926.
*$ Noonan, John. The Scholastic Analysis of Usury. Harvard Univ. Press, 1957.
*Nussbaum, Arthur. The History of the Dollar. NY:Columbia Univ. Press, 1957.
O
*Oresme, Nicola. (1320-82). De Moneta. Repr., NY: T. Nelson & Sons, 1956.
*† Paine, Thomas. Agrarian Justice. Dissertation on Government, the Affairs of

the Bank, and Paper Money. Letter To Abbe Reynal. Decline and Fall of
English System ofFinance. In The Writings of Thomas Paine. Edit. M. D.
Conway. NY: AMS, vol 3, 1967.
Parke, H. W. Sibyls and Sibylene Prophecy. NY: Routledge, 1988.
*Parkes, James. The Jew in the Medeival Community. NY: Hermon Press, 1976
*Patterson, C.C. Silver Stocks and Losses in Ancient and Medieval Times.
Economic History Review, XXV May 1972.
*Payer, Cheryl. The WorldBank - a Critical Analysis. Monthly Review Press; 1982.
*† Peruzzi, Emilio. Money in Ancient Rome. Academia Toscana Di Sciencze E
Lettere, 1985.
*Petty, William. Quantulumcunque Concerning Money. A&P Churchill, 1682.
Charles-Picard, Gilbert and Colette. Daily Life in Carthage. Trans. A.E. Foster.
NY: Macmillan, 1966.
*† Pirenne, Henri. Mohammed and Charlemagne. NY: Meridian, 1957.
*I . Medieval Cities. Garden City: Doubleday Anchor, 1956.

*1 . Economic and social History ofMedt’eval Europe. NY:Harcourt Brace, 1937.
*Pius XI; Quadragesimo Anno. 1931; at http://www.osjspm.org/cst/qa.htm
*Plato. Works. Jowett translation.
*Pliny The Elder. Natural History.
Plumb, J. H. Sir Robert Walpole. Houghton Mifflin, 1961.
•{ Plutarch. Parallel Lives.
† Polanyi, Karl, Conrad M. Arensburg and Harry W. Pearson. Trade and Market
in the Early Empires. Glencoe, IL: Free Press, 1957.
The Great Transformation. Beacon Press, 1957.
Pownall. A Letter from Governor Pownall to Adam Smith. Sept. 25, 1776. Repr.,
NY: A.M. Kelly 1967.
*Price, Bonamy. Interview with Daily Tribune. Oct. 1, 1874, call # TF-PV105.
*Price, J. L. Culture and Society in ffie Dutch Republic During the 17th
Century. London: Batsford, 1974.
*} Quiggin, A.H. Survey of Primitive Money. London: Metheun, 1949.

*Quigley, Prof. Carroll. The Anglo American Establishment. NY:Books In Focus, 1982.
Tragedy andHope. NY:Macmillan, 1966.
R
*J Rae, John. The Sociological Theory of Capital. 1834. NY: MacMillan, 1905.
*Raguet, Condy. A Treatise on Currency and Banking. 1840. Repr., NY: A.M.
Kelley, 1969.
*Randall, J. G. The Civil War and Reconstruction. Boston: Heath & Co., 1937,
2nd edition 1961, edited by D. David.
*Raper, Mathew. In J.R. McCulloch's Rare and Valuable Tracts on Money.
1856. Repr., NY: A.M. Kelley, 1966.
*} Raithby, John. The Law and Principle of Money. In his letter to MP. W.
Huskisson. London: Cadell & Davies Strand, 1811.
Reddaway, T. F. The Early History of the Goldsmiths Company 1327-1509.
London: Arnold, 1975.
1 Remsburg, John E. Six Historic Americans. NY: Truth Seeker Co., 1906.
Renan, Ernest. History of the People of Israel up till the Time of King David.
Boston: Roberts, 5 vol., 1896.
*Ricardo, David. Proposals for a Secure and Economic Currency. London:
J. Murray, 1816.
* . Works. Principles of Political Economy. London: J. Murray, 1876.
*† . Plan for the Liquidation of the Public Debt. London: 1819.
* . Plan for Establishing ofa National Bank. London: J. Murray, 1824.
*$ Ridgeway, William. Origin ofMetallic Weights and Standards. Cambridge, 1892.

*Roberts, loin. Mitsui. Three Centuries ofJapanese Business. NY:Weatherhill, 1973.
*Roberts, Stephen M. The House that Hitler Built. Harper Brothers, 1938.
*Rogers, Thorold. Six Centuries of Work and Wages. London: Swan Sonnenschein,
1903.
Roosa, Robert V. Monetary Reform for the World Economy. NY: Council On
Foreign Relations, 1965.
*Roover, Raymond De. Money, Banking and Credit in Medieval Brugge.
Cambridge, 1948.
The Medici Bank, 1397-1494. New York Univ. Press, 1948.
*Rostovtzef, Mikhail. Social and Economic History of the Hellenistic World.
Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1957.
*} Roth, Cecil. Yenice. Jewish Publication Society of America, 1930.
*† . World History of the Jewish People, the Dark Ages, 711-1096.
Jerusalem: Jewish History Publications, Rutgers Univ. Press, 1966.
*I . A History of the Marranos. Jewish Publication Society ofAmerica, 1932.
* . History of the Jews ofEngland. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1941.
A Life of Menasseh Ben Isreal. Philadelphia: Jewish Publication
Society of America, 1934.
*I Rothbard, Murray. The Panic of 1819. Microfilm *ZT239, NY Res. Library.
. Conceived in Liberty. Arlington House, 1975.
*Salsman, Richard. Breaking the Banks. Great Barrington. American Institute

for Economic Research, 1990.
Salomon, Sydney. The Jews ofBritain. London: Jarrold, 1938.
Sandburg, Carl. Abraham Lincoln, the War Years. NY:Harcourt Brace, 1939.
*Schacht, Hjalmaf. Stabilization of the Mark. London: George Allen & Unwin, 1927.
* .be Magic of Money. Trans. P. Erskine. London: Oldboume, 1967.
*Schuckers, J.W. Finances and Paper Money of the Revolutionary War.
Philadelphia: John Campbell, 1874.
•Scott, Kenneth. Counterfeiting in Colonial America. Oxford Univ. Press, 1957.
Selgin, George. The Theory of Free Banking. Wash. DC: Cato Inst., Rowman
& Littlefield, 1988.
*Seltman, Charles. Greek Coins. 1933. London: Metheun, 1965.
Senchus Mor - Ancient Laws ofIreland. Dublin: Alexander Thom, 1865.
Sennholz, Hans. Gold is Money. Westport, CN: Greenwood Press, 1972.
Sharp, James R. The Jacksonions vs the Banks. NY:Columbia Univ. Press, 1970.
•Shaw, Leslie M. Current Issues. NY: Appleton & Co., 1908.
*J Shaw, W. A. The History of Currency,1252-1896. Putnams 1896. Repr., NY:
A.M. Kelley, 1967.

*} Simon, Henry C. Economic Policy For a Free Society. Univ. of Chicago
Press, 1948.
*J Smallwood, E. M. The Jews Under Roman Rule. Leiden: Brill,1981.
*Smith, Adam. The Wealth of Nations. 1776. Great Books, Encyl. Brittanica,
Univ. of Chicago Press, vol. 39, 1952.
Smith, John Holland. Constantine the Great. London: Hamish Hamilton, 1971.
*Socrates Eryxias, in Plato's Works. Jowett translation.
*{ Soddy, Frederick. Money Versus Man. NY: Dutton, 1933.
*{ . The Arch Enemy of Economic Freedom. Self published, 1943.
*† Sombart, Werner. The Jews and Modern Capitalism. Trans. Epstein. NY:
Free Press, 1951.
*† Spaulding, E. G. A Resource of War. Repr., CN: Greenwood, 1971.
* Spahr, Charles B. The Present Distribution of Wealth in the United States.
Boston: Thomas Crowell, 1896.
*Sprague, Oliver M. History of Crises Under the National Banking System.
*† Spufford, Peter. Money and its Use in Medieval Europe. Cambridge
Univ. Press, 1988.
. Monetary Problems and Policies in the Burgundian Netherlands,
1433 - 1496; Leiden: Brill, 1970.
. Handbook of Medieval Exchange. London: Royal Society Guides #
13, 1986.
*Strieder, Jacob. Jacob Fugger the Rich. Trans. Hartsough. Hamden, CN: Archon, 1966.
*} Studenski, P. & H. Kroos. Financial History of the U.S. NY:McGraw Hill, 1952.
*Sumner, William G. History ofAmerican Currency. NY: Henry Holt, 1874.
* . Essays. Yale Univ. Press, 1914.
*Sutherland, C.H.V. Coinage in Roman Imperial Policy. London: Metheun, 1951.
. Roman Coins. London: Baine & Jenkins, 1974.
T
*Tacitus. The Annals. Chicago: Great Books, Encyl. Brittanica, vol. 15, 1952.
*Taines Histoire De La Litterature Anglaise, vol. 3, 1709.
*Takaki, Masayoshi. The History of Japanese Paper Currency. Containing the
U.S. Consular report V.19, #68. John Hopkins Press, 1903
*J Tawney, R. H. The Acquisitive Society. NY: Harcourt Brace, 1920.
Taylor, A.J. The Origins of the Second World War. NY: Atheneum, 1961.
*Tcherikover, Victor; Hellenistic Civilization and the Jews. Jerusalem: Jewish
Publication Society, 1959.
•} Tewksbury, D. S. The Founding of American Colleges and Universities
Before the Civil War. NY: Columbia Univ. Teachers College, 1965.
*Thomsen, Rudi; Early Roman Coinage; Copenhagen: Nationalmuseet, 3 vol., 1961.
† Tilden, Freeman. A World in Debt. 1935. Repr., Vancouver: Friedburg, 1970.
*{ Timberlake, Richard H. The Origin of Central Banking in the United States.
Harvard Univ. Press, 1978.
*Tolstoy, Leon. Selected Works. Chicago: Great Books, Encyl. Britannica, vol. 31.
*Toppan, Robert Noxon. Paper to the Philadelphia Antiquarian Society. April, 1888.
*t Tovey, D’ Blossiers. A History of the Jews in England. 1738. Repr., London:
Weidenfeld & Nicolson, 1990.
*†Toynbee, Arnold. Hannibal's Legacy. Oxford Univ. Press, vols l& 2, 1965
Tracy, Destutt de. Treatise on Political Economy. 1817. In John M.. Dorsey's Psychology
ofPolitical Science. Center for Health Education, 1973.
Trefousse, Hans Louis. Ben Butler. NY: Twayne Publishers, 1957.
*Troelstch, Ernst. Protestantism and Progress. Trans. Montgomery. NY:
Putnam, 1912.
*Udovitch, A. L. Partnership and Profit in Medieval Islam. Princeton Univ.

Press, 1970.
*} Unger, Irwin. The Greenback Era. Princeton Univ. Press, 1964.
* U.S. 1876 Monetary Commission Report. Washington: 1876.
*Usher, A. P. The Early History ofDeposit Banking in Mediterranean Europe.
Harvard Univ. Press, 1943.
V
*$ Van Buren, Martin. Inquiry into the Origin ofPolitical Parties in the U.S. NY:Hurd
& Houghton, 1867.
*$ Van Dillen, J. G. History ofthe Principle Public Banks. International Comm. for
study of History of Banking and Credit. 1934. NY: A.M. Kelley, 1965.
* ; Die Economische Positie en Betekenis der Joden. Sescheidenid, 1576.
*Ver Steeg, Clarence L. Robert Morris Revolutionary Financier. Univ. of
Pennsylvania Press, 1954.
*Von Mises, Ludwig. Theory of Money & Credit. 1912. Capetown: J.Cape, 1934.
* . Human Action. Yale Univ. Press, 1949.
. Money, Method and the Market Process. Norwell: Praxeology, 1990.
*Wade, John. Principles of Money. London: E. Wilson, 1842.

C
Walker, Francis Amassa. International Bimetallism. NY: Holt, 1896.
*† Weber, Max. Protestant Ethic and the Spirit of Capitalism. Trans. Parsons.
NY: Scribners, 1958.
Webster, Nesta. Secret Societies and Subversive Movements. Repr., Hawthorne,
SALEC l kD BlBLlUCiRAPHY 7U7
CA (?) Christian Book Club of America, 1967, 1924

Wechsberg, Joseph. The Merchant Bankers. Boston: Little Brown, 1966.
Wenzer, Kenneth. Anthology ofHenry George’s Thought. Univ. of
Rochester Press, 1997.
*Westerman, William Llnn. Warehouse and Trapezite Banking in Antiquity.
Journal of Economic & Business History, III, 1930-31.
*{ Whipple, John. The Importance of Usury Laws - An Answer to Jeremy
Bentham (1836). Boston: Wentworth, 1850, 1857.
*White, Andrew Dickson. Fiat Money Infiation in France. NY: Foundation For
Economic Education, 1959.
White, Horace. George Smith’s Money in the Early North West. Address to Am.
Bnkrs Assoc. Oct. 19, 1893. Repr., NY: Evening Post, 1893. u.d., n.p.
White, Lawrence H. Free Banking in Britain. New York Univ. Press, 1989.
*Wilbur, E. J.& E. P. Eastman. Money - A Treatise on Counterfeit, Altered, and
Spurious Bank Notes. Poughkeepsie: Eastman Business College, 1865.
*Willis, Henry Parker. The History of the Latin Monetary Union. Univ. of
Chicago Press, 1901.
. article in the fort/i American Rreview, May, 1929.
*†Wilson, Charles. Anglo Dutch Commerce in the 18th Century. Cambridge
Univ. Press, 1941.
* . Holland and Britain. London: Collins, 1946.
The Dutch Republic. London: Weidenfeld & Nicholson,1968.
Wilson, James. Considerations on the Bank of North America. Philadelphla:
Hall and Sellers, 1785.
tWilson, Thomas. A Discourse Upon Usury (1572). Repr., NY: A.M. Kelley, 1963.
*[Witherspoon, John]. Essay on Money. 1786. Rare books room, NY Research
Library.
X
Xenophon; Memorabilia and Oeconomicus. Loeb Classical Library, Harvard
Univ. Press, 1972.
Cyropaedia. London: Bohn, 1855.
Z
*$Zarlenga, Stephen. Refutation of Menger ’s Theory of the Origin of Money.
American Monetary Institute, 1994, P.O. Box 601 Valatie, NY. 12184.
Ziemer, Patricia Erika. Two Thousand Days of Hitler. NY: Harper, 1940.
*Zimmern, A.E.. The Economic Weapon. NY: George Doran, 1913-17.
. Political Economy of Athens. Oxford: 1911.
*Zolotas, Xenephon. The Gold Trap and the Dollar. Athens: Victor Papasissus, 1968.
708
INDEX
Abd El Melik, 83-84, 100 Andreades, Andreas, 5, 267, 347; Adam
Aboriginal American money, 214-15; Smith undistinguished, 310; Bank of
mound cultures, 362 England, 278, 279, 308; English nat-
Ace, 42-43, 50 ional debt, 290, 350; Solon's reforms,
Adams, Brooks, 78 29-31; temples as banks, 15, 24
Addison, C.G., 146-47 Animals, as money, 51
Aeginatic money standard, 33 Anti-Federalists, 393
Aes, (Roman) 44-45 Antwerp, 121-23, 127
Aes grave, 49, 51, 52, 55 Aquinas, Thomas, St. 178-79, 184-85, 194
Aes rude, 44 Aristotelian Analysis of Usury, The
Aes signatum, 46, 48, 51 (Langholm), 178
Agio (at Bank of Amsterdam), 230 Aristotle, 95, 103, 180, 592, 629; nature
Agrarian Justice (Paine), 410 of money, 35-36, 56, 656; nomisma,
Agricultural commodities as money, 12, 34-35; Solon's reforms, 29-31; usury,
15, 51; colonial America, 364-65 30, 184-85, 188, 341, 343-45
Al Djawhri, 102 Arrian Heresy, 93
Al-Jahri, Mabid, Ali, 626 Articles of Confederation, 389
Aldrich, Nelson, 519, 523, 525; National AS, (Roman), 44-45, 52, 55-56
Monetary Commission, 533, 535 Asian Trade fa Antiquity (Jones), 88
Aldrich Plan, 503, 524, 525, 527 Ass, (Roman), 44-45, 73
Aldrich-Vreeland Act, 518-19, 521, 526 Assignats, (French) 446, 447-50
Alexander the Great, 17, 18, 21, 78, 87, 95 Astor, John Jacob, 417
Alison, Archibald, 173 Athelstan's Law, 253
Ambrose, St. (on usury), 182 Attic money standard, 26, 30
America: aboriginal American money, Aufricht, Hans, 610
114-15; plunder of precious metals Augsburg, 185
from, 125; see also United States Augustus, 68, 70, 72-73, 75, 88, 89
American Bankers Association, 525 “Aurea mediocrites,” 31
American Inst. for Econ. Res. (AIER), 677 Aurelean, Emperor, 91
American Monetary Institute, 6, 128, 445- Aureus (gold coin), 71-72, 75, 88
46, 664, 665-66, 681-83; mission and pur Austrian School of Economics, 4, 676-
pose, 683; sustaining memberships, 686 77; free banking, 444-45; mistaken
American Revolution, 376-86 market origin of money, 28; paper
American Society of Civil Engineers, money, 372; usury, 342
infrastructure report, 654-55 B
Amsterdam, 223-49 Bacon, Francis (on usury), 341-42
Amsterdam Stock Exchange, 238-45, 277; Bagehot, Walter, 490-01, 679
Ducatoon index future; manipulations, Baggatini (Venetian coin), 125, 218
242-43; structural flaws, 243. Baigent, Michael: freemasonry, 149;
Ancient Coins and Medals (Humphreys), 41 Knights Templar, 141, 146, 148
Ancient Economic /;ffSforr (Heichelheim), 13 Balfour, Arthur (and WWI), 576-77
Ancient Oriental System, 12, 13, 33 Bank for International Settlements, 606-09,619
Ancus Marcius, King, 45 Bank holidays (1930’s), 556
Anderson, Benjamin, 503 Bank of Amsterdam, 228-33, 277-83;
INDEX 709
owned by city, 228-33 Baring Brothers, 408, 422, 501-02

Bank of England, 93, 277-88, 305-06, 479, Baring, Francis, 284, 288
605, 633; American monetary policy Barter, 9, 10-11, 79; in colonial America,
and, 539-40, 543; charter, 283-84; 364; England, 252
Church of England leads to its national- Bartolus, 178
ization, 571-72; promotes commodity Barton, William (bank proposal), 397, 423
theory of money, 278; contraction of Baruch, Bernard, 539, 541
money supply, 330-31; limited convert- Basileus (controlled money), 78, 83, 112,
ibility of notes, 320; Federal Reserve 114, 132, 177; banking, 127; gold
System compared, 525-26, 527, 528, coinage, 84, 120, 145; gold/silver ratio,
533; failure, 285; goldsmiths' attack on, 100, 101, 144
286; and Irish potato famine, 301-02; Beach, W.E. (on gold standard), 605
Marx on the Bank, 351-52; monetary Beecher, Henry Ward, 473
reforms, 346-47; held the money power, Behemoth (Hobbes), 256-57
282, 287-88, 311, 313, 315, 327-28, 391; Belloc, Hilaire, 92, 194, 197, 252
nationalization of, 571-72; opposition Belmont, August, 487, 489, 498, 508
to, 283, 284-85, 286, 287-88, 340; Bentham, Jeremy, supports usury, attacks
Paine's attacks on, 410; causes Panic of Aristotle, 342-46, 359
1907, 517; privatizes the money power, Bentinct, George, 302
277-88; Smith supports it, 320, 324, Bentsen, Lloyd, 469
327-28, 297, 407, 410; and usury, 278, Berkeley, George, 317, 316-18, 358;
336, 340; and war, 290-91 “double money,” 670; accurate on the
Bank of North America, 390-91, 403 nature of money, 657
Bank of Sweden, 277 Bernardine, St. (on usury) , 183
Bank of the United States (1st, 1791-1881), Bezant, 78, 96-97, 137, 144, constant
403-09, 434, 435-36; Bank of the United weight caused deflation, 96-98
States (2nd, 1816-1836), 416-19, 434, Bible, 198-203, 286-87, 679-80
437-38, 454 Bibliolatry, 198-99, 203, 679-80; destroys
Bank reserves: minimum reserves, 636; civilization 286-87; destroys the mind
100% reserve solution, 671-74; see also 198-99
Fractional reserve banking Biddle, Nicholas, 419, 423, 424, 425, 467
Bank Von Leening (Amsterdam), 231 “Billon” (medieval coins), 157
Bankhead-Jones Farm Tenant Act, 559 Bills of credit, 367-69, 370, 373, 378, 415
Banking, 504; closing of banks, 556; and Bills of exchange, 158-59, 162
competition, 514; Greece, 29; money Bimetallism, 482, 498, 503; see also
power, 161-63, 320, 403-05; money Currency Act of March 14, 1900; Pre-
changers, 158, 167, 168-69; Safety cious metals; Gold standard; Silver
Fund System, 442; “SuiTolk system,” question
441; state-owned banks, 161; suppres- Bismarck, Otto, 483
sion by Byzantium, 146; temples as, Black Friday (May 11, 1866), 486
14, 15, 24, 70, 79; Venice , 127-28; see Black money (medeival), 157
also specific headings, e.g.: Bank of Black, Eugene, 622
England; Deposit banks; Free banking; B1ackwe11, John, 366
Private banks Bland Allison Act, 500, 501
Banking panics, 669-70 Block, Raymond (on Rome), 42
Bannister, Saxe, 280, 290 Blondeau, Pierre, coin machine, 266
Barbour, Violet, 236-37, 246, 267 Bloom, Herbert, 215-16, 229, 234, 235,
710 Index
237, 245 Calvin, John, 192-99, 203, 473; bibliola-

Blunt, John (South Sea Co ), 299 try, 199; usury, 188, 191, 196, 203,
Boeckh, Augustus, 17-18, 33 340, 344
Böhm-Bawerk, Eugen von, 189 Calvinism, 93, 398, 472
Bond, Nicolas, 231 Camera De’ 1 Imprestidi, 127, 128
Book of the Prefekt (Byzantine), 96 Campbell, Alexander, 475
Bordo, Michael, 614 Cantillon, Philip, 289, 485
Bourse (Brugge), 167 Capital, (Marx), 349-55, 358
Boxer, C.R., 221, 223 Capitalism, 201-02; Jewish capitalism,
Bradley, Justice, (money decision), 471 201; pariah capitalism, 201, 202;
Breck, Samuel, 385, 386 Puritan capitalism, 201 ; Thesis of, 336,
Breckenridge, Sarah, 254 341-45, 347-48
Bretton Woods Conference, 609, 614, 620 Carey, Henry, 460
British East India Company, 269, 271-73, 299 Carlisle, John G., 485
British Monetary Experiments Carthage, 55-56, 63-64
(Horsefield), 279 Catterall, Ralph, 417, 437
Brock, Leslie, 369-70 Cattle, as money, 10, 11, 16-17, 19, 20
Bronze money, 41; AS, 44, 52, 55; bars, Cavalli (Venetian coin), 125, 218
46, 48; coins, 54, 55, 73; Nomisma, Cellorigo, Gonzalez de, 217
39, 40; see also Copper money “Census,” (medieval loan form), 181
Brugge, 167-69, 172-74 Central Bank of Japan, 484
Brutus, 69 Central banks, 415-17, 523, 599, 604;
Bryan, William Jennings, 510, 524, 528, 537 international central bank, 609; moneti
Bucer, Martin, 191 zation of debt, 635; private banks, 518-
Buchanan, James, President, 454 19; see also specific headings, e.g.:
Buckle, T. H. 329 Federal Reserve System; International
Buddhism, 214 Monetary Fund
Bullion. See Precious metals Cernushi, Henri, 482, 498, 500
Bullock, Charles J. 377; Coinage Act of Chamberlain, Houston Stuart, 591-92
1873, 497; commodity view of Chamberlain's Land Bank, 284-85
money, 374, 459; free banking, 438; Champagne trade fair and flat coin, 152
on the Greenbacks, 459-60, 486 Charlemagne (revives coinage), I 10-14,
Bundesbank, 597-98, 638 129, 134; and papacy, 112
Burnett, Andrew, 52, 60, 62, 73; Aes Charles II, King of England, 266-67
grave, 50; Roman demonetization, 56; Charles-Picard, Colette, and Gilbert, 55
Romano coins, 54; silver drain, 88-89 Chase, Salmon P., 455, 457, 464, 469, 471
Burudian, 184 Checks, 158-59, 162
Bush, Neil, 470 Chevelier, Michel, 481
Butler, Andrew Pickens, 399 Childs, Francis, 286
Butler, Benjamin Franklin, 402, 475, 509 Chopra, M.U., 624-25, 626
Byzantium. 141-45, 151. Also see Basileus Chrematism, 186
c Christianity, 78; Crusades, 118-20, 131-
Caesar, Julius, 67-68, 69, 71-72, 73, 76, 49; and Moslems, 137-38; see also
102; prohibition on hoarding, 89 Religion; Scholastics
Calhoun, George M., 32-33 Church of England, 251, and nationaliza-
Calhoun, J.C., 416 tion of Bank of England, 571-72
California gold rush, 119, 347 Cicero, 31, 69, 70
INDEX 711
Civil War, 455, 464, 486; see also Banking System of the United States
Confederate money; Greenbacks (Gallatin), 421.
Clark, John, 437 Constantine the Great, 78
“Classical economics”, 33, 43, 102; mis- Constantinople, 141-45, 151
named, 102-03 Constitutional Convention, 393-402;
Clay, Henry, 416, 467 avoids money question, 396; inade-
Clay, Lucius, 597 quately defines money power, 394
Clay money, 45 Continental currency, 40, 96, 377-86, 434, 447;
Clearance mechanism (Fairs), 152 British counterfeiting, 380-81, 382, 460
Cobbett, William, 336-37 Convergence (European monetary), 633-34
Coin clipping, 120-21, 260-62, 266, 278- Cook, Jay, 492
79, 481, 482 Cooper, Peter, 509, 512
Coinage, 153, 514-15; “debasement,” 156- Cope, H.L., 78
57; colonial America, 364, 374; deriva Copper, 17; see also Bronze
tion of word, 22; free coinage law, 233; Copper money, 33, 40, 41, 51, 218;
Greece, 16, 21-24; “intrinsically valable Brugge, 168; Indian money, 113;
coinage,” 28-29; overvaluation, 51-52, Italy, 125, 218; Mexico, 214; see also
62, 65, 126, 127; private issue, 61-62; Bronze money
recoinage, 285; “tree coinage,” 366; Cosmas (medieval monk), 97-98
United States, 409; see also specific Cost-of-living index, 463
headings, e.g: Denarius; Gold coins; Counterfeiting: Assignats, 449; colonial
Roman monetary system rrioney, 372-73; Continental Currency,
Coins, Bodies, Games and t3old(Kurke), 34 380-81, 382, 460; Greenbacks, 454,
Coin's Financial School (Harvey), 498-99 460; punishment for, 96, 373
Coke, Lord, 343 Country pay period, 364-65
Collegenza (partnerships), 116, 181 Coxey, Jacob, 509-10
Columbus, Christopher, 210-11 Craggs, James, 300-01
Commodity money, 14, 109, 188, 395, Craig, John, 252
599, 670-71; Bank of England pro- Crawford, Michael, 56, 60, 62-63, 69-70, 73
motes , 278; Charlemagne, 129; colo- “Crime of 73”, 495
nial America, 364-65; Jevons, 356, Cromwell, Oliver (as Messiah), 263-64
357; Marx, 349, 355; private banking “Cross of gold” speech, 510-12
and, 335; redeemability into commodi- Crusades, 118-20, 131-49
ty, 157; Roman money mistaken as, 51- Currency. See Money
52, 56, 57-59, 60, 62, 63, 65, 100, 105; Currency Act (1764), 375
Smith, 335, 349, 357, 404, 530; Smith Currency Act of March 14, 1900, 515-16
promotes commodity money, 313; Currency of the American Colonies,
United States, 400, 402, 404, 409-10, 1700-1764, The (Brock), 369-70
411, 426 Currency question. See Bimetallism;
Commodity price indexes, 462-63 Deflation; Gold standard; Inflation;
Conant, Charles, 437, 468, 502 Legal tender; Paper money; Precious
Conditionality (IMF), 617 metals; Silver question
Confederate money, 447, 465-66 Cyprus, slaughter of the Greeks, 89
Confusion de Confusiones (De La Vega), Cyrene, slaughter of the Greeks, 89
242 D
Consecration process (coinage), 18-19 Dandolo, Andrea, 124, 125
Considerations on the Currency and Dandolo, Enrico, 120, 122, 142, 144
712 Index
Dante (Inferno & usurers), 184 monetary system, 100-02; National

Dawes, Charles Gates, 579, 589 Monetary Commission, 519; national
Dawes Plan, 579-80, 589 ization of money, 604; nature of money,
De Brunhoff, Suzanne, 352 657; “nummulary system,” 31-33;
De Fremery, Robert, 672; credit is not nomisma, 61; precious metals, 219; re-
money, 663, 670; demonetization of monetization of silver, 500; Roman
gold, 595-96; gold standard, 659; monetary system, 51, 52, 54, 59, 79,
money supply, 549; 100% reserves, 674 91; silver demonetization, 485; Smith,
De Gaulle, Charles, 612, 648 315; study of monetary history, 4;
De Koopman, 246 Sumner's influence on, 459; trade of
De La Vega, Joseph, 235, 240, 242, 244 Venice, 118; The World, 487, 488, 489
De Lugo, John, 180 Dempsey, Bernard, 178
De Mai, Louis, 155 Denarius, 56-59, 61-62, 88, 89; Venice,
De Molay, Jacques, 148 120-21
De Moneta (Otesme), 308-09 Denationalisation of Money (Hayek),
De Roover, Raymond, 153, 157, 161, 443, 445-46, 568, 641
162, 173 Deposit banking, 128; Barcelona, 161;
De Vries, Margaret G., 613-14, 616 Catalonia, 158; see also Amsterdam
Debt. See Interest; Loans Bank
Decker, Matthew, 228, 300 Depression (1929). 548-52
Decline and Fall of the English System of Desha, , 413
Finance, The (Paine), 292, 470 Deutsche Bank, 576
Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire, Deutsche Bundesbank, 597-98, 638
The (Gibbon), 89, 91-92, 93 Deutsche Mark, 597
Deflation, 479-80, 659, 673; Brugge, 172- Dewey, Davis Rich, 464, 479-70
73; England, 347; Japan, 484-85; and Dewey, Thomas E., 527
100% reserves, 672-73; Rome, 105; Dewolf, Lyman E., 474
United States 484-85, 495-97, 502-03, 556 Dickens, Charles, 339
Defoe, Daniel, 294 Dickeson, M.W., 362, 363, 376
Del Mar, Alexander, 59, 177, 218, 522; Dillaye, Stephen (refutes White's dial
aboriginal money, 114-15, 362-64; Aes Money Infiation in France), 448-50
grave, 50; Charlemagne, 114; Civil War Dinar (Moslem coin), 100, 101, 102, 137
bonds, 486; coinage issued by Hadrian, Diocletian, Emperor, 76-77, 96;Price
112; colonial money, 367-68, 369, 374, Edicts (Cope), 78
377; continental currency, 378; debase Dionysius, 50
ment of coinage, 155-56; demonetiza Dionysius of Halicarnassus, 48
tion of silver, 495-96, 497-98; defintion Dirhem (Moslem coin), 100, 101, 102
of money, 661; ecclesiastics, 112; fall Discourse upon Usury, A (Wilson), 196
of Rome, 93-94; Free Coinage Act, Disraeli, Benjamin, 251, 338, 339
269, 270; gold and silver coinage, 515; Division of labor, 311
gold coinage prerogative, 83; gold Dobbs, Arthur, 376
coins issued with Byzantine markings, Dollar, 647, 648; foreign exchange, 646;
114; gold/silver ratio, 85, 86-87, 90; dominates IMF, 611-12
“intrinsically” valuable coinage, 28; Dollinger, Philip, 171, 172, 173
limitation of issue, 62; Mixt Moneys of Double entry bookkeeping, 157
Ireland case, 155; monetary result of Douglas, Paul (on bank reform), 560, 672
Constitutional Convention, 400-02; Douglas, William, 369
money as legal institution, 43; Moslem “Dry exchange bills,” 159, 187
INDEX 713
Dual trading problem, 241-42 Feder, Gottfried, 590-91, 592-96, 599

Duane, William, 425 Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation
Ducat (Venetian), 122, 123, 171 (FDIC), 531, 561
Ducatoon (Dutch), 239, 240, 243-45 Federal Reserve Act, 519, 524, 525, 536;
Duisenberg, Willem F., 649-50 attempt to repeal, 664-65
Dury, John, on Jewish question, 263-64 Federal Reserve Conspiracy, The
Dutch East India Company, 223, 231, (Mullins), 522-23
232, 238, 239, 248, 277 Federal Reserve System, 508, 319-33,
Dutch West India Company, 215, 234 -35 535-50, 559, 560-61, 567, 572, 661,
E 669; not audited, 633; Bank of England
Eagle, Joe H., 524 compared, 525-28, 533; European
Early Roman Coinage (Thomsen), 48, 60-61 Central Bank compared, 644; fractional
Eastman, E.P., 454 reserve banking system, 530-31, 536,
Eccles, Marriner, 527, 554 552; gold standard, 538; money cre-
Eck, John, on usury, 188 ation, 288; proposed nationalization of,
Economic Activities of the Jews of 664-65; reform of, 663-64; regional
Amsterdam (Bloom), 215-16 banks, 536
Economic History of Rome (Frank), 40 Federal budget (myth), 654
“Economic man,” really a monster, 329-30 Federalist Papers, 402
Economics, destroys mental processes, 318; Federalists, 393
removes moral considerations, 177-78, Fenton, Roger (on usury), 196
195-97, 307 Ferguson, William S., 68
Ehrenberg Richard, 154, 160, 166, 221 Nfaf Money Inflation In France (White),
Einzig, Paul, 11, 540, 608 446, 447
Eisenhower, Dwight, (blocks reform) 674 Fiat money, 20, 22, 32, 33, 447;
Electrum coinage, 24, 27, 28 Aristotle's support of, 34; bank money
Ellsworth, Oliver, 399 as, 162; favored by Plato, 35; Greece,
England, 251-74, 336-40; see also Bank 25, 26, 31-33; Jevons, 357; limitation
of England; Great Britain of issue necessary, 62; Paine, 410;
English National Bank (Proposed), 287 Rome, 51, 56; and rule of law, 110;
Enron Corporation, collapse of, 681 United States, 362; Venice, 116, 127,
Equestrian Order (Rome), 65 129; see also Currency question; Legal
Ernst, Joseph Albert, 370, 377 tender; Nomisma; Numerary system;
Essays on Money (Law), 397 Paper money
Euobic money standard, 26 Financial History of the United Stafes
Euro, 637, 641, 646-50 (Studenski and Kroos), 465
European Central Bank (ECB), 630-39 Fisher, Irving, 672; usury, 189
632; Federal Reserve compared, 644 Fisher, Sydney George, 460
European Community, 630 5% Contract (usury avoidance), 188
European Monetary Institute (EMI), 631, 639 Floating exchange rates, 612
European Monetary Union, 400, 598-99, Florence, 159-60, 188
630-50; fractional reserves, 637-38 Florin (coin), 122
European System of Central Banks Forbonnais, M., 218
(ESCB), 630-35, 642-43, 638, 639 Forgery. See Counterfeiting
Foundations of the Nineteenth Century,
F The (Chamberlain), 591-92
Faridi, 625 Foxwell, H.S. (on suppressing history), 308
Feaveryear, A.E., 266, 331
714 Index
Fractional reserve banking: European Gesell, Silvio, 279

Monetary Union, 637-38; Federal GI Bill, 566
Reserve System, 530-31, 536, 552; Gibbon, Edward, 89, 93; coinage crisis,
loan creation through, 636 91-92; Jewish revolt, 89, 103-04
Frank, Tenney, 41, 94-95; debasement of Girard, Stephen (slave trader finances 2nd
currency not cause of Roman fall, 91; Bank of the United States) 413, 417
Julius Caesar, 68 Giro banks, 128
Tiberius Gracchus, 68; Roman mone Glass, Carter, 523-24
tary system, 54, 59, 75-76 Glass-Steagall Act, 562
Franklin, Benjamin, 149; counterfeiting of Godfrey, John, 142
Continental money, 380; labor theory of Godfrey, Michael, 279, 283
value, 350; money supply, 660; nature of Godolphin, Sidney, 293
money, 315, 396, 657; paper money Gold, 494; as fiat money, 20; commodity
necessary, 4, 371-72, 375, 377, 385-86 value, 20; demonetization, 40, 41, 480-
Frazer, James George, 64, 71, 92-93, 358, 81; Greenbacks and, 460, 462; inflation,
359, 680 538; monetization of, 17-22; 130 grain
Free banking, 659-60; United States, 438-45 standard, 25, 27; valuation, 19, 20, 60
Free Coinage Act (1666), 269-71, 277, 352 Gold coinage, 114; Charlemagne, 114;
Free coinage law (16th century), 233 consecration process, 19-20; England,
Free trade, 328-29; and monetary policy, 253-54; Greece, 26-29; Moslems, 83-
311; trade fairs, 152 84; Rome, 59-60, 69-70; sacred prerog-
Freeman, Kathleen, S ative, 83-85, 90-91; Venice, 122
Freemasonry, 148-49 Gold inflations, 102-03, 216-17, 351, 538
Friedman, Milton, 200, 523, 549; Federal Gold Reserve Act (1934), 561
Reserve System, 524, 526, 538; free Gold/silver ratio, 20, 208, 248;
banking. 660; money supply, 503; Byzantium, 114, 121-22; Charlemagne,
Panic of 1907, 518, 519; Stock Market 115; collapse of, 563; east/west
Crash, 550; Treasury, 517 dichotomy, 82-83, 85-88, 105, 147,
Fryer, Lee, 559 157, 218, 220, 223, 271, 482-83;
Fugger, Hans Jakob, 165, 177 England, 253-54; France, 155; Holland,
Fugger, Jakob, II, 163, 167 248, 265; India, 116, 218; Moslem
Fuggers, 163-66, 188, 576 monetary system, 101-02; refutes polit-
G ical economy, 102, 498-500, 563;
Galbraith, John Kenneth, 464 Rome, 72, 83, 85, 89, 105; Venice, 121-
Gallatin, Albert, 410, 411, 412, 414 22, 123-24
Gallatin, Robert, 421-22 Gold standard: not automatic, 544; Cross
Gallienius, Gratian, Emperor, 98 of gold speech, 510-12; causes defla-
Garrison, Ely, 523, 525, 527 tion, 480, 484-85; England, 542-48;
George, Henry, 318; “economic man” a international standard, 605-09 Rome,
monster, 329-30; study of economics 71, 74, 76; United States, 515-16, 518,
destroys the mind, 318; metallic money 538, 554, 561, 604, 658-59
unnecessary, 659; money power, 504, Gold Trap and the Dollar, The (Zolotas),
512, 673; Smith's selfishness error, 329- 612-13
30; single tax, 674 Golden Bough, The (Frazer) 64, 71, 92-
Gerboux, M., 218 93, 358, 680
German Contract (usury avoidance), 188 Goldsmiths, 267-69, 286
Germany, 575-600 Gonzales, Henry, 567; proposed repeal of
INDEX 715
Federal Reserve Act, 664-65 Harley, James, 293, 294

Gordon, Patrick, 373 Harris, Joseph, 374
Gorham, , 400 Harvey, W.H., 498-99
Gospels—Their Origfn and Their Harwood, Edward C., 677
Growth, The (Grant), 198 Harwood, William R., 93, 259
Gouge, William, 438-40, 441, 442, 444 Hasebroek, Johannes, 24-25
Graham, Frank D., 672 HayeL Friedrich von, 443, 445, 446, 568, 641
Grant, Frederick, C., 64, 198 economists as propagandists, 445
Grant, Michael, 73-74, 88 Hayes, Rutherford, 494, 500
Grant, Ulysses, 489, 492-93 Hazlitt, Henry, 446, 447
Great Britain, 640-41; see also England Heathcote, Gilbert, 293-94
Great Depression, 548-52 Heichelheim, Fritz, 12, 13, 14, 16, 29
Greece, 16-48 Heiden, Conrad, 593, 595
Greek Coins (Kraay), 24 Heileges Geld (Laum), 11
Greenback Era, The (Unger), 472 Helfferich, Karl, 584, 585, 587
Greenbacks, 40, 450, 453-67, 476-77, Helps, Arthur, Sir, 210, 211-12
492, 507, 512, 595; as permanent sys Henderson, M.I., 65
tern, 475, 489, 509; and gold, 460, 462; Henry of Ghent, 185
and creditors, 466-67; counterfeiting, Henry, Frederick (Amsterdam), 240
454, 460; limitation of issue, 456-57, Henry, Robert L., 524
462; removal, 489-90; opposition to, Hepburn vs. Griswold (Greenbacks), 471
470-74, 489-92, 504; and war, 455; Herodotus, 16, 19, 21-22, 34
White's attack on, 447-48, Hicks, John D., 510
Greenspan, Alan, 504, 567-68, 673, 678 Hirobumi, Ito, 484
Grenville, , 375 Historical Inquiry into the Production
Gresham, Thomas, Sir, 212 and ConsuiTIf)tfOn of PrecYous Metals,
Gresham's “law,” 41, 120, 121, 309 The (Jacob), 97, 350-51
Grierson, Philip, 60, 97, 101, 102 History of the Jews ofEngland (Roth), 259
Groat (Brugge coin), 168 History of Currenc y, 1251-1896, The
Groseclose, Elgin, 545 (Shaw), 271 , 482
Grosso (Venetian), 120-21, 123-34, 126 HfStOry ofEconomic Thought (Haney) 345
Guillebaud, C.W., 597 History of Europe (Alison), 273
Gulliver, David, 423 History ofJapanese Paper Currency, The
H (Takaki), 484
Hadrian, Pope, 112 History of Rome (Mommsen), 84
Hale, Horatio, 364 History of the Bank of England, The
Hallam, , 154 (Andreades), 278, 308
Hamilton, Alexander, 393, 413, 421; HfStory of the Jews OfBabylon
Bank of United States, 407, 408; gov (Neusner), 90
ernment bonds, 405; money power, History of the Precious Metals, A (Del
399, 402-03; proposes national bank, Mar), 219
390, 467, 403, 406; promotes national History Of the Principle Public Banks
debt, 408, 411 (Van Dillen), 228
Hamilton, Earl J., 672 Hitler, Adolf, 597
Haney, Charles, 345 Hobbes, Thomas, 198-99, 256-57
Hanseatic League (Hansa), 169-74 Hochstetters of Augsburg, 166-67
Hardy, C.C., 550-51 Holdsworth, John Thom: Bank of the
716 Index
United States, 405-06, 408, 413; 621-22

Morris, 391 International Monetary Fund, 609-19;
Hollis, Christopher, 266-68, 274, 337-38, Special Drawing Rights (SDR), 604,
340; Irish potato famine, 302; pro 616, 618
gressive theory of history, 310; Irish potato famine, 288, 301-02
Walpole, 309 Iron money, 31-33; Byzantium, 33;
Holzer, Henry, 196-97 Sparta, 31-33, 39, 41, 357
Hoover, Herbert, 553, 554 Islam. See Moslems
Horsefield, J. Keith, 279, 286 Israel, Jonathan, 229
Howe, , 456 J
Hudson, Michael, 13-14 Jackson, Andrew, 394, 454; Bank of the
Hull, Cordell, 536 United States, 421, 422-25, 426
Hull, John, 366 Jacob, William, 86, 97, 145, 216-17, 218,
Hume, David, 326-27, 413, 421 350-5 l
Humphreys, Henry Noel, 41 James, Marquis, 425
Hurgronge, C.S., 624 Janus/oath scene Roman coin, 59
Hutchinson, Governor, 374-75 Japan, 484-85
Hyperinflation (German, under a private Jefferson, Thomas, 382, 383, 403-04,
central bank) 579-83 408, 410-13, 434, 435; Bank of the
United States, 408, 436; money power,
Imperial Constantinople (Miller), 85 394; comes to understand money, 410-12
Importance of Usury Laws, The Jenkins, , 60
(Whipple), 345 Jerome, St., 182
“Impot unique,” (Physiocrats) 674 Jevons, Stanley, 355-38
Imprestidi loans, (Venice) 127, 128 Jew in the Medieval Community, The
In Defence of Usury (Bentham), 342, 346 (Parkes), 134, 257-59
Income tax, 532 Jews and Modern CapftalisiTi, The
Independent Treasury System, 426 (Sombart), 220
Indian wampum, 363-64 Jews, 146, 158, 349; in Amsterdam, 234;
Inflation, 480; Civil War, 464-65; accounts at Bank of Amsterdam, 229;
Germany, 575, 579-89; and gold, 538 and Amsterdam Stock Exchange, 238;
Innes, A. Mitchell, 530 Amsterdam's Ashkenazi/Sephardic pop-
Innocent IV, Pope, 137, 183 ulation, 229; and Calvinism, 93, 195-96;
Inquiry into the Origin and Course of coin clipping, 261-62; Cromwell as
Political Parties in the United States Messiah, 263; and drain of precious
(Van Buren), 392-93 metals eastward, 75; expulsion from
Interest, 158-59; Adam Smith and, 323-24; England, 262; Medieval Jewish Char-
agricultural loans, 12, 13, 14, 29-31; ters, 258-62; financing William III'dof
impossibility of long term compound Orange's revolution, 272; forbidden
interest, 346; Lombard pawnbrokers, from engaging in banking, 229; arrive
161; and risk, 158, 181; see also Usury in New York, 235; and pirate booty,
Interest rates, 12; negative interest rate, 279 235; responsibility to develop rational
International Bank for Reconstruction U.s. mideast policy, 681; revolt against
and Development, IBRD, 620 Rome and massacre of the Greeks, 89,
International Development Association, i 03-04; short selling and Ducatoon
IDA, 621-22 trading, 240; slave trade, 134-35;
International Finance Corporation, IFC, Spinoza ostiacized, 238; trading, 132,
INDEX 717
134; usury, 181-82, 196, 258- (Raithby), 319

62; war profiteering, 236 Law, John, 10 ftnote, 294-98, 312, 313,
Jones, A.H.M., 88 446, 662; quantity of money, 325-25
Jones, William, 417 Le Bel, Philip, 177
Juillard vs. Greenman (Greenbacks), 490 Leather money, 45, 125
Julius Caesar. See Caesar, Julius Leffingwell, 540
Just Price, 177-79 Legal tender, 288, 456; animals as, 51;
Justinian, Emperor, 83-84 colonial America, 366; see also Fiat
K money
Kahn, R.F., 185-86 Leigh, Richard: freemasonry, 149;
Keith, , 370-71 Knights Templar, 141, 146, 148
Kemerer, Edwin M., 536-37 Lenormant, François, 33, 50, 84
Kerr, Michael, 493 Leo the Great, Pope, 182
Kettle, T.P., 455 Leo XIII, Pope, 569
Keynes, John Maynard, 554-55, 559-60, Lerner, Eugene M., 465, 466
596; international central bank, 609; Lessius, Leonard, 178
International Monetary Fund, 616 LETS (Local Exchange Tiading System), 660
King, Wilford I., 672 Levantine Trading Company, 234
Knapp, George Friedrich, 4, 482, 590-91; Lex Aternia Tarpeia, 50, 51, 60
nature and definition of money, 657, 661 Libertarians, 10 ftnote, 676, 677-78, 680;
Knights of Christ, 207 see also Austrian School of Economics
Knights Templar, 134, 141, 145-49, 157, Lincoln, Abraham, 457-58
162, 207, 605; suppression of, 124, 147-48 List, Friedrich, 320, 328-29
Knights Templar, The (Addison), 146-47 Liverpool, Lord, 482
Knox, John Jay, 392, 416, 437, 450 Livy, 19, 41, 42, 51, 61
Knox vs. Lee (Greenbacks), 471, 490 Loans: Ancient Oriental System, 12, 13;
Kolko, Gabriel, 512-14, f19, 521, 524 through fractional reserve banking,
Kraay, Kolin, 24, 60 636; pawnbrokers, 161, 167; see also
Kroos, H., see Studenski Interest; Usury
Kurke, Leslie, 34 Local Exchange Tiading System (LETS), 660
Locke, John, 228, 273, 324-25; gold/sil-
L ver ratio, 90, 219-19, 271; labor theory
Labor theory of value, 350, Franklin and of value, 315, 350; money as pledge for
Locke, 350, 396; Marx, 350; Smith, 313- wealth, 396; nature of money, 657
315, 350 Lombard, Alexander, 185
Land banks, 366, Chamberlains, 284-85 Lombards, 161
Lane, Frederick Chapin, 115, 121, 122, Longworth, Phillip, 115
123, 124, 127 Lords of Trade and Plantations, 373-74,
Langholm, Odd, 178 375-76
Lansing, Robert, 578 Louis the Pious, 114
Latham, Alfred, 499 Lowndes, William, 283
Latifundia (Roman), 66, 92 Lus, Simon, (banker) 229
Latin Federation (Rome's), 46, 54 Luther, Martin, 189-92, 193, 203
Latin Monetary Union, 473, 479 Lycurgus (of Sparta), 31-33, 39, 357
Laughlin, J. Laurence, 356, 415, 437, Lyons, Adelaide, 472
521, 524
Laum, Bernard, 11, 24
M
Law and Principle of Money, The Maclay, William, 409
Macleod, Henry Dunning, 288
718 Index
Madison, James, 391, 394, 402, 437; cen Mezzodenaro, 120

tral bank, 416 Michieli, Doge, 125, 127
Magic of Money, The (Schacht), 583 Midas legend, 22-23, 87
Maitland, John, 328 Mill, John Stuart, 327
Malthus, Thomas, 315-17, 325 Miller, Adolph, 543-44
Manasseh Ben Israel, 237, 238, 262-264 Miller, Dean, 85
Mandeville, Bernard, 325 Milne, J.G., 33, 45, 60
Marathon, 90 Mints, 154-56, 252-53; Athens, 25; deri-
Marble, Manton, 487, 489, 493, 498 vation of word, 22; Hull's mint in
Mark, 171, 581-89 Massachusetts, 366; Smith, 311-12;
Mars/Eagle (Roman coin series), 59 Venice, 121; see also Coinage
Marx, Karl, 348-53; Bank of England, Minturno coin hoard, 61
351; commodity money, 349, 355; Mississippi Company, 295-97
industry versus labor, 352-54; labor Mitchell, Charles E., 549
theory of value, 350-51; money supply, Mitchell, Wesley, 462-64
351; paper money, 350; private money, Mite (Brugge coin), 168
352; public debt, 351-52; Smith and, Mitsui group, 484
349-51, 355, 359; socialism, 354-55 Mixt Moneys ofIreland Case, 255, 311, 350
Marshall Plan, 566 Mohammed, 103, 197, 623-24
Mason, , 399 Mohammett and Charlemagne (Pirenne), 94
Massachusetts, 367-69 Molesworth, Lord, 300-01
Mattingly, Harold, 60, 61, 73, 84 Mommsen, Theodore, 51, 84
Mayhew, N.S., 156 “Moneta,” 313
McCarthy, Terence, 349 Monetary Crimes, 487
McCulloch, J.R. 489-90 Monetary History of the United States, A
McFadden, Louis T., 543-44, 560 (Friedman and Schwartz), 523
McIeneghan, Blair, 384-85 Monetary policy, 2-3; reform, 656, 658-
McLane, Louis, 425 84; see also Money supply
McNeal, John T., 398 Monetary Research Institute, 545
Measure of Value, The (Malthus), 315-17 Money: as accounting tool, 13-14;
Medicis, 159-60 ancient oriental system, 12-15; as
Medieval Cfifes (Pirenne), 183 assignable debt, 661; credit as, 661;
MEFO transactions, 596-97 definition, 313, 395, 656-57; derivation
Meir, Robert, 617-18 of word, 56-57; differs from credit, 322;
Melanchton, Philipp, 191 institutional origin of, 26, 84, 395;
Mellon, Andrew, 546 intrinsic value unnecessary, 28, 319,
Melville, Lewis, 298 356, 397; nationalization of, 604 ; of
Memminger, Christopher, 465 account, 110, 122, 123; origins of, 9-12,
Menasseh Ben Israel, 262, 263, 264 16, 20-21; see also specific headings,
Menger, Carl, 26-27, 28, 567, 676; refuta- e.g.: Commodity money; Paper money
tion of Menger’s Theory of the Origin Money and POlftics in America, 1755-1775
of Money, 36, endnote 6 (Ernst), 370
Merchant banks, 167 Money in Ancient Countries (Del Mar), 59
Merchant of Venice (Shakespeare), 341, 651 Money in Ancient Rome (Peruzzi), 43, 44
Metallism. See Commodity money Money power, 2-3, 9, 288; and banks, 161-
Mexican monetary system, 214 63, 518; W.J. Bryan, 510; P. Cooper,
Meyer, Eugene, Jr., 539, 550 509; European Community, 630, 634-37;
INDEX 719
Henry George, 504; Greece, 24-25; Currency, The (Franklin), 372

personalized by Morris, 385-91; Smith, Neilson, Francis, 576, 577
320-21, 419; United States, 389-429, Nettleton, A.B., 473
Van Buren, 392; 518, 538; Wilson, 528 Neusner, Jacob, 90
Money supply, 98, 357-38, 410; Locke, New London Society for Trade and
324-25; Rome, 62-63; Smith, 313-14; Commerce, 366
United States, 536, 538, 564 New York Board of Trade, 490
Moneychangers, 158, 167, 168-69 New York Stock Exchange, 439-40, 492;
Moneylenders, 122, 157-68, 161; see also closing, 538-39
Fuggers; Loans Newell, , 61
Monnaes de Antiqufia (Lenormant), 84 Newton, Isaac, 298
Monnaes noire, 157 Nietzsche, Friedrich, 678
Montagu, Charles, 279-81 Niles, Hezekia, 438
“Monte Nuevo” bonds (Venice), 127 Nisab (Islamic), 625
“Monte Vecchio” bonds (Venice), 127 Nitti, Francisco, 578
Montesquieu, Charles De, 321-22 Nixon, Richard, 612
Montezuma's treasure, 214 Noble, 253-54
Morality, and economics, 177-78, 195-97, 307 Nomisma, 34-35, 145, 357; Byzantium,
Morgan, George, 490 78-79; England, 278; limitation of
Morgan, J.P., 512-13, 523 issue, 62; Rome, 105; Sparta, 39, 45;
Morgantina coin hoard, 61 Venice, 125
Morgenthau-Tannenbaum plan, 597 Noonan, John, 180, 181, 183, 187
Morris, Robert, personalizes the money Norman, Montagu, 540, 541
power, 385, 389-91, 399 Northcote, Strafford, 486
Moslems, 95-96, l 11-12, 114, 116, 197; Nonhern Securities, 523
and Christians, 138; and Crusades, 118, Noumismata, 50
132-34, 137-40; monetary system, 100- Numa Pompilious, King of Rome, 40, 41,
01, 103, 623-27; trade with Venice, 43, 44-46
116; views on usury, 122, 623-25 Numerary system, 31-33, 51, 54, 357;
Muhammad, 197, 623-24 limitation of issue, 62; see also Fiat
Mullins, Eustace: Aldrich Plan, 524, 525; money
Federal Reserve System, 522-23, 526, Nummi, (Roman) 39
537, 539, 560 Nummulary system, 50
Munro, Dana Carlton, 137, 139 “Nummus Spartaeus,” 33
Murphy, Archibald, 437 Nussbaum, Arthur, 436
Muslims. See Moslems O
Muys Van Holz, Nicholas, 239-40 O'Brien, George, 191
N Olivi, Peter, 179
National Bank of Philadelphia, 468 Open market operations, 636
National Banking Act, 1863-64, 467-58, Oresme, Nicolas, 156, 308-09
467-70, 493 Orichalcum, 69
National Banking Association, 467-68 Origin of Central Banking in the United
National banks, 322, 390, 662 States, The (Timberlake,), 407
National Monetary Commission, 518-19 Origin of Metallic Weights and
National System of Political Economy Standards, The (Ridgeway), 16-17, 26
(List), 328-29 Origin of Money, The (Menger), 26
Nature and Xecessfiy ofa Paper Origin of Political Parties in the United
720 Index
States (Van Buren), 392-93 155, 158. 183; fall of Rome, 94, 95-96;
Origin of Rome, The (Block), 42 medieval moneylenders, 158; scarcity
Overmann Act, p. 532 of precious metals, 98
Owen, Robert. 660 Pius XI, Pope, (on the money power)
Owen-Glass bill, 523-24 568-71
“Owl,” (Athenian coin) 28 “Placcats,” (Dutch), 233
p Plato, 54; nature of money, 35-36, 656
Page, Walther Hines, 537 Pliny, 41, 59, 61, 88, 92
Paine, Thomas, 383-84, 435, 674; contra Plutarch, 21, 31-32, 40, 67
Bank of England, 292; continental Plutocracy, 666
currency, 386, 434; social security plan, Political economists, 307-10; Currency
562-63; view of money, 409-10 school versus Banking school, 331-32
Pakistan, 625, 627 priesthood for banket's theology, 305
Palestinian State, President supports, 681 Polybius, 32
Panic of 1857, 454 “Ponderata,” 313
Panic of 1907, 517-18 Pontiac (Indian chief), 364
Paper money: colonial America, 367-69; Pontifex Maximus, 68, 78, 83, 91, 212;
Confederate money, 465-66; England, control over Rome's money, 68, 78
268-69, 287; gold/silver backing a ruse, Populism, 508, 510, 512, 532
347, 529-30; Marx, 350; United States, Populist Revolt, The (Hicks), 510
362, 404, 414-15, 392, 396, 397, 434, Portugal, (and the Cape Route), 220
529-30; see also specific headings, e.g.: Postal Savings System, 517
Fiat money; Greenbacks Pound, Ezra, 522, 533
Parallel Lf yes (Plutarch), 21, 31-32, 40 Precious metals: drain to east, 7, 64-76;
Parish, David, 417 plunder, 109, 145, 217, 232; scarcity,
Parkes, James, 134, 135, 257-59, 260 98; unnecessary for money, throughout;
Paterson, William, 228, 279, 280, 285, see also specific metals, e.g.: Gold; Silver
290, 526, 527 Precious Metals, The (Jacob). 97, 350-51
Patman, Wright, 532, 664, 674 Price, 178
Paulus, Julius, 79; nature of money, 656 Price, Bonamy, 491-92
Pausanius, 21 Price indexes, 462-63
Pawnbrokers, 161, 167 Price, J. L., 238, 247
Payer, Cheryl, 620-21 Primitive Money (Einzig), 11
Peel, Robert, 332 Private banks, 158-61, 355-56;
Peisistratos, 28 Barcelona, 161; central banks, 518;
Pelanor, (Spartan money) 32, 45 land banks, 366; merchant banks, 159-
Pennsylvania, 370-71 60; Smith, 319-20, 359, 421; state-
Pennsylvania Bank, 385, 390 chartered banks, 436-37; United States,
Penny: Anglo-Saxon penny, 254; silver 436-37, 450
penny, 110-1 I Private money, 162, 335; compared to
Persian money standard, 26 government money, Chapter 16; forbid
Peruzzi, Emilio, 43, 44-45, 48 den in colonies, 375-76; immorality of,
Pesoa, Francesco, 222 661-63; Marx, 352
Petty, William, 228, 325, 341-42 Protestant Ethics and the SpfTit of
Piccoli (Venetian coin), 124 Capftalism (Weber), 201, 202
Piracy, 215 Ptolemies, 87-88
Pirenne, Henri, 98, 100, 103, 152, 154, Public Economy ofAthens, The (Boeckh),
INDEX 721
17-18 287, 291, 324; Bank of England, 291-

Punic Wars (destroy Roman money), 63-66 92, 347; national banks, 421; attacks
Puritanism, 198, 201 national debt, 290-91
Ridgeway, William, 5, 16, 20, 26, 50-51
Quadragesimo Anno (Pius XI), 568-71 Ridley, 48
“Quadrigatus” (Roman coin series), 54 Rizeamon, Minomura (the “Man from
Quantity of money. See Money supply Nowhere”), 484
Querest (Berkeley), 317, 358 Roberts, Stephen N., 595
Quiggin, A.H., 10, 16, 17 Robinson, E.S.G., 61
Quigley, Carroll, 520, 577, 578, 641 Rogers, J.E. Thorold, 337-38, 358, 359,
491; charges a conspiracy, 337
R “Roma,” (coinage) 54
Rae, John, 329 Roman Coins (Mattingly), 60
Raguet, Condy, 418-19, 421, 437-38 Roman monetary system, 31, 34, 39-79,
Raithby, John, 319 83-105; drain of money supply to
Ramo secco design (Aes Signatum), 45, 46 east, 75-76, 88-89; a fiat money, 51-54;
Ramsay, , 148-49 private money, 61-62; “Romano,” 54;
Rand, Ayn, 180, 567, 568, 677; method- war and, 65-66, 73; see also Pontifex
ological error, obstacle to reform, and Maximus
poor economic thought, 677-79; Roosevelt, Franklin, 554, 610; closing of
Russian born as Anna Rosenberg, 678 banks, 556
Randall, J.G., 455, 464, 485 Rostovtzef, M., 87
Ranney, Rufus P., 470 Roth, Cecil, 122, 134-35, 238, 259, 260,
Raymond, Daniel, 420, 426 262, 273
Real bills doctrine, 516, 524, 529, 535, 542 Rothbard, Murray, 677
Reconstruction Finance Corporation , 558 Rothschild, Alfred de, 501
Reformation, 192-203, 207, 209 Rothschild, James, 487, 498
Refutation of Menger’s Theory of the Rubios, Palacias, 213
Origin ofMoney (Zarlenga), 36, endnote 6 Rueff, Jacques, 629
Reichsbank, 579, 581, 583, 584-90, 592,
s
594, 597
Reichsmark, 579, 588-89 Sabath, A.J., 549-50
Reinhardt Program (Hitler's), 594 Sadler, Thomas Michael, 338-39
Religion: and Greenbacks, 471-72; and Saladin, 138-39, 141
origins of money, 9, 11-12; sacred gold Saracenate, 137
coinage prerogative, 83-84, 90; usury, Scarabs, as money, 15
340; see also specific topics, Schacht, Hjalmar Horace Greeley, 585-
e.g.: Christianity; Temples 90; Baghdad railroad, 576; Feder,
Rentenbank, 585, 588 592-97, 599; international currency,
Rentenmark, 584-86, 588-89 604; just price, 177-79; Reichsbank,
“Requiremento,” 212-13 580, 583; reveals cause of German
Rerum Novarum (Pope Leo XIII), 569 hyperinflation, 586-88; Treaty of
Reserves. See Bank reserves Versailles, 579
Resumption Act, 493-95 Schiff, Jakob, 517
Revolutionary War, 376-86 Schlieffen Plan, 577
Riba (Islamic) 625 Schliemann, Heinrich, 20, 42
Ricardo, David, 287-92, 323, 330, 419, Scholasticism, 177-89, 203, 307; usury,
462; attacks private money creation, 122, 181-89
722 Index
Schuckers, J.W., 380, 381 views, 101; misnamed classical school,

Schumpeter, Joseph, 189 102-03; colonial money, 374; commod
Schwartz, Anna, see Friedman, M. ity money, 335, 349, 357, 404, 419,
Schweitzer, Pierre Paul, 616 530; national bank, 404; free market
Scott, Kenneth, 380, 381 ideology, 552-53, 554, 614, 677, 680;
Scott, William A., 524, 527 interest, 323-24; labor theory of value,
Securities regulation, 562 350; Marx and, 349-51, 355, 359;
Seltman, Charles, 33, 61 money supply, 351; national banks,
Servius Tullius, King of Rome, 46, 48, 65 406; private banks, 319-20, 359, 421;
Sesterce,(money unit) 50, 56, 62, 88 Scottish banking, 148; selfishness error,
Seyd, Ernest, 499-500 312, 329; usury, 342; value of gold
Seymour, Horatio, 487-88 and silver, 102, 219; warfare, 291,
Shaftesbury, Anthony Ashley, Earl of, 338-39 293; see also Classical economics
Shakespeare, William, 341, 651 Social Security Act (1935), 562-63
Shaw, Leslie M., 516-17, 533 “Societas,” (type of medieval loan) 181
Shaw, W.A., 217, 254-55, 265-66, 271, 482 SOCfOlogical Theory of Capital (Rae), 329
Sherman Act, 501 Soddy, Frederick, 564; against free
Sherman, John, 493-94 banking, 660; devises 100% reserve
Short History of Paper Money and solution, 672
Banking, A (Gouge), 439 Solon, 5, 26, 29, 30, 31, 50
Short selling, 239-40; Sombart, Werner, 192, 200
“Sidareos,” (iron money) 33 Sou d'Or, 114
Silver, 17, 19, 54; demonetization, 40, 41, South Sea Bubble, 292-
331, 481-82, 483-84, 492, 495-98; South Sea Company, 292-93, 296, 297-
“Crime of 73”, 495; exported from 99, 301, 309
west to east, 85-90, 100, 116, 124; Spain, (effect of American plunder), 217
monetization, 13, 14, 17, 22-34; remon Spartan numerary system, 31-33, 357
etization, 500-01; Rome, 40, 41; United Spaulding, E.G., 455-56
States, 563-64; valuation, 33; see also Special Drawing Rights (SDR), 604, 616, 618
Gold/silver ratio Spinoza, Baruch, (ostracized), 238
Silver coins, 110-11, 123, 124; Brugge, Sprague, Oliver M., 518
168; Carthage, 114; Greece, 28- Spufford, Peter: Anglo-Saxon penny, 253;
29, 33; Rome, 54, 56, 75, 91, 100; German capital towns, 575-76; gold,
Venice, 122, 124; see also specific 114, 124; mints, 155, 156; Oresme,
coins, e.g. Grosso 309; silver, 97, 154
Silver Purchase Act (1934), 563-64 StabilizatfOn of the Mark, The (Schacht), 587
Silver question, 510-12; see also Stahl, Alan M., 121
Bimetallism; Coinage; Currency Act Stanhope, Charles, 301
of March 14, 1900; Gold State Theory of Money, The (Knapp), 4,
Simons, Henry C., 672 482, 590-91
Slave trade, 94, 294; and debt, 33; and Statutum Judaico, (England), 261
Jews, 134-35; United States, 471-72 Stock Market Crash, (1929), 548-52
Smallwood, E. Mary, 89-90 “Stoppage of the Exchecquer,” 269
Smith, Adam, 5, 43, 105, 289, 310-17, Strabo, 19
336, 369, 552-53, 554, 679; Bank of Strauss, Robert, (family bank fraud), 470
England, 284, 327-28, 397, 407; central Strong, Benjamin, 526-27, 529, 536, 540,
bank, 407-08; classical monetary 541, 546-47
INDEX 723
Studenski, P., and Kroos, H, 408, 454, 525, Tiberius Gracchus, 66-67
542, 551, 565; Bank of the United States, Tiepolo Querini Conspiracy, 123
417; central banking, 523; Greenbacks, Timberlake, Richard, 407
465; Panic of 1907, 517; private banks, Timotheus, 33
436, Kuhn Loeb & Co., 517, 524, 526. Tin money, 33
Suasso, Isaac Lopez, 272, 273 Tobacco, as money, 215
Suetonius, 44 Tool money, 15-16, 32; Mexico, 214
“Suffolk system,” 441 Tornesello, Venetian 125-26
Sulla, 67 Tovey, D'Blossiers, 237, 261-62, 253, 254
Summenhart, Conrad, 188 Toward a Just Monetary System
Sumner, William Graham, 366, 377, 406, (Chopra), 625
438, 458-59, 497 Townsend, E.D., 219
Supply and demand, 17, 18, 19, 20, 102, 105 Townshend, Charles, 299, 309-10
Survey of Primitive Money, A (Quiggen), 11 Toynbee, Arnold, 55, 63-64, 65
Sutherland, C.H.V. 60 Trade fairs, 152, 605
Symon, Thomas, 266 Trade and Politics in Ancient Greece
T (Hasebroek), 23-24
Tacitus, 19 Tragedy and Hope (Quigley), 520, 541
Taine, Hippolyte, 273 “Treasurers of the Gods,” 25
Takaki, Masayoshi, 484 Treatise on Money (Keynes), 559-60
Takatoshi, Sokubei, 484 Triens, 111
Talanton, (Homer's), 26 Triple Contract (usury avoidance), 188
Tallies, (English), 264-65 Triumph of Conservatism, The (Kolko), 512
Taney, Roger, 425 Troelstch, Ernst, 149, 192, 197, 198
Tariff, 88 Tuchers of Nurenberg, 167
Tawney, 576 “2 '/2 unit,” of Rome, 45-46, 49, 50
Tawney, R.H., 197; Baghdad railway, Two Nations, The (Hollis), 266-68
576; Puritanism, 198, 200
Taxation, 254, 564 Unger, Irwin, 464, 472, 473, 489, 492-93
Tcherikover, Victor, 75 Unholy Crusade, The (Godfrey), 142
Temple and the Lodge, The (Baigent and United States: banking fraud, 653;
Leigh), 141 coinage, 409; colonial money, 361-86,
Temple cults, 16-21 434; Country Pay period, 364-65; fed
Temple, William, Archbishop, 571 eral budget, 653-54; monetary pollcy,
Temples: as banks, 24-26, 70, 79; conse 433-5 l ; monetary power, 389-429;
cration process, 18-19, and prostitution, 19 monetary reform. 656, 658-84; paper
“Ten-hours bill,” 338-39 money, 434-35; private banks, 436-45;
Terrorism, war on, 680-81 reform of monetary system, 658-94; see
Tewksbury, D.S., 471 also specific headings, e.g.: Constitu-
Theodosian code, 89 tional Convention, Federal Reserve
Theory of Money and Credit, The (Von System, Great Depression, Greenbacks
Mises), 4 United States Monetary Commission, 498
Thermopylae, 90 Urban III, Pope, 183
Theory of Moral Sentiments (Smith), 329 Usher, A., 175
Theseus, 21, 25 Usury, 122, 177-203, 336-59, 674-75;
Thomas Aquinas, St., 178-79, 184, 185, 194 agricultural loans, 13-14, 29; Aristotle, 35,
Thomsen, Rudi, 48, 50, 51-52, 59, 60-61 184-85, 188, 341, 343-44; Bank of
Tiberius, Emperor, 75 England's manipulation of money as,
724 Index
278, 336, 340; Calvinism and, 196; def Westerman, William Linn, 16
inition, 340, 342; England, 259-61; Western, Charles, on deflation effects, 331
Islam, 625; “macro usury,” 340-41 Weston, George, 495
mathematical impossibility of long- Whipple, John, impossibility of long term
term usury, 346; Pennsylvania, 370- usury, legal concept of money, refutes
71; riskless usury, 346; scholastic Bentham 345-46, 674-75
view, 178-81, 189; Triple Contract, 188 White, Andrew Dickson, 446, 447-50
V White, Henry, 576-77
Van Buren, Martin, 392, 426-28, 435; White, Henry Dexter, 609-10
Bank of the United States, 422, 424-25, Whittlesey, Charles R., 672
454; Hamilton, 399, 402-03; Wicksell, Knut, 185-86; usury, 189
Independent Treasury System, 426; Wilbur, E.J., 454
Van Dillen, J.G., 228, 232, 233, 237-38, 247 Will, Moses, 263
VanderLip, Frank, 523, 525 William III, King of England, 272-73
Vaughan, Rice, 351 William of Auxerre, 183
Venice, 96, 103, 115-29, 142, 220 Willing, Thomas, 389, 391, 403
Ver Steeg, Clarence L., 391 Willis, H. Parker, 484, 543, 521, 523-24,
Victoriate, (Roman), 59, 62 528, 546
Viner, Jacob, 550-51 Wilson, Charles, 243, 247-48, 249, 273, 274
Von Humboldt, 218 Wilson, Thomas, 196
Von Mikes, Ludwig, 4, 568, 670, 676-77; Wilson, Woodrow, 521, 528, 537, 539
wrongfully attacks Franklin, 4; paper Wissell bank, 228
money, 372; usury, 189 Witherspoon, John, 473; Bank of North
Voorhis, Jerry, 673-74 America, 391; promotes commodity the-
Vreeland, Edward B. See Aldrich- ory of money, 404; paper money, 397-98
Vreeland Act Wooden money, 45
World, The, 487, 488, 489
w
World Bank, 620-21
Wade, John, 340 World Bank Group, 620-22
Walker, Francis Amassa, 18 World History of the Jewish People — The
Walpole, Robert, 309 Dark Ages, 711-1096, The (Roth), 134
Wampum, 363-364 World War I, 536-39, 542, 545, 579
War, and money, 160, 236-37; Bank of World War 11, and money creation, 565
England and, 290; Civil War, 455, 464,
x
486; Flanders, 155; Revolution, 376-
86; Roman monetary system and, 65- Xenophon, on the “division of labor,” 311
66, 73; World War I, 536-39, 542, 545,
579; WWII, 565 Young, Roy A., 546
Warburg, Paul M., 523, 526, 530, 536, Z
539, 547 Zakaa (Islamic), 625
Warren, Josiah, 660 Zarlenga, Stephen, 36, endnote 6
Washington, George, 405 Zarqa, Anas, 626
Wealth of Nations, The (Smith), 148, Zianni, Doge, 120, 127
311, 332, 284, 300, 389, 336, 407 Zimmem, Alfred E., 577-78
Weaver, James B., 509 Zolotas, Xenophon, 612-13
Weber, Max, 192, 201-02 Zulm (Islamic), 625
Webster, Daniel, 424, 425
Welsers of Augsburg, 166

The-Lost-Science-of-Money. Parte 2b

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

The-Lost-Science-of-Money. Parte 2b

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

The-Lost-Science-of-Money. Parte 2b

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

507

TRIUMPH OF THE BANKERS:

“The bankers will favor a course of special legislation to increase

on the grass at the Capitol building!

between two systems, either of which could be controlled by the

19b. J.P. Morgan,

Countries Gold end

Roumsnia, Servia and Bul- ’5

Other Oriental ...

the local situation...and could have supplied the demands of outside

make recommendations on the nation's money and banking system.

But one must consider the work of Georgetown Professor Carroll

that money system.

these names are among the “cream” of America's financial establish-

a bill that he and Professor William A. Scott of the University of

THE BANKERS PRETEND TO OPPOSE THEIR OWN BILL

temporary Aldrich-Vreeland system; the secret Jeckyll Island meeting;

And with the Fed, several important early supporters regretted it

that such an establishment signified. The sensitivity to the injustice of

What determined whether commercial paper was acceptable - i.e. as

them for coinage, the bank would suspend redeemability or go under.

THE INCOME TAX ALSO CREATED IN 1913

when an artificially induced panic in 1906 provided the catalyst for

Kolko, cited above, pp. 24, 7.

Sense Press, 1954), as quoted on p. 94.

(Boston: Christopher Publishing House, 193 l), pp. 260, 283.

'2 Kolko, cited above, p. 234.

°7 Friedman & Schwartz, cited above, p. 193.

Benjamin Strong, Central Banker, (Washington: Brookings, 1958), p. 17.

40 Garrison, cited above, p. 247.

THE FEDERAL RESERVE

“What is banking?...The most dangerous as it is the

“...the result is to make into the master

“...no one can breathe against their will.”

unstable fractional reserve monetary system based on a false concept of

Kemerer of Princeton commented:

WORLD WAR ONE LEAVES THE U.S. IN SERIOUS DEBT

BENJAMIN STRONG AND MONTAGU NORMAN:

the government did the opposite.’6

Dow Jones Industrial Average. 1900-1947

Governor Miller: “I would say it was mainly a social affair.

THE FED CONCENTRATES MONEY IN TOO FEW HANDS

how much power he personally held to avert a crisis:

THE LAST STRAW

Germany, totaling $145 million.

time? To My mind if ever there was an emergency, it is now, and this I

by “laissez-faire,” but requires rational legal limits. Especially damaging

recovery. ..N.I.R.A. [National Industrial Recovery Act of June 1933]

ROOSEVELT “CLOSES” THE BANKS

20f. Franklin Roosevelt understood the possibility of revolution and

SUMMARY OF DEPRESSION WORK AND RELIEF

mention of the events of American monetary history, certainly the most

* Their power over reserve requirements, rediscount rates, and market

SECURITIES LAW CHANGES

stockpile reached one-third the value of the U.S. gold stockpile.

should Americans be blamed if they demanded more than money penalties

admitted their failure and have abdicated. Practices of the unscrupulous

Then in 1987 he was appointed Chairman of the Fed.

20g. Pope Pius XI's 1931 encycli-

20h. Archbishop of Canterbury William Temple's eloquent 1942 statement